Thorn Technical Handbook

Lighting people and places
Thorn Lighting Main Offices

Australia
Thorn Lighting Pty Limited
43 Newton Road, Wetherill Park
NSW 2164
Tel:
(02) 8786 6000
Fax:
(02) 9612 2700
E-mail:
infoaustralia@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.com.au
Austria
Thorn Licht GmbH
Donau-City-Strae 11,
1220 Wien, Austria
Tel:
(43) 1 202 66 11
Fax:
(43) 1 202 66 11 12
E-mail:
office.at@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.at
China
Thorn Lighting (Guangzhou) Operations Ltd,
No.12 Lian Yun Road, Eastern Section,
GETDD, Guangzhou 510530, China
Tel:
(86) 20 3228 2706
Fax:
(86) 20 3228 1777
E-mail:
sales.cn@thornlighting.com
Thorn Lighting (Tianjin) Co. Ltd
332 Hongqi Road, Tianjin 300190,
China
Tel:
(86) 22 8369 2303
Fax:
(86) 22 8369 2302
E-mail:
info.tj@thornlighting.com
Czech Republic
Thorn Lighting CS spol. s.r.o.,
Na Bezince 6/930, 150 00 Praha 5
Czech Republic
Tel:
(420) 224 315 252
Fax:
(420) 233 326 313
E-mail:
thorn.cz@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.cz
France
Thorn Europhane SA
156 Boulevard Haussmann,
Cedex 08, Paris 75379, France
Tel:
(33) 1 49 53 6262
Fax:
(33) 1 49 53 6240
Website: www.thornlighting.fr
Hong Kong
Thorn Lighting (Hong Kong) Limited
Unit 4301, Level 43, Tower 1,
Metroplaza,223 Hing Fong Road,
Kwai Chung, N.T., Hong Kong
Tel:
(852) 2578 4303
Fax:
(852) 2887 0247
E-mail:
info.hk@thornlighting.com
Ireland
Thorn Lighting (Ireland) Limited
320 Harolds Cross Road,
Dublin 6W, Ireland
Tel:
(353) 1 4922 877
Fax:
(353) 1 4922 724
E-mail:
dublinsales@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.co.uk
Italy
Thorn Europhane Spa
Via G Di Vittorio, 2, Cadriano di Granarolo,
Bologna 40057, Italy
Tel:
(39) 051 763391
Fax:
(39) 051 763088
E-mail:
info@thornlighting.it
Website: www.thornlighting.it
New Zealand
Thorn Lighting (NZ) Ltd
399 Rosebank Road, P O Box 71134,
Rosebank, Auckland 7, New Zealand
Tel:
(64) 9 828 7155
Fax:
(64) 9 828 7591
E-mail:
info.NZ@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.co.nz
Norway
Thorn Lighting AS
Strmsveien 344, 1081 Oslo,
Norway
Tel:
(47) 22 82 07 00
Fax:
(47) 22 82 07 01
E-mail:
info.no@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.no
Poland
Thorn Lighting Polska Sp.z.o.o.,
Ul. Gazowa 26A, Wrocaw 50-513,
Poland
Tel:
(48) 71 7833 740
Fax:
(48) 71 3366 029
E-mail:
thorn.pl@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.pl
Russia
Thorn Lighting
Novoslobodskaya Str., 21, office 406
Business Center Novoslobodskaya 21,
Moscow 127030, Russia
Tel:
(7) 495 981 35 41
Fax:
(7) 495 981 35 42
E-mail:
anna.kisteneva@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.ru
Singapore
Thorn Lighting (Singapore) Pte Ltd
5 Kaki Bukit Crescent, 04-02 Koyotech
Building, 416238 Singapore
Tel:
(65) 6844 5800
Fax:
(65) 6745 7707
E-mail:
info.sg@thornlighting.com
Sweden
Thorn Lighting AB
Industrigatan, Box 305, SE-261 23
Landskrona, Sweden
Tel:
(46) 418 520 00
Fax:
(46) 418 265 74
E-mail:
info.se@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.se
United Arab Emirates
Thorn Lighting Ltd Dubai
Al Shoala Building, Office 301,
Block E, Airport road, P.O. Box 1200,
Deira, Dubai, UAE
Tel:
(971) 4 2940181
Fax:
(971) 4 2948838
E-mail:
tlluae@emirates.net.ae
Website: www.thornlighting.com
Thorn Gulf LLC
Al Shoala Building, Office 301/2, Block E,
Airport road, P.O. Box 22672, Deira,
Dubai, UAE
Tel:
(971) 4 2948938
Fax:
(971) 4 2948838
E-mail:
thorng@emirates.net.ae
United Kingdom
Thorn Lighting Limited
Silver Screens, Elstree Way, Borehamwood,
Hertfordshire, WD6 1FE, UK
Tel:
(44) 20 8732 9800
Fax:
(44) 20 8732 9801
E-mail:
brochures.uk@thornlighting.com
Thorn Olympics Sports Lighting Team
Tel:
07796 303176
E-mail:
olympicsteamuk@thornlighting.com
International Sales
Tel:
(44) 20 8732 1915
Fax:
(44) 20 8732 1911
E-mail:
international_sales@thornlighting.com
www.thornlighting.com
Thorn Lighting is constantly developing and improving its products. All descriptions, illustrations, drawings and specifications in this publication present only
general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. The right is reserved to change specifications without prior notification or public announcement.
All goods supplied by the company are supplied subject to the companys General Conditions of Sale, a copy of which is available on request.
All measurements are in millimetres and weights in kilograms unless otherwise stated.
Publication No: 434 (INT) Publication Date: 06/08
Technical Handbook
Technical Handbook
Denmark
Thorn Lighting A/S
Albuen 44, 6000 Kolding, Denmark
Tel:
(45) 7696 3600
Fax:
(45) 7696 3601
E-mail:
info.dk@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.dk
India
Thorn Lighting India Pvt. Ltd
RH-2 Nirav CHS, 636A, 90 Ft. D.P. Road,
Near Thakur Polytechnic
400 101 Mumbai, India
Tel:
(91) 22285 41056
Fax:
(91) 22285 1120
E-mail:
Glossary
Editor
Peter Thorns BSc(Hons) CEng MCIBSE MSLL
Contributors
Patricia El-Baamrani; Lou Bedocs; Karl Flax; Stefan Hauer;
Pat Holley; Hugh King; Jan-Erik Jerleke; Iain Macrae;
Robin Ostlin; Paul Stranks
This is the fifth edition of the Technical Handbook
Copyright Thorn Lighting. All rights reserved. No part of
this publication may be reproduced in any form, without
prior permission in writing from Thorn Lighting, except for the
quotation of brief passages in reviews. While Thorn has made
every effort to credit the copyright owners for the illustrations
and photographs used herein, there may be omissions, for
which the company apologises.
Picture credits:
Danny Maddocks; Chris Gascoigne; Mike Gee;
Richard Seymour and Alan Turner
Graphics: Juice Creative
Price 15 GBP/20 EUR. Not for resale.
Spill Light
Stray light from a luminaire that incidentally illuminates nearby
objects or surfaces within the public environment. Can be a
cause of light trespass.
Spine
See batten
Track
A linear bus bar system providing one to three main circuits or
a low voltage supply to which display lighting (spotlights) can
be connected and disconnected at will along the length of the
system.
Transformer
Transformers reduce the line voltage (for instance 230V) to
the lower voltage required for operating low-voltage halogen
lamps. This will generally be 12V.
Trunking
Trunking usually provides mechanical fixings for the luminaires
as well as electrical connection.
Uniformity
The ratio of the minimum illuminance to the average illuminance
over the specified area.
Visual performance
The ability to perceive detail and carry out the visual tasks.
Visual comfort
Our feeling of ease or well being within the visual field.
Visual satisfaction
The qualitative impression of a lit space.
Glossary
| 251
Contents
1
Introduction
The Mechanics of Seeing

2.1 What is light?
2.2 The eye and vision
2.3 Lighting fundamentals
7
7
7
8
Controlling Light
3.1 Reflection
3.2 Transmission
3.3 Refraction
9
9
10
10
Recommendations for Good Lighting

4.1 Indoor workplaces
4.2 Outdoor workplaces
4.3 Sports
4.4 Emergency
4.5 Roads
4.6 Amenity
4.7 Tunnel
4.8 Lighting scheme surveys
11
13
21
24
29
30
33
34
35
Applications and Techniques

5.1 General Considerations
5.2 Office
5.3 Education
5.4 Industry indoor
5.5 Industry outdoor
5.6 Healthcare
5.7 Super/hypermarket
5.8 Road lighting
5.9 Urban decorative roadlighting and amenity areas
5.10 Urban architectural floodlighting
5.11 Sports lighting
39
39
42
48
55
62
69
78
86
94
105
109
Specific Techniques
6.1 Indoor lighting controls (ILC)
6.2 Lighting for display screen equipment
6.3 Light for learning
6.4 Emergency lighting
6.5 Low mount road lighting
6.6 Road tunnel lighting
125
125
131
133
137
145
149
Contents
|3
6.7 Lighting maintenance

6.8 Control of obtrusive light
6.9 Lighting for crime prevention
6.10 Lighting and health
6.11 Sustainability
6.12 Outdoor lighting controls (OLC)
152
162
167
171
174
177
Checklists
7.1 Life cycle analysis
7.2 Economics
7.3 Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI)
181
181
183
185
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

8.1 Choosing the right lamp
8.2 Tungsten halogen lamps
8.3 Fluorescent lamps
8.4 Compact fluorescent lamps
8.5 Metal halide lamps
8.6 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps
8.7 Mercury vapour lamps
8.8 Induction lamps
8.9 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
8.10 Lamp coding systems LBS/ILCOS
8.11 Characteristic values of the major lamps
8.12 Energy efficiency of luminaires
8.13 Circuits
8.14 Properties of electronic ballasts
8.15 Voltage drop
8.16 Fusing
8.17 Wiring regulations
8.18 Fault detection
191
191
193
193
196
197
198
199
200
200
204
206
219
219
223
225
226
227
229
Standards and Directives

9.1 Directives
9.2 Standards
9.3 Quality and safety marks
9.4 Product/corrosion compatibility guide
233
233
235
237
240
10 Tools

10.1 Tools
243
243
11 Glossary
246
4|
1 Introduction
Light is life, without light we could not live.
Our human physiology is based upon light and
the complex structure of our earth relies upon
light to function. And as we have progressed
technologically we have taken this further,
turning the dark into light, from using fire to
the electric light. Electric lighting is the basis for
our modern society, turning darkness into light
in windowless or deep-plan offices, in our city
streets at night, in numerous leisure and amenity
facilities. Our society exists as it does because
of light. Our patterns of work and leisure are
made possible through our ability to control our
environment and supply light on demand.
As we have developed the technology of lighting we have
also developed our understanding of how to use light. Through
standards we lay down limits for safety and adequacy, through
guides we direct lighting toward established good practice,
show how to transcend the adequate. We have learnt how to
give light meaning, transforming spaces by giving them a lit
atmosphere, applying light to give beauty to a scene.
But the use of light is constantly challenging us. It is no longer
enough to ensure good task visibility, or a comfortable
environment. It is not even enough to produce an environment
that gives a sense of well-being. We need to do all these,
but also in a way that minimises harm to the environment.
Therefore stricter rules are being applied to product design, use
and disposal. We have to minimise the carbon footprint of a
product or an installation and maximise sustainability. Therefore,
all aspects of design, whether for a luminaire or lighting
installation, is a balance of factors, a balance of performance,
efficiency and comfort (PEC).
Fig. 1.1 A
menity lighting creating a pleasant
balanced scene
Performance is the achievement of visual effectiveness, meeting

requirements and targets. It is quantifiable through known
lighting measures such as illuminance, luminance, glare rating,
colour rendition and uniformity. These measures are generally
defined through national and international standards and
recommendations.
Introduction
|5
Efficiency is conserving energy and effort, reducing CO2

emissions and waste, producing a system that is practical and
efficient to install, operate and maintain. Efficiency can also be
quantified, through units such as lumens/watt, cost/m2, CO2
kg/year, percent recycled element, percent maintenance link,
and many others. Some of these measures are defined through
national and international standards and recommendations,
such as energy efficiency or the ecodesign of products, whilst
others are concerns for the end-user, such as cost.
Comfort is the achievement of complete satisfaction, providing
a stimulating atmosphere that gives sustainable wellness. The
criteria for assessing comfort are subjective and are the criteria
that differentiate the design, that give the design its individuality,
its own character. Is it calming/stimulating/inspiring,
welcoming and pleasant, reassuring, fulfilling? Does it have a
pleasing flow of light and give a well balanced ambient? Do
all parts of the design complement each other, the architecture
of the space, the lit effect, and the physical design of the
luminaires? This is the point where the engineering and art are
blended to produce good lighting.
So in their job the designer needs to know a wide selection
of information and how to blend this to deliver better lighting,
with better efficiency and a better environment in a sustainable
manner. This is the PEC philosophy, and in this handbook we
supply some of this information to help the designer in their task.
6 | Introduction
2 The Mechanics of Seeing

Our discernment of the world is via our five
senses of sight, hearing, taste, touch and smell.
Of these sight is the most important. Over 80 per
cent of our experience of the world comes via
our sight. But how do we see?
2.1 What is light?

To see we need light, and light is an emission of
electromagnetic radiation. The electromagnetic spectrum varies
from radio waves through infrared, ultra-violet, X-rays and finally
to gamma rays, and light is a very small part of this spectrum
with wavelengths from 380 to 760 nanometres (1nm=10-9m).
This is the part of the spectrum whose rays are visible to the
human eye and lies between infrared and ultra-violet. Light may
be further divided as the wavelength of the light relates to the
colour we see. As the wavelength changes so does the colour
of the light, from blue at 400nm to red at 700nm.
Vision
80%
Other
senses
20%
Fig. 2.1 The importance of vision
380 400
WAVELENGHT (nanometers)
500
600
700
2.2 The eye and vision

Rays of light entering the eye are directed onto the retina, which
is a layer of light sensitive cells within the eye. The retina is
composed of two basic types of light sensitive cells, the rods
and the cones. These cells have different properties. Cones
operate during the day and enable us to see in detailed colour
(photopic vision). As the light level drops, say to that of a well-lit
street, the cones become less effective and are assisted by the
more sensitive rods (mesopic vision). However, the rods only
give black and white vision. Therefore we see a less brightly
coloured view as we are using a mixture of the rod and cone
cells, the relative mixture varying depending upon the actual
light level. At much lower light levels, say that of dim moonlight,
the cones cease to function at all, and our vision becomes
totally monochromatic using just the rods (scotopic vision). The
unit for this measure of light is the lumen.
These concepts are important as we consider the appearance
of a space under different lighting conditions with respect to the
amount of light and the colour spectrum of the light.
760
VISIBLE LIGHT
GAMMA
X
RAYS
RAYS
ULTRA
VOILET
INFRA
RED
RADIO
Fig. 2.2 The electromagnetic spectrum
Photopic
vision (day)
100%
400
500
600
700
800
Scotopic vision
(dark adapted
eye)
Photopic
vision (day)
100%
400
500
600
700
800
Fig. 2.3 P hotopic and Scotopic visual response

curves
The Mechanics of Seeing
|7
2.3 Lighting fundamentals

2.3.1 Illuminance (E) - This is a measure of the amount of
light falling onto an object, and is measured in lux. It is the
amount of luminous flux (F) that is received by a surface of given
area.
2.3.2 Luminance (L) - This is a measure of the amount
of light reflected by an object and is measured in cd/m.
It is the amount of luminous flux (F, lumens) that is emitted by
a surface of given area and is dependant upon the properties
of the surface (e.g. reflection, refraction and transmission.
See section 3 on controlling light). The value of luminance
at a point on a surface can therefore vary dependant upon
the observer viewpoint.
2.3.3 Glare - Glare is the result of excessive contrasts of
luminance in the field of view. The effect may vary from mild
discomfort to an actual impairment of the ability to see. When
the ability to see is impaired this is called disability glare.
Discomfort glare refers to the discomfort or distraction caused
by bright windows or luminaires.
Fig. 2.4 Illuminance
Fig. 2.5 Luminance
Glare may be calculated in a variety of ways depending upon

the application. So for example in interiors the Unified Glare
Rating (UGR) is calculated. Similarly for sports lighting
applications Glare Rating (GR) is used and for street lighting
Threshold Increment (TI) is calculated. All of these methods,
whilst using different parameters are essentially the ratio of
luminaire brightness to background brightness.
Fig. 2.6 G
lare from indoor luminaires with poor
optical control
8 | The Mechanics of Seeing
3 Controlling Light
When we light an object, be it a space such as
a room or a sports field, or part of a luminaire
such as a louvre or diffuser, we do not see the
light that falls onto a surface or object. What
we actually see is the effect of light upon the
object. Different materials affect light in different
ways, for example paper reflects light differently
to polished metal and the lit effect is different
again for glass. To understand how a surface or
object will look we need a basic understanding
of reflection, transmission and refraction, the
principal ways materials react to light.
3.1 Reflection
As mentioned above paper reflects light differently to polished
metal. This is because paper exhibits what we term matt or
diffuse reflection whilst polished metal exhibits what we term
specular reflection. With diffuse reflection the light reflected from
a surface is scattered equally in all directions.
Fig. 3.1 Diffuse reflection
With specular reflection the light reflects from a surface as if

from a mirror, producing a sharp-mirrored image. For any ray
of light striking a specular surface the angle of incidence of the
light is equal to the angle at which the ray of light is reflected.
Some surfaces exhibit a mixture of diffuse and specular
reflection, showing a fuzzy mirrored image. For this the peak
reflection still obeys the rule of angle of incidence equals angle
of reflection but light is also diffusely scattered around this peak.
Fig. 3.2 Specular reflection
Fig. 3.3 Mixed specular and diffuse reflection
Controlling light
|9
3.2 Transmission
Certain materials have the ability to transmit and diffuse light.
When light falls on a translucent (light transmitting) material
some light will be reflected in a specular manner, and some
light will pass through the material. For a clear material, such
as clear glass, the light will pass through with a minimum of
scattering. However for materials such as opal plastic the light
is scattered or diffused, therefore spreading the brightness of the
light ray over a larger area. (See Fig.3.4)
3.3 Refraction
Fig. 3.4 T ransmission of a ray of light through a

translucent material
When light passes from one transparent medium to another of

different density (e.g. air to glass) it bends. This is known as
refraction and this principle is used to control light, for example
using prisms. In luminaires prisms are used to direct light away
from areas that could cause glare or waste light and into areas
that produce more useful light, thereby making the luminaire
more efficient at illuminating a task or object. (See Fig. 3.5)
Fig. 3.5 R efraction of a ray of light through a

prismatic panel
10 | Controlling light
4 Recommendations for good lighting

The recommendations for good lighting give
practical values for various lighting criteria,
depending upon the application. The
recommendations are drawn from a variety of
documents, the principle documents being:
Section 4.1 Indoor workplaces

EN 12464-1:2002 Light and Lighting Lighting of work places
Part 1: Indoor work places and CIE S 008:2001
Section 4.2 Outdoor workplaces

EN 12464-2:2007 Lighting of work places
Part 2 : Outdoor work places and CIE S 015:2005
Section 4.3 Sports

EN 12193: 2007 Light and Lighting Sports Lighting
Section 4.4 Emergency

EN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007 Emergency Lighting
Section 4.5 Roads

EN 13201 1-4 Road lighting practice
Section 4.6 Tunnel

CR 14380:2003 Lighting Applications Tunnel Lighting
Note that these recommendations are based upon the European

norms and local regulations may stipulate different values.
| 11
Recommendations for good lighting

Whilst these limiting values may be considered to be the
minimum design criteria additional factors should be taken into
account to ensure a good lighting installation. Some of these
factors are described in other sections of this book.
The criteria used in the recommendations are defined below.
Em
This is the maintained average illuminance, that is the

minimum value for average illuminance provided during
the maintenance cycle of the installation.
Emin
This is the minimum value of illuminance that is

permissible within any calculation or measurement grid.
GRL
This is maximum value of glare rating that is permissible

in any direction within any measurement or calculation
grid.
Lm
This is the maintained average luminance, that is the

minimum value for average luminance provided during
the maintenance cycle of the installation.
Ra
This is the colour rendering index for a lamp and defines

the ability of a lamp to show different colours correctly.
SR
This is the surround ratio, which is a value used in

the design of road lighting applications. It is the ratio
of the average illuminance of a strip just outside the
carriageway compared to the average illuminance of a
strip just inside the carriageway
TI
This is the threshold increment, which is a measure of

the loss of visibility caused by the disability glare of the
luminaires in an installation.
UGRL This is the limiting maximum value of glare calculated by

the unified glare rating method.
Ul
This is the uniformity of illuminance along a line, being

defined as the minimum illuminance value within a
line of measurement points divided by the average
illuminance value of the line of measurement points
(Emin_line/Em_line).
Uo
This is the uniformity of illuminance across any

calculation or measurement grid, being defined as the
minimum illuminance value within a grid of measurement
points divided by the average illuminance value of a
grid of measurement points (Emin/Em).
12 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
Recommendations for good lighting

4.1 Indoor workplaces
Type of task or activity
Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings
Traffic Zones
Circulation areas and corridors
Stairs, escalators, travalators
Loading ramps/bays
Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms
Canteens, pantries
Rest rooms
Rooms for physical exercise
Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets
Sick bay
Rooms for medical attention
Control rooms
Plant rooms, switch gear rooms
Post room, switchboard
Store rooms, cold stores
Store and stockrooms
Dispatch packing handling areas
Storage rack areas
Gangways : unmanned
Gangways : manned
Control stations
Industrial activities and crafts
Agriculture
Loading and operating of goods, handling equipment and machinery
Buildings for livestock
Sick animal pens, calving stalls
Food preparation, dairy, utensil washing
Bakeries
Preparation and baking
Finishing, glazing, decorating
Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks
Drying
Preparation of materials, work on kilns and mixers
General machine work
Rough forms
Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware
Drying
Preparation, general machine work
Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping simple parts, glazing, glass blowing
Grinding, engraving, glass polishing, shaping precision parts, manufacture of glass instruments
Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand grinding and engraving
Precision work e.g. decorative grinding, hand painting
Manufacture of synthetic precious stones
Em
UGRL
Ra
100
150
150
28
25
25
40
40
40
200
100
300
200
500
500
22
22
22
25
19
16
80
80
80
80
80
90
200
500
25
19
60
80
100
300
25
25
60
60
20
150
150
22
22
40
60
60
200
50
200
200
25
25
25
80
40
80
80
300
500
22
22
80
80
50
200
300
300
28
28
25
25
20
40
80
80
50
300
300
750
750
1000
1500
28
25
25
19
16
16
16
20
80
80
80
80
90
90
| 13
4.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)

Chemical, plastics and rubber industry
Remote-operated processing installations
Processing installations with limited manual intervention
Constantly manned work places in processing installations
Precision measuring rooms, laboratories
Pharmaceutical production
Tyre production
Colour inspection
Cutting, finishing, inspection
Electrical industry
Cable and wire manufacture
Winding
-Large coils
-Medium-sized coils
-Small coils
Coil impregnating
Galvanising
Assembly work
-Rough e.g. large transformers
-Medium e.g. switchboards
-Fine e.g. telephones
-Precision e.g. measuring equipment
Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting
Food stuffs and luxury food industry
Work places and zone in
-Breweries, malting floor
-For washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving, peeling
-Cooking in preserve and chocolate factories
-Work places and zones in sugar factories
-For drying and fermenting raw tobacco, fermentation cellar
Sorting and washing of products, milling, mixing, packing
Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filtering floor in
sugar refineries
Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables
Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes
Inspection of glasses and bottles, product control, trimming, sorting, decoration
Laboratories
Colour inspection
Foundries and metal casting
Man-size underfloor tunnels, cellars, etc.
Platforms
Sand preparation
Dressing room
Work places at cupola and mixer
Casting bay
Shake out areas
Machine moulding
Em
UGRL
Ra
50
150
300
500
500
500
1000
750
300
300
28
25
19
22
22
16
19
25
25
20
40
80
80
80
80
90
80
80
80
300
500
750
300
300
25
22
19
25
25
80
80
80
80
80
300
500
750
1000
1500
25
22
19
16
16
80
80
80
80
80
200
200
200
200
200
300
25
25
25
25
25
25
80
80
80
80
80
80
500
25
80
300
500
500
500
1000
25
22
22
19
16
80
80
80
80
90
50
100
200
200
200
200
200
200
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
40
80
80
80
80
80
80

Hand and core moulding
Die casting
Model building
Hairdressers
Hairdressing
Jewellery manufacturing
Working with precious stones
Manufacture of jewellery
Watch making (manual)
Watch making (automatic)
Laundries and dry cleaning
Goods in, marking and sorting
Washing and dry cleaning
Ironing, pressing
Inspection and repairs
Leather and leather goods
Work on vats, barrels, pits
Fleshing, skiving, rubbing, tumbling of skins
Saddlery work, shoe manufacturer, stitching, sewing, polishing, shaping, cutting, punching
Sorting
Leather dyeing (machine)
Quality control
Colour inspection
Shoe making
Glove making
Metal working and processing
Open die forging
Drop forging
Welding
Rough and average machining: tolerances 0.1mm
Precision machining, grinding: tolerances < 0.1mm
Scribing, inspection
Wire and pipe drawing shops, cold forming
Plate machining: thickness 5mm
Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5mm
Tool making, cutting equipment manufacture
Assembly
Rough
Medium
Fine
Precision
Galvanising
Surface preparation and painting
Tool, template and jig making, precision mechanics, micromechanics
Paper and paper goods
Edge runners, pulp mills
Paper manufacture and processing, paper and corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture
Standard bookbinding work e.g. folding, sorting, gluing, cutting, embossing, sewing
Em
UGRL
Ra
300
300
500
25
25
22
80
80
80
500
19
90
1500
1000
1500
500
16
16
16
19
90
90
80
80
300
300
300
750
25
25
25
19
80
80
80
80
200
300
500
500
500
1000
1000
500
500
25
25
22
22
22
19
16
22
22
40
80
80
90
80
80
90
80
80
200
300
300
300
500
750
300
200
300
750
25
25
25
22
19
19
25
26
22
19
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
200
300
500
750
300
750
750
25
25
22
19
25
25
25
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
200
300
500
25
25
22
80
80
80
| 15

Power stations
Fuel supply plant
Boiler house
Machine halls
Side rooms e.g. pump rooms, condenser rooms, etc., switchboards (inside buildings)
Control rooms
Outdoor switch gear
Printers
Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving, work on stones and platens, printing machines,
matrix making
Paper sorting and hand printing
Type setting, retouching, lithography
Colour inspection in multicoloured printing
Steel and copper engraving
Rolling mills, iron and steel works
Production plants without manual operation
Production plants with occasional manual operation
Production plants with continuous manual operation
Slab store
Furnaces
Mill train, coiler, shear line
Control platforms, control panels
Test, measurement and inspection
Underfloor man-sized tunnels, belt sections, cellars, etc.
Textile manufacture and processing
Work places and zones in baths, bale opening
Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work, drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting,
pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning
Spinning, plying, reeling, winding
Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting
Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches
Manual design, drawing patterns
Finishing, dyeing
Drying room
Automatic fabric printing
Burling, picking, trimming
Colour inspection, fabric control
Invisible mending
Hat manufacturing
Vehicle construction
Body work and assembly
Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber
Painting, touch-up, inspection
Upholstery manufacture (manned)
Final inspection
Wood working and processing
Automatic processing e.g. drying, plywood manufacturing
Steam pits
Saw frame
Work at joiners bench, gluing, assembly
Em
UGRL
Ra
50
100
200
200
500
20
28
25
25
16
-
20
40
80
60
80
20
500
19
80
500
1000
1500
2000
19
19
16
16
80
80
90
80
50
150
200
50
200
300
300
500
50
28
25
25
25
22
22
-
20
40
80
20
20
40
80
80
20
200
25
60
300
22
80
500
500
750
750
500
100
500
1000
1000
1500
500
22
22
22
22
22
28
25
19
16
19
22
80
80
80
90
80
60
80
80
90
90
80
500
750
1000
1000
1000
22
22
19
19
19
80
80
90
80
80
50
150
300
300
28
28
25
25
40
40
60
80

Polishing, painting, fancy joinery
Em
UGRL
Ra
750
22
80
Work on wood working machines e.g. turning, fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting,
sawing, sinking
500
19
80
Selection of veneer woods

Marquetry, inlay work
750
750
22
22
90
90
Quality control, inspection
1000
19
90
Offices
Offices
Filing, copying, etc.
Writing, typing, reading, data processing
Technical drawing
CAD work stations
Conference and meeting rooms
Reception desk
Archives
300
500
750
500
500
300
200
19
19
16
19
19
22
25
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
Retail premises
Retail premises
Sales area
Till area
Wrapper table
300
500
500
22
19
19
80
80
80
100
200
200
300
22
25
22
22
80
80
80
80
300
500
200
300
500
100
22
22
22
22
19
25
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
300
22
80
300
22
80
200
500
500
19
19
19
80
80
80
300
75
75
75
300
25
25
25
19
20
20
20
20
80
Places of public assembly

General areas
Entrance halls
Cloakrooms
Lounges
Ticket offices
Restaurants and hotels
Reception/cashier desk, porters desk
Kitchen
Restaurant, dining room, function room
Self-service restaurant
Buffet
Conference rooms
Corridors
Theatres, concert halls, cinemas
Practice rooms, dressing rooms
Trade fairs, exhibition halls
General lighting
Libraries
Bookshelves
Reading area
Counters
Public car parks (indoor)
In/out ramps (during the day)
In/out ramps (at night)
Traffic lanes
Parking areas
Ticket office
| 17

Educational premises
Nursery school, play school
Play room
Nursery
Handicraft room
Educational buildings
Classrooms, tutorial rooms
Classroom for evening classes and adult education
Lecture hall
Black board
Demonstration table
Art rooms
Art rooms in art schools
Technical drawing rooms
Practical rooms and laboratories
Handicraft rooms
Teaching workshop
Music practice rooms
Computer practice rooms (menu driven)
Language laboratory
Preparation rooms and workshops
Entrance halls
Circulation areas, corridors
Stairs
Student common rooms and assembly halls
Teachers rooms
Library: bookshelves
Library: reading areas
Stock rooms for teaching materials
Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools (general use)
School canteens
Kitchen
Health care premises
Rooms for general use
Waiting rooms
Corridors (during the day)
Corridors (at night)
Day rooms
Staff rooms
Staff office
Staff rooms
Wards, maternity wards
General lighting
Reading lighting
Simple examinations
Examination and treatment
Night lighting, observation lighting
Bathrooms and toilets for patients
Em
UGRL
Ra
300
300
300
19
19
19
80
80
80
300
500
500
500
500
500
750
750
500
500
500
300
300
300
500
200
100
150
200
300
200
500
100
300
200
500
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
16
19
19
19
19
19
19
22
22
25
25
22
19
19
19
25
22
22
22
80
80
80
80
80
80
90
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
500
750
200
200
50
200
22
22
22
22
22
22
80
80
80
80
80
80
500
300
19
19
80
80
100
300
300
1000
5
200
19
19
19
19
22
80
80
80
90
80
80

Examination rooms (general)
General lighting
Eye examination rooms
General lighting
Examination of the outer eye
Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts
Ear examination rooms
General lighting
Ear examination
Scanner rooms
General lighting
Scanners with image enhancers and television systems
Delivery rooms
General lighting
Treatment rooms (general)
Dialysis
Dermatology
Endoscopy rooms
Plaster rooms
Medical baths
Massage and radiotherapy
Operating areas
Pre-op and recovery rooms
Operating theatre
Intensive care unit
General lighting
Simple examinations
Night watch
Dentists
General lighting
At the patient
Operating cavity
White teeth matching
Laboratories and pharmacies
General lighting
Colour inspection
Decontamination rooms
Sterilisation rooms
Disinfection rooms
Autopsy rooms and mortuaries
General lighting
Autopsy table and dissecting table
Em
UGRL
Ra
500
1000
19
19
90
90
300
1000
500
750
300
1000
19
16
22
19
-
80
90
90
80
80
90
300
50
19
19
80
80
300
1000
19
19
80
80
500
500
300
500
300
300
19
19
19
19
19
19
80
90
80
80
80
80
500
1000
19
19
90
90
100
300
1000
20
200
500
1000
5000
5000
19
19
19
19
25
19
-
90
90
90
90
80
90
90
90
90
500
1000
300
300
300
19
19
22
22
22
80
90
80
80
80
500
5000
19
-
90
90
| 19

Transportation areas
Airports
Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim areas
Connecting areas, escalators, travolators
Information desks, check-in desks
Customs and passport control desks
Waiting areas
Luggage store rooms
Security check areas
Air traffic control tower
Testing and repair hangers
Measuring areas in hangers
Railway installations
Covered platforms and passenger subways
Ticket hall and concourse
Ticket and luggage offices and counters
Waiting rooms
Em
UGRL
Ra
300
22
80
200
150
500
500
200
200
300
500
500
500
22
22
19
19
22
25
19
16
22
22
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
50
200
300
200
28
28
19
22
40
40
80
80
4.2 Outdoor workplaces

Type of area, task or activity
Em
General circulation areas

Walkways exclusively for pedestrians
Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles (max 10km/h) e.g. bicycles, trucks
and excavators
Regular vehicle traffic (max 40km/h)
Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points
20
0.25
50
10
20
0.40
50
20
50
20
20
0.40
0.40
45
50
20
30
50
50
200
20
40
40
40
60
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.40
0.50
55
50
50
50
45
50
20
50
20
20
20
0.25
0.40
55
50
Airports
Hanger apron
Terminal apron
Loading areas
Fuel depot
Aircraft maintenance stands
Building sites
General lighting at building sites
Clearance, excavation and loading
Drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary and storage tasks
Ra
Uo
GRL
Framework element mounting, light reinforcement work, wooden mould and

framework mounting, electric piping and cabling
100
40
0.40
45
Element jointing, demanding electrical, machine and pipe mountings
200
40
0.50
45
Canals, locks and harbours

Waiting quays at canals and locks
Gangways and passages exclusively for pedestrians, waiting areas
Outport embankment ballasting at canals and locks
Lock control area
Cargo handling, loading and unloading
Passenger areas in passenger harbours
Coupling of hoses, pipes and ropes
Dangerous part of walkways and driveways (see also parking areas)
10
10
20
20
50
50
50
50
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.40
0.40
0.40
50
50
55
55
55
50
50
45
Farms
Farm yard
Equipment shed (open)
Animals sorting pen
20
50
50
20
20
20
0.10
0.20
0.20
55
55
45
5
20
50
150
20
20
20
20
0.25
0.40
0.40
0.40
50
45
45
45
0.40
45
Fuel filling service stations

Vehicle parking and storage areas
Entry and exit driveways dark environment
Entry and exit driveways light environment (i.e. urban)
Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas
Meter reading area
150
20
Industrial sites and storage areas

Short term handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of
solid bulk goods
500
80
20
20
0.25
55
50
20
0.40
50
Continuous handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of
freight, lifting and descending location for cranes, open loading platforms
Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms, use of tools, ordinary
reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants
100
20
0.50
45
Demanding electrical, machine and piping installations, inspection
200
60
0.50
45
| 21
4.2 Outdoor workplaces (continued)

Off-shore gas and oil structures
Drill floor and monkey board
Rotary table
Regular vehicle traffic (max 40km/h)
Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points
Derrick
Mud sampling room
Test station, shale shaker, wellhead
Process areas
Pumping areas
Crude oil pumps
Treatment areas
Ladders, stairs, walkways
Plant areas
Boat landing areas transport areas
Life boat areas
Sea surface below the rig
Helideck
Parking lots
Light traffic e.g. parking areas of shops, schools, churches, terraced
and apartment houses
Medium traffic e.g. parking areas of department stores, office buildings, sports
and multipurpose building complexes
Heavy traffic e.g. parking areas of major shopping centres, major sports and
multipurpose building complexes
Em
Ra
Uo
GRL
300
500
20
50
100
300
200
40
40
20
20
40
40
40
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.50
0.50
40
40
45
50
45
40
45
200
300
100
100
300
100
200
30
100
20
40
40
20
40
20
20
20
20
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.25
0.50
0.25
0.40
0.25
0.40
45
45
45
45
40
50
50
50
45
20
0.25
55
10
20
0.25
50
20
20
0.25
50
Petrochemical and other hazardous industries

Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated valves, starting and
stopping motors, lighting of burners
Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances,
inspection of leakage, piping and packing
Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances,
replacements of pump packing, general service work, reading of instruments
Repair of machines and electrical devices
Fuel loading and unloading sites
100
40
0.40
45
200
100
60
20
0.50
0.40
45
45
Power, electricity, gas and heat plants

Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas
Handling of servicing tools, coal
Overall inspection
General servicing work and reading of instruments
Wind tunnels servicing and maintenance
Repair of electric devices
5
20
50
100
100
200
20
20
20
40
40
60
0.25
0.25
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.50
50
55
50
45
45
45
Railway areas
Open platforms - small stations, rural and local trains
Open platforms - medium size stations, suburban and regional trains
Open platforms - large stations, inter-city services
Covered platforms - medium size stations, suburban and regional trains
Covered platforms - large stations, inter-city services
Stairs - small and medium size stations
Stairs - large stations
Walkways
15
20
50
50
100
50
100
20
20
20
20
40
40
40
40
20
0.25
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.40
0.50
0.40
50
45
45
45
45
45
45
50
20
20
0.25
55
50
20
0.40
50
4.2 Outdoor workplaces (continued)

Freight areas
Freight track short duration operations
Freight track continuous operation
Open platforms
Covered platform short duration operations
Covered platform continuous operation
Railway yards handling areas
Railway yards flat marshalling, retarder and classification yards
Hump areas
Wagon inspection pit
Coupling area
Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling
Servicing trains and locomotives
Level crossings
Em
Ra
Uo
GRL
10
20
20
50
100
30
10
10
100
30
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
40
20
20
20
40
20
20
40
20
0.25
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.40
0.25
0.40
0.40
50
50
50
45
45
50
50
45
40
45
50
50
45
Saw mills
Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and chip conveyors
Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading points and sawn timber
loading points, mechanical lifting to timber conveyor
Reading of addresses and marking of sawn timber
Grading and packaging
Feeding into stripping and chopping machines
20
20
0.25
55
50
20
0.40
50
100
200
300
40
40
40
0.40
0.50
0.50
45
45
45
Shipyards and docks

Short term handling of large units
Cleaning of ship hull
Painting and welding of ship hull
Mounting of electrical and mechanical components
General lighting of shipyard area, storage areas for prefabricated goods
20
50
100
200
20
20
20
60
60
40
0.25
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.25
55
50
45
45
55
Water and sewage plants

Handling of service tools, utilisation of manually operated valves, starting and
stopping of motors, piping packing and raking plants
Handling of chemicals, inspection of leakage, changing of pumps,
general servicing work, reading of instruments
Repair of motors and electric devices
50
20
0.40
45
100
40
0.40
45
200
60
0.50
45
| 23
4.3 Sports
This table contains lighting recommendations for a variety of
sports. Lighting requirements may differ according to the level
of competition of a sport, and therefore requirements are shown
for different lighting classes. There are three lighting classes:
Class I
Top level competition that will generally involve a

large amount of spectators and may involve long
viewing distances
Class II
Medium level competition that will generally involve

a medium amount of spectators and may involve
medium viewing distances. Professional level training
may also be class II.
Class III Low level competition that will generally involve small
amounts
Level of competition

Lighting Class
I
II
III
International or national
Regional
Local
Training
Recreational/education
Class
3
Em
Ra
Uo
200
200/Ev 750
20
60
0.50
0.5/0.8
Class I
Class II
Class III
500
300
200
60
60
20
0.70
0.60
0.50
Class I
Class II
Class III
500
200
100
60
60
20
0.70
0.50
0.50
Class I
Class II
Class III
750
500
300
60
60
20
0.70
0.70
0.70
Aerobics (recreational)
Archery (lane/target)
Athletics (indoor)
GRL
Athletics (outdoor, all disciplines)
Badminton
50
55
55

Basketball (indoor)
Class
Em
Ra
Uo
Class I
Class II
Class III
750
500
200
60
60
20
0.70
0.70
0.50
Class I
Class II
Class III
500
200
75
60
60
20
0.70
0.60
0.50
Class I
Class II
Class III
750
500
500
80
80
80
0.80
0.80
0.80
Class I
300
60
0.70
Class II
200
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
GRL
Basketball
50
50
55
Billiards
Boccia (indoor)
Boccia (outdoor)
Class I
200
60
0.70
50
Class II
100
20
0.70
50
Class III
50
20
0.50
55
Class I
300
60
0.70
Class II
200
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Class I
200
60
0.70
50
Class II
100
20
0.70
50
Class III
50
20
0.50
55
200
60
Boules (indoor)
Boules (outdoor)
10 pin/9 pin bowling

Lanes
Pins 25m lane
Ev 1000
Pins 50m lane
Ev 2000
0.50
0.80
0.80
Boxing
Class I
2000
80
Class II
1000
80
0.80
0.80
Class III
500
60
0.50
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
300
20
0.50
Class I
750/500
60
0.70
50
Class II
500/300
60
0.70
50
Class III
300/200
20
0.70
55
Climbing
Cricket (infield/outfield)
Cricket nets
Class I
1500
60
0.80
50
Class II
1000
60
0.80
50
Class III
750
20
0.80
55
| 25
Class
Em
Ra
Uo
300/200
0.70
0.70
Class I
Class II
Class III
750
500
200
60
60
20
0.70
0.70
0.50
Class I
Class II
Class III
500
300
100
60
60
20
0.70
0.70
0.50
Curling (target / playing area)

Cycling (indoor)
GRL
50
Cycling (outdoor)
50
50
55
Dancing
Class I
500
60
0.70
Class II
300
60
0.60
Class III
200
20
0.50
Class I
Eh 200/Ev 750
60
Class II
Eh 100/Ev 500
60
Class III
Eh 50/Ev 300
20
Darts
Fencing
750
60
Class I
Eh 750/Ev 500
60
0.70
Class II
Eh 500/Ev 300
60
0.70
Class III
Eh 300/Ev 200
20
0.70
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Football (indoor)
Football (outdoor)
Class I
500
60
0.70
50
Class II
200
60
0.60
50
55
Class III
75
20
0.50
Class I
500
60
0.70
Gymnastics
Class II
300
60
0.60
Class III
200
20
0.50
Handball (indoor)
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Class I
500
60
0.70
50
Class II
200
60
0.60
50
Class III
75
20
0.50
55
Handball (outdoor)
Hockey (indoor)
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
300
20
0.70
Class I
500
60
0.70
50
Class II
200
60
0.70
50
Class III
200
20
0.70
55
Hockey (outdoor)
Class
Em
Ra
Uo
Class I
Class II
Class III
750
500
300
60
60
20
0.70
0.70
0.70
Class I
Class II
Class III
750
500
200
60
60
20
0.70
0.70
0.50
GRL
Ice hockey (indoor)
Ice hockey (outdoor)
Ice skating
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
300
20
0.70
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Judo
Kendo / Karate
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Netball (indoor)
Netball (outdoor)
Class I
500
60
0.70
50
Class II
200
60
0.60
50
55
Class III
75
20
0.50
Class I
300
60
0.70
Petanque (indoor)
Class II
200
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Petanque (outdoor)
Class I
200
60
0.70
50
Class II
100
20
0.70
50
55
Class III
50
20
0.50
Class I
750
60
0.70
Racketball
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
300
20
0.70
Roller skating
Class I
500
60
0.70
Class II
300
60
0.60
Class III
200
20
0.50
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
School sports
| 27
Class
Em
Ra
Uo
200/Ev 750
60
0.5/0.8
Class I
Class II
Class III
750
500
500
80
80
80
0.80
0.80
0.80
Class I
Class II
Class III
500
300
200
60
60
20
0.70
0.60
0.50
Shooting (lane/target)
Snooker
GRL
Speed skating
Squash
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
300
20
0.70
Swimming
Class I
500
60
0.70
Class II
300
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Table tennis
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
300
20
0.70
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
300
20
0.50
Tennis (indoor)
Tennis (outdoor)
Class I
500
60
0.70
50
Class II
300
60
0.70
50
55
Class III
200
20
0.60
Class I
750
60
0.70
Weight lifting
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
Wrestling
Class I
750
60
0.70
Class II
500
60
0.70
Class III
200
20
0.50
4.4 Emergency
Illuminance limits (CEN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007)
Description of space
Escape route
Open area
High risk task area
Illuminance limits (lux)
Diversity limits
(Imin / Imax)
Along centre line 1.0lx

In central band 0.5lx
Across area 0.5lx
0.025 (1:40)
10% maintained level but not less than15.0lx
0.1 (1:10)
0.025 (1:40)
Disability glare limits (CEN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007)

Mounting height above
floor level
H in m
Escape route and open area (anti

panic) lighting maximum luminous
intensity
Imax in cd
High risk task area

lighting maximum
luminous intensity
Imax in cd
H < 2.5
500
1000
2.5 H < 3.0
900
1800
3.0 H < 3.5
1600
3200
3.5 H < 4.0
2500
5000
4.0 H < 4.5
3500
7000
4.5 H
5000
10000
For escape routes and open areas response times and durations
are;

CEN 1838:1999
50% of the required illuminance within 5s, and 100% within
60s with a minimum duration of 1 hour

CIE S 020/E:2007
50% of the required illuminance within 20s, and 100% within
60s (if the visual task or risk to people requires a shorter
response time then it should be shortened to 50% of the
required illuminance within 5s) with a minimum duration of
1 hour (if the visual task or risk to people requires a longer
duration then it should be extended to 3 hours)
For high risk task areas response times and durations are;

CEN 1838:1999
Either 100% required illuminance permanently or within 0.5s,
depending upon the application with a minimum duration
covering the time the risk exists

CIE S 020/E:2007
Either 100% required illuminance permanently or within 0.5s,
depending upon the application with a minimum duration of
1 hour
Note that these values may differ across countries. For example;

UK (CEN 1838:1999)

Escape route
along centre line 0.2lx

in central band 0.1lx
| 29
Escape route and open area duration may be extended from

5s to 15s in premises for the most part likely to be occupied by
persons who are familiar with them

France (CEN 1838:1999)

Certified luminaires only may be used

On escape routes maximum spacing of luminaires is 15m
For open areas 5lm/m2 (luminaire lumens) is required and
luminaires may not be spaced more than 4 times their mounting
height apart, with a minimum of 2 luminaires per room
Therefore, whilst these values may be used for guidance local
regulations should be consulted.
4.5 Roads
For road lighting the lighting criteria are selected dependant
upon the class of road being lit. The class has a range of
sub-classes, from the strictest to the most relaxed, and these are
chosen dependant upon factors, such as typical speed of users,
typical volumes of traffic flow, difficulty of the navigational task,
etc. The basic lighting classes are defined as:
ME This class is intended for users of motorised vehicles on
traffic routes. In some countries this class also applies to
residential roads. Traffic speeds are medium to high.

The ME classes go from ME1 to ME6, with ME1 defining
the strictest requirements. For wet road conditions the
MEW classes go from MEW1 to MEW6.
ME1
ME2
ME3A
ME3B
ME3C
ME4A
ME4B
ME5
ME6
MEW1D
MEW1W
MEW2D
MEW2W
MEW3D
Lm
2.0 cd/m2
1.5 cd/m2
1.0 cd/m2
1.0 cd/m2
1.0 cd/m2
0.75 cd/m2
0.75 cd/m2
0.50 cd/m2
0.3 cd/m2
2.0 cd/m2
1.5 cd/m2
1.0 cd/m2
Luminance
U0
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.40
0.15
0.40
0.15
0.40
KEY

UL
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.60
0.60
0.60
Emin
Em
Lm
Uo
Ul
TI
SR
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
minimum illuminance
maintained average illuminance
maintained average luminance
overall uniformity
longitudinal uniformity
threshold increment
surround ratio
SR
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.60
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
TI
10%
10%
15%
15%
15%
15%
15%
15%
15%
10%
10%
15%
MEW3W
0.15
0.50
MEW4D
0.75 cd/m2
0.40
0.50
15%
MEW4W
0.15
0.50
MEW5D
0.5 cd/m2
0.35
0.50
15%
MEW5W
0.15
0.50
CE This class is intended for users of motorised vehicles in

conflict areas such as road intersections, roundabouts,
etc. These areas also allow provision for cyclists and
pedestrians.
The CE classes go from CE0 to CE5, with CE0 defining
the strictest requirements.
This class is intended for cyclists and pedestrians on

footpaths, cycle paths, residential roads, pedestrian
streets, parking areas, etc. The S class and the A class are
for similar situations, but the S class criteria are defined
in terms of horizontal illuminance as preferred by certain
countries.
The S classes go from S1 to S6, with S1 defining the
strictest requirements.
This class is intended for cyclists and pedestrians on

footpaths, cycle paths, residential roads, pedestrian
streets, parking areas, etc. The A class and the S class are
for similar situations but the A class criteria are defined in
terms of hemispherical illuminance as preferred by certain
countries.
The A classes go from A1 to A5, with A1 defining the
ES This class is an extension of the A and S classes for those

situations where the identification of people or objects
is particularly necessary, for example in high crime
risk areas. The criteria are in terms of semi-cylindrical
illuminance and are used in addition to the S or A class
criteria.

The ES classes go from ES1 to ES9, with ES1 defining the
EV This class is an extension of the CE, A and S classes

for those situations requiring good visibility of vertical
surfaces, for example toll booths. The criteria are in terms
of vertical illuminance and are used in addition to the CE,
S or A class criteria.
The EV classes go from EV1 to EV6, with EV1 defining the
CE0
CE1
CE2
CE3
CE5
Horizontal illuminance
Em
Emin
Uo
50.0 lux
0.40
30.0 lux
0.40
20.0 lux
0.40
15.0 lux
0.40
7.50 lux
0.40
Horizontal illuminance
Em
Emin
15.0 lux; 22.5 lux 5.0 lux
10.0 lux; 15.0 lux 3.0 lux
7.5 lux; 11.25 lux 1.5 lux
5.0 lux; 7.5 lux
1.0 lux
3.0 lux; 4.5 lux
0.6 lux
2.0 lux; 3.0 lux
0.6 lux
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Hemispherical illuminance
Uo
Em
5.0 lux
0.15
3.0 lux
0.15
2.0 lux
0.15
1.5 lux
0.15
1.0 lux
0.15
ES1
ES2
ES3
ES4
ES5
ES6
ES7
ES8
ES9
Semi-cylindrical illuminance
Emin
10.0 lux
7.5 lux
5.0 lux
3.0 lux
2.0 lux
1.5 lux
1.0 lux
0.75 lux
0.50 lux
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV5
EV6
Vertical illuminance
Emin
50.0 lux
30.0 lux
10.0 lux
7.5 lux
5.0 lux
0.5 lux
Uo
-
| 31
Recommended lighting levels
When lighting adjacent areas there should not be a difference

greater than two comparable classes between the areas, with
the area with the highest recommended lighting level being
taken as the reference area.
To help apply this when adjacent area are lit to different lighting
classes the table below shows lighting classes for comparable
lighting levels.
CE0
ME1
MEW1
CE1
ME2
MEW2
CE2
ME3
MEW3
CE3
S1
ME4
MEW4
CE4
S2
ME5
MEW5
CE5
S3
ME6
S4
S5
S6
Lighting classes of comparable lighting level
In some countries there is a preference for a particular

measure of illuminance over others (for example hemispherical
illuminance in preference to horizontal illuminance). The
following two tables show comparable alternative lighting
classes to aid in designing to local preferences.
A class (hemispherical illuminance) compared to S class (horizontal illuminance)
Reference class
S1
Alternative class
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
ES class (semi-cylindrical illuminance) and EV class (vertical illuminance) compared to CE and S class
(horizontal illuminance)
Reference class
Alternative class
CE0
CE1
CE2
CE3
S1
CE4
S2
CE5
S3
S4
S5
S6
ES1
ES2
EV3
ES3
EV4
ES4
EV5
ES5
ES6
ES7
ES8
ES9
4.6 Amenity
There is little standardised information for lighting requirements
in amenity areas, and therefore this information should be
considered guidance. Local standards and regulations should
be checked to ensure compliance.
Lighting classes for pedestrian areas in urban centres (see road section above)
Traffic flow pedestrians
Normal
High
Environmental zone
Environmental zone
E3
E4
E3
E4
Pedestrian only traffic
CE3
CE2
CE2
CE1
Mixed pedestrian and vehicular traffic
CE2
CE1
CE1
CE1
Pedestrian zones
Em
(lux)
Eminimum
(lux)
Diversity
(Emin/Emax)
Pedestrian precincts
5.0
0.08
Squares/open areas
5.0
0.10
10.0
0.10
1.0
Area
Squares (high pedestrian use)

Level footpaths
Footpaths with steps
5.0
Outdoor staircase
15.0
0.30
Underpass
60.0
0.30
Lighting levels for underground, multi-storey and outdoor car parks zones
Type
Underground and multi-storey
excluding roof level
Area
Parking bays, access area
Ramps, corners, intersections
Entrance/exit zones (vehicular)
Pedestrian areas, stairs, lifts
Outdoor and multi-storey roof

level
Em
(lux)
Eminimum
(lux)
75
50
150
75
75 night
300 day
100
50
60.0
Rural zones E1 and E2
15
Urban zones E3 and E4
30
10
Multi-storey roof level
30
10
| 33
4.7 Tunnel
For guidance on tunnel lighting you should also refer to section
6.6 on road tunnel lighting.
Glare restriction
Time of day
Threshold zone
Interior zone
Day-time
TI <15%
TI <15%
Exit zone
-
Night
TI <15%
TI <15%
TI <15%
Traffic flow classification

Traffic flow
One way traffic

(vehicles/hour.lane)
High
Medium
Two way traffic

(vehicles/hour.lane)
> 1500
> 400
500 1500
100 400
< 500
< 100
Low
Interior zone average luminance levels (Lav)

Traffic flow
Stopping distance
( speed in m/s)
Low
Medium
High
160m
5 cd/m
10 cd/m
15 cd/m
100m
2 cd/m
4 cd/m
6 cd/m
60m
1 cd/m
2 cd/m
3 cd/m
Threshold zones average luminance levels (Lav)

Maximum permitted average luminance ratio passing between
transition zones is 3:1
Maximum permitted average luminance ratio passing from
transition zones to interior zone is 1.5:1
Note: D
uring night hours the entire tunnel is treated as one
interior zone
Uniformity requirements
Minimum luminance to average luminance for road surface and
lower 2m of tunnel walls 0.4
Longitudinal uniformity along centre line of each lane 0.6
4.8 Lighting scheme surveys

When a lighting scheme has been designed and installed
it is normally necessary to perform a survey as part of the
commissioning process. A survey would also be necessary in
the case of any dispute over the performance of an installation.
When performing a survey a grid of points is generally
placed over the area to be surveyed. These grid points are the
measurement points at which a reading of light will be taken.
To perform a survey adequate equipment is required. This
is generally either an illuminance meter or a luminance
meter, dependant upon the criteria used during the design
of the installation. It is essential that the equipment used is
suitable for the task. It therefore needs to be calibrated, with
a current calibration certificate from a competent company
with traceability to national standards. It also needs to have a
suitable range of sensitivity to be able to measure the light levels
present in the installation. So to measure emergency light levels
a more sensitive meter would be necessary that could measure
low light levels.
When making a scheme survey it is essential to keep a
complete and accurate record of the state of the whole
installation at the time of the survey, which is the lighting
equipment and the space the lighting is in. (Photographs are a
valuable addition to a written record.) Examples of information
of note are:
With regard to the measuring equipment
Type of meter, manufacturer, model, serial number and
calibration date
Details of any additional equipment, such as tripods, tape
measures, etc. should be noted
With regard to the luminaires
The luminaire manufacturer and manufacturers code
Details of the lamps (number, type and age)
The supply voltage (value and stability)
The state of maintenance of the installation (lamps and
luminaires)
Details of luminaire control systems being used
Geometric details of the luminaire positioning
| 35
With regard to the space

The condition of reflective surfaces
The surface reflectances
The presence of any significant obstructions
The presence/absence of daylight, including a
background reading of luminance/illuminance with
daylight only (luminaires turned off). Note that the quantity
of daylight may vary significantly over time so ideally
daylight should be excluded from measurements of electric
light unless the aim is to measure a constant illuminance
installation (daylight control)
The ambient temperature in the space
Any other factors which could influence the measurement
Before taking any measurements it is important that the output
of the luminaires is stable. Therefore the lighting should ideally
be operated for one hour before taking any measurements, and
at least 30 minutes. Additionally to ensure the stability of the
meter photocell it should be exposed to the stable light levels for
approximately five minutes before taking any measurements.
When defining a measurement grid this is dependant upon the
application being surveyed.
Interior measurement grids
Frequently for sports lighting the grid definition is defined by
the sports governing body, so for an indoor sports facility any
requirements specific to a particular sport should be used.
However, if no specific requirements exist, or the installation
is not a sports facility, the measurement points for verification
of the design should be in the same location and plane as
the calculation points used during the design. Therefore, if a
measurement plane was calculated which was tilted to mimic
the orientation of the task, the same measurement plane should
be used for verification.
Note that during design it should be ensured that the grid
spacing does not coincide with the spacing of the luminaires
in the installation as this can distort the calculated results, and
therefore the scheme performance.
Exterior measurement grids sports and area

Frequently for sports lighting the grid definition is defined by
the sports governing body, so any requirements specific to
a particular sport should be used. However, if no specific
requirements exist, or the installation is not a sports facility, the
measurement points for verification of the design should be in
the same location and plane as the calculation points used
during the design. Therefore, if a measurement plane was
calculated which was tilted to mimic the orientation of the task,
the same measurement plane should be used for verification.
Exterior measurement grids road
For road lighting the grid is normally defined in the relevant
standard and is generally related to the spacing of the road
lighting lanterns. Therefore the relevant standard should be
referenced for the grid definition which should be the same as
the grid used for calculation during design.
When marking the measurement grid in the area to be
measured the method of marking is dependant upon the
measurements to be taken. When measuring illuminance
small markers (such as sticky dots) may be placed upon the
surface to show the measurement point. However when
measuring luminance this would invalidate the reading and so
for luminance readings markings should be used to sight the
luminance meter, and then moved before the reading is taken.
When taking luminance readings in a road lighting installation
the position of the meter will be a significant distance from the
measurement point. This has two implications:
The luminance meter must be able to restrict the angle of
measurement to allow only the relevant grid position to be
measured, typically to two minutes of arc in the vertical
plane and 20 minutes of arc in the horizontal plane.
The grid markings must be visible from a large distance.
Therefore three-dimensional objects should be used to
mark the grid points and removed individually as each
grid point is measured.
The method of marking out the grid should be recorded with
details of equipment used and fixed reference points used
to locate the grid. To record the measured values a diagram
should be used to assign reference numbers to each grid point.
A table of values may then be completed containing the grid
reference number and the measured value.
| 37
Some points of note when taking the readings are

When taking measurements it should be ensured that
no additional shadowing is introduced due to the
measurement technique.
When taking measurements it is advisable to wear dark
matt clothing to prevent light reflecting from clothing onto
the photocell, giving abnormally high readings. However,
if safety requirements require high visibility clothing,
care should be taken to minimise light reflection onto the
photocell.
The use of a tripod is advisable, especially for luminance
readings or readings using heavy equipment.
For measurement grids that are not at ground level the use
of a stand, at the correct height and orientation for the task
plane, can help ensure a photocell is correctly positioned
at a measurement position.
It is good practice to measure the background light levels
without the lighting installation turned on. Even moonlight
can have a noticeable effect on light levels. Also to take
these measurements after measuring the installation with
the lights turned on, as the background light levels may
vary considerably during the warm-up time for the lighting.
When measuring horizontal illuminance it cannot be
assumed that the ground is horizontal, especially in
outdoor applications. Care must be taken to ensure
the photocell is horizontal, even if this is not a true
representation of the ground.
Correction factors should be applied to readings to
compensate for the lamp type used in the schemes.
However, highly coloured or monochromatic light sources
will give erroneous readings using conventional light
meters.
5 Applications and Techniques

5.1 General Considerations
The application of the right light is paramount in
lighting design. The simple golden rule for design
considerations is to provide the right light to the
right place at the right time. This rule is valid for
all places where lighting for people is needed
so that they can see and perform the visual
tasks efficiently and in comfort. The specific
lighting requirements of people and places
vary according to the type of place, activity
and people involved. The visual tasks can differ
in character, location, size, colour, duration,
dynamics and ergonomics. It is very important
to assess these parameters and to formulate the
right design objectives for the specific lighting
application area. Once the task analyses
have been completed and listed the required
lighting design criteria can be selected and the
lighting design process can start. See also the
list of recommendations within the appropriate
lighting application standards referenced in this
book.
This section of the handbook gives an insight to the activities
and visual tasks found in the various lighting application
segments and gives advise on the important points to consider.
It recommends the most appropriate lighting design techniques
and suitable lighting solutions. The list of application segments
is not exhaustive but the main types covered include the lighting
of indoor and outdoor industry, offices, education buildings,
super and hypermarkets, roads, amenity areas, architectural
elements and healthcare premises. For each case the lighting
techniques employed should start by considering a holistic
approach to design and should include PEC performance,
efficiency and comfort - attributes and fulfilment. This means
addressing all the lighting design parameters and balancing the
requirements and constraints to yield the best possible solution.
In the holistic framework the key elements for consideration
are visual function, visual amenity, architectural integration,
energy efficiency, installation costs and maintenance. The
individual elements may not carry equal weight, but they
| 39

all need consideration separately and combined with each
other. PEC extends this consideration to include the changing
human factors and environmental challenges. By fulfilling PEC
we ensure that quality lighting will be provided that gives
effective light for visual performance, with high operating
energy efficiency, be sustainable and kind to the environment,
and give people comfort, stimulation and total satisfaction. It is
well proven that good lighting is essential to mankind, without
this the human activity will be seriously impaired and valuable
energy and resource will be wasted. It is also important to
recognise that this lighting not only illuminates the task but will
also contribute to the quality of the visual environment and
wellbeing of the people.
Much of the success of a lighting installation depends on
making the right decisions at the design stage, selecting the
right equipment and providing adequate instructions on how
to operate, manage and service the scheme through its life.
In the section Specific Techniques guidance is given on
techniques that are applicable to several application segments.
These include, lighting for display screen equipment, lighting
for education, emergency lighting, road and amenity lighting,
controlling obtrusive light, lighting for crime prevention, lighting
for health, lighting controls, lighting maintenance and tunnel
lighting. The consideration of these form an integral part of the
design process to yield the most appropriate lighting solution.
40 | Applications and Techniques
Healthcare
Section 5.6
Urban
decorative
roadlighting &
amenity areas
Section 5.9
Sports lighting
Section 5.11
Education
Section 5.3
Office
Section 5.2
Road lighting
Section 5.8
Super/
Hypermarket
Section 5.7
Urban
architectural
floodlighting
Section 5.10
Industry
indoor
Section 5.4
Industry outdoor
Section 5.5
Fig. 5.1 C
ity plan showing the diversity of
lighting needs. This section gives hints
on lighting techniques for each of these
application areas, helping the reader
to tackle such everyday projects with
greater understanding.
| 41
5.2 Office
Techniques
General
Office lighting is a general term that covers many tasks. These tasks can use different
mediums such as paper, computer screen, or involve face-to-face meetings. Additionally
the tasks can vary in content and may be mainly clerical in nature or may be more
specialised such as engineering tasks and CAD work. Points of note are:
Office workers tend to have a sedentary work routine. Therefore they will be
looking in essentially the same direction for large amounts of time. Poor
lighting can cause various health problems, from headaches due to
discomfort glare to muscle strain due to sitting at an awkward angle to avoid
reflections in computer screens or glossy publications. Care must be taken to
design a lighting installation that minimises discomfort caused by lighting.
A balanced ambience creates a pleasant work environment. Ensuring light
falls onto the walls and ceiling helps prevent dark surfaces creating an
oppressive atmosphere. Generally, ensuring wall lighting levels are 50% of
the horizontal task lighting level and ceiling levels are 30% of the horizontal
task level will give a good balance. Careful use of wall-washing luminaires
and indirect lighting can help produce a positive environment.
Lamps with a colour-rendering index of 80 or more should be used to
enhance visual performance and visual satisfaction.
If the positions of the workstations are known and fixed it is more efficient to
design the lighting to supply the correct amount of lighting to the task, but less
lighting to circulation areas. For areas that may be reconfigured lighting
controls may be used to set the light levels for individual luminaires in an array
of luminaires to achieve the same effect.
For rooms containing display screen equipment luminaires with suitable
optical control to remove any bright luminance above 65 should be used.
Office
Drawing office
Lighting for technical areas is critical to minimise errors. Any error in a drawing could be
costly and potentially dangerous.
Although drawing boards are becoming less common some offices do still
use them. In such cases the lighting should provide adequate light levels over
a reasonable range of tilt angles of the board, and be positioned so as to
minimise shadowing onto the board.
For CAD workstations luminaires should be chosen which have a minimal
luminance at high angles from the downward vertical (e.g. angles close to
the horizontal plane of the luminaire). When using indirect or direct/indirect
luminaires care should be taken to ensure that the ceiling luminance is not too
high as this can produce images on the computer screen.

Key luminaires:
Reception desk
Main objective is to provide visitors with a visible first point of contact and employees
with a transition zone from exterior and interior lighting levels.
Light naturally attracts people so a well lit reception area and reception desk
will help orientate visitors by giving them a visible point of reference.
Luminaires should be placed to help orientation by providing a luminous
pathway
Entrances with high ceilings lend themselves to the use of uplighting or
suspended lighting, both of which tend to provide good modelling.

Key luminaires:
| 43
Office
Conference rooms
Main objectives are to ensure that people have adequate light to perform their tasks
(such as reading, writing), that any presentation aids used are clearly visible, and that
modelling is suitable to allow good communication between people.
A good vertical illuminance component should exist to aid the visibility of
wall-displays and improve modelling. Moderately strong modelling is
desirable for formal communication, whilst softer modelling is more suitable
for informal or close contact. Modelling is of special importance in areas
that may be used by people with special needs who may utilise lip-reading
or signing.
Specialised lighting for whiteboards may be installed to ensure good visibility
for all participants. These luminaires should not cause glare for the user of the
whiteboard and should be positioned to minimise shadowing during use. If
audio-visual projectors are used the luminaires should not impede the
projector beam and cause shadowing.
Flexible luminaire controls should be employed to allow the use of projectors
or other audio-visual equipment and to set a luminous environment suitable for
the meeting purpose.

Key luminaires:
General office
Main objective is to ensure that people have adequate light to perform their tasks quickly
and accurately without any stress or strain caused by poor light levels or poorly
positioned lighting causing visual disability or discomfort.
Whilst recommendations and standards define suitable lighting levels for
office based work consideration should also be given to the demands of the
task. For work involving small or complex detail lighting levels required for
accurate working will be higher than those necessary for more general office
tasks. If a minority of people in a large office perform these tasks local
lighting may be suitable for these workers.
Office
Care should be taken when positioning luminaires and workstations to ensure
that the worker does not create shadows on the task. Ensuring that all
workstations are lit by more than one luminaire and from a variety of
directions can prevent this occurring.
Tasks frequently involve the transfer of paper-based information onto a
computer. In many instances special attachments are used to hold the paper
next to the computer screen in a vertical or near vertical orientation. Therefore
it must be ensured that the vertical illuminance is sufficient to allow good
visibility of the paper-based task.
When writing, typing or reading paper-based material the contrast rendering
factor (CRF) of the task is important. This indicates how effectively the lighting
system minimises unwanted shiny reflections in the task. The CRF is sensitive to
the geometry between the luminaires, task and observer and should either be
calculated or measured. If the CRF is too low altering the lighting layout or
moving the location of the task should be considered.
It should be ensured that light levels on the walls are suitable for comfortable
use of notice boards, whiteboards, etc. However, overly aggressive or poorly
designed lighting of shiny artefacts on the walls (such as whiteboards or
glazed pictures) may result in some workers having problems with reflected
glare.
When filing or retrieving information from a storage system it is frequently
necessary to read information on a vertical surface, such as the front of a drawer
of a filing cabinet. Therefore, adequate vertical illuminance levels should be
provided.
Luminaires should be positioned to ensure that the user does not create
shadowing over filing systems or copiers when standing in front of them.

Key luminaires:
| 45
Office
Schemes
Office lighting
Scheme: Meeting room, 4.4m x 4.4m x 2.8m
Luminaire(s) used: 9 Corsa 200 2x26W TC-D
Desk: Eav = 468 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.86
Scheme: Circulation routes, 2.8m wide x 2.8m high

Luminaire(s) used: Indi-Quattro 2x36W TC-L on 3m
centres
Scheme: Boardroom, 7m x 6.5m x 2.8m

Luminaire(s) used: 12 Corsa 200 2x26W TC-D and 16 Chalice LV 50W
Scheme: Civil circuit judge court, 7m x 6.5m x 2.8m

Luminaire(s) used: 23 MenloSoft 3x24W T16 and 5 Planor 2x24W T16 wall mounted
Workplane: Eav = 569 lux. (1m above floor)
Office
Recessed MenloSoft luminaires lighting a large open plan

office. The appearance of the luminaire gives a lively feel to the
ceiling, which might otherwise appear uninteresting. A good
distribution of light prevents walls appearing dark and
uninviting.
Pendant Planor luminaires lighting a small office area.

Small offices frequently feel enclosed and cramped. The light
distribution from the luminaire lights the ceiling and walls,
making the space feel larger and more cheerful, and the fittings
seem to float in the space.
Recessed luminaires controlled by the SensaLink system

(see Section 6.1). The luminaires have integrated detectors
allowing them to adjust the lighting levels according to the
amount of daylight flowing in from the large window on the
edge of the office.
Quattro T Line luminaires with reflector optics in a large

open plan office. This minimises potential problems of the
lighting causing reflections in computer screens (see Section
6.2) and allows a clean uncluttered feel to the ceiling. Care
needs to be taken to prevent dark walls and ceiling making the
room feel gloomy and uninviting.
| 47
5.3 Education
Techniques:
General
The purpose of a school or college building is to provide a facility that aids and
promotes learning for all age groups in a safe and fulfilling environment. The lighting
should support this aim in all teaching and ancillary areas.
Luminaires need to be physically robust, not easily damaged, and easy to
maintain
The ambience of different areas should be suitable for the activity performed
there. For example by treating an art or music room as more than just another
classroom the lighting can contribute to providing an inspiring atmosphere.
Additional consideration should be given to any uses of the teaching space
for extra-curricular activities or adult learning classes. If a large number of
older students use the space light levels should be suitable, taking into
account deterioration of the eye with age.
Emergency lighting will be required in many parts of the building.
Entrance hall
Main objective is to provide visitors with a visible first point of contact and students and
staff with a transition zone from exterior and interior lighting levels.
Light naturally attracts people so a well lit reception area and reception desk
will help orientate visitors by giving them a visible point of reference.
pathway
Entrances with high ceilings lend themselves to the use of uplighting or
suspended lighting, both of which tend to provide good modelling.

Key luminaires:
Education
Corridors/Staircases
Main objective is to allow students and staff to move around the building safely.
As corridors and staircases are also main exit routes for emergency situations good
emergency lighting with way-guidance is necessary. Points of note are:
Bright ceilings and walls can make corridor areas seem more open and
appealing.
Wall mounted fittings can model peoples faces better.
pathway
For walls with an interesting texture using luminaires with a significant
downlight component positioned close to the wall can create an interesting
effect.
Stairs should be well lit and glare free. Lighting should prevent heavy
shadowing of steps, but must allow sufficient contrast for people to easily
identify changes in level.
Display lighting in corridors should be glare free for corridor users. Special
care is needed near stairs to prevent display lights causing glare to people on
the staircase.

Key luminaires:
Classrooms/Lecture halls
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to perform their
tasks (such as reading, writing), that students can see any teaching aids used (such as a
whiteboard or projected information), that modelling is suitable to allow good
communication between students and staff.
A good vertical illuminance component should exist to aid the visibility of
wall-displays and improve modelling. Moderately strong modelling is
desirable for formal communication, whilst softer modelling is more suitable
for informal or close contact. Modelling is of special importance in areas for
students with special needs who may utilise lip-reading or signing.
| 49
Education
To help in the visibility of written text and diagrams a high contrast rendering
factor (CRF) should exist at all desks.
Specialised lighting for blackboards and whiteboards should be installed to
ensure good visibility for all students. These luminaires should not cause glare
for the user of the blackboard or whiteboard and be positioned to minimise
shadowing during use. If audio-visual projectors are used the luminaires
should not impede the projector beam and cause shadowing.
For rooms containing display screen equipment luminaires with suitable
optical control to remove any bright luminance above 65 should be used
Flexible luminaire controls should be employed to allow the use of projectors or
other audio-visual equipment. Flexible controls can also maximise the benefits of
daylight by dimming selected luminaires under good daylight conditions.

Key luminaires:
Laboratories/Workshops
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to perform their
tasks (such as science experiments or craft projects) and that the lighting aids good
visibility and therefore safety. Points of note are:
Light falling on any position should be from multiple sources to prevent heavy
shadowing of the task by the student. However a general drift of light should be
present to help with modelling, as patterns of light and shade are essential to
allow objects to be correctly discerned and to create an interesting environment.
Good colour rendering is required.
For areas using machinery high frequency control gear should be used to
prevent any problems with stroboscopic effects resulting in rotating machinery
appearing to be stationary.

Key luminaires:
Education
Sports halls
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to safely
participate in sporting activities. These may require visibility of relatively small objects
moving at high speed, or visual conditions suitable for the use of gymnastic equipment.
Points of note are:
All required sports should be defined and a design produced for the most
stringent requirements.
A good component of vertical illuminance should exist to aid the modelling of
objects and people.
Good colour rendering aids in the discrimination of team colours and sporting
equipment such as balls, etc. against the hall background.
The lighting should illuminate the entire three dimensional space, allowing
high objects to be easily seen.
The infinitely variable viewing positions of sports participants require good
glare control.
Luminaires should be robust and have protection against stray objects striking
them (such as a wire guard to protect the lamps). Ideally luminaires should be
designed and mounted to minimise the risks of object becoming trapped
within or behind them.
Lighting controls should be flexible to produce optimum conditions for all
required sports.
Key luminaires:
Assembly halls
Main objectives are to produce a suitable visual environment for all activities required
within the space. These may be school meetings, rehearsals and performances of school
productions, a space for formal written examinations, or others. Points of note are:
This is a place where the school presents itself to visitors at open events such
as school open days, meetings with parents or school productions and
concerts. Lighting should be designed to project a suitable image for the
school.
| 51
Education
Lighting control should be flexible to allow for lighting suitable for public
meetings, and also lighting that provides the flexibility of a small theatre for
public productions and concerts.
Lighting should have no flicker to minimise possible stress in examination
conditions.
Lighting should prevent shadowing of the task by the student, such as question
papers in formal examinations. Lighting should also gives a good CRF to
ensure good visibility of written text and diagrams.
Generally a viewing direction is defined by the hall design. Glare free
viewing in this direction should be ensured under all lit conditions.
For areas designed for presentations or performances, such as staging, good
vertical illuminance and colour rendering are required to aid in modelling and
discrimination.

Key luminaires:
Education
Schemes
Classrooms
Scheme: Design and Technology classroom, 15m x 7m x 2.7m

Luminaire(s) used: 15 custom 2x35W T16 luminaire
Floor: Eav = 558 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.75
Scheme: Circulation routes, varies x 2.7m high
Sche me: Ci rculation routes, Luminaire(s)

v aries x 2 .7mused:
high Chalice 190 2x26W TC-D on 2.4m
Lumi naire(s) used: Ch alice 190
2x26W
T C -D
2.4m
ntres.
Floor:
Eav = 143
luxo; nEmin
/Eav ce
= 0.22
Scheme: Storeroom, 1.7m x 3.5m x 2.8m
Floor: E av = 143lux; E min/E av = 0.22
Luminaire(s) used: 1 Diffusalux II 1x35W T16
Scheme: Classroom, 7.5m x 5.5m x 2.6m

Luminaire(s) used: 6 Omega BD/MB 4x18W T26 and 2 Punch
1x58W T26 lighting front board
Desks: Eav = 518 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.70
| 53
Education
Suspended linear direct/indirect luminaires in a
university library. The ceiling adds significantly to the visual
interest of the scene and the linear luminaires mimic the
architecture of the ceiling beams, also producing a component
of uplight that lights up the ceiling and give it life.
Lyric ceiling mounted luminaires lighting a school corridor. The

line of luminaires helps give guidance as to the shape of the
corridor, and their appearance brightens the space and visually
lifts the ceiling, making the corridor appear pleasant and airy.
Recessed fluorescent luminaires lighting a classroom. The

luminaires are laid out to permit maximum flexibility within the
space and the walls are pleasantly lit to exhibit poster and
displays childrens work. However, a lack of controls mean
luminaires remain lit in unused sections of the room, and are
unable to save energy by using the daylight spilling in from
windows on the right of the photograph.
5.4 Industry indoor

Techniques
General
The purpose of industrial lighting is to enable quick and accurate work, safely, and in a
good visual environment. Points of note are:
Illuminance on the task is the main criteria used for industrial lighting.
Therefore the extent of the task area needs to be determined.
Illuminance is often required for a vertical task. Illuminance on a vertical
surface is much more sensitive to changes in the spacing between luminaires
than illuminance on a horizontal surface.
Industrial areas generally contain obstructions that affect the lighting. For
overhead obstructions where possible install lighting below the obstruction. If
the area contains a few large obstructions ensure that all parts of the space
are lit by at least two luminaires. If the space contains multiple or extensive
obstructions the spacing between luminaires will need to be reduced to
counteract these and additional low level supplementary lighting may be
required. In all cases care should be taken to ensure obstructions do not
cause shadowing on the task.
For lamps used in industrial lighting a colour-rendering index of not less than
80 is required for all continuously occupied spaces. An exception is high bay
applications where HST/HSE lamps are acceptable.
In areas containing rotating machinery stroboscopic effects should be
eliminated or reduced by either using high frequency control gear (if
available) or by having alternate luminaires on different electrical phases and
ensuring that critical areas receive light in approximately equal proportions
from more than one luminaire. Alternatively lighting of the machinery may be
supplemented using local luminaires.
Emergency lighting will be required to aid in the safe evacuation of the
building when the normal lighting fails. In some industrial applications there is
an additional requirement to ensure all processes are in a safe and stable
state before evacuating the area. For others there is a need to continue
operations, even though the normal lighting has failed. The extent and nature
of the emergency lighting required is determined by the type of occupancy,
the size and complexity of the site and the processes involved.
| 55
Industry indoor
Luminaires should be chosen to ensure they are suitable for the environmental
conditions in the space. Many industrial spaces have conditions of excessive
heat, cold, vibration or a corrosive atmosphere. Information on any airborne
chemicals is important as plastics and rubbers have differing resistance to
specific chemicals. Additionally in hazardous environments the lighting
equipment has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire
or explosion (see chapter on directives and standards).
Many industrial environments have impurities in the power supply due to
electrical motors running, or couplers connecting/disconnecting huge loads
giving spikes and voltage fluctuations. In conditions with poor quality of
power low loss magnetic ballasts should be considered instead of electronic
ballasts as they could be more durable and tolerant. Alternatively industrial
high frequency circuits with extra protection may be available.
At the design stage consideration should be given as to how the lighting
installation is to be maintained. Frequently, access to light fittings is difficult
and methods to improve ease of access should be considered, along with
use of technology that minimises the necessity for intervention for
maintenance.
Factory spaces - Points of note are;
Traditional factory spaces for heavy engineering and manufacturing have
high ceilings combined with a dirty environment. High bay lighting is most
suitable in these areas.
More modern manufacturing areas tend to have lower ceilings and a cleaner
environment. Linear fluorescent lighting is suitable for these areas and a
selection of mounting methods exist, from track mounting to catenary systems.
Lighting should take into account the possibility of moving overhead gantries
and moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.
Key luminaires:
Industry indoor
Workshops - Points of note are;
Tasks in a workshop vary from large tasks with little visual difficulty to small
task with high visual difficulty. The designer needs to understand the degree
of difficulty of the task to ensure that the task is adequately lit for the degree of
difficulty.
Generally ceiling heights are intermediate to low, and uniform lighting is
required across the entire space. Therefore either linear fluorescent reflector
luminaires or low bay luminaires with HID lamps are suitable
Key luminaires:
Assembly work - Points of note are;

Assembly work can vary from large tasks with little visual difficulty to small task
with high visual difficulty. Additionally colour discrimination may be of little
importance or essential. The designer needs to understand the degree of
difficulty of the task to ensure that the task is adequately lit for the degree of
difficulty.
In areas with lower ceilings fluorescent lighting is most suitable. The
advantages of this are the ability to produce fairly shadow free conditions, a
wide choice of lamps of different colour rendering capabilities and colour
appearance, and the ease of using lighting controls and emergency lighting.
For ceiling heights of 6m or less, care should be taken when using low bay
luminaires to prevent excessive glare.
Lighting should take into account the safety of pedestrians in the presence of
moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.
Store rooms - Points of note are;
For bulk storage at floor level it is generally important to avoid dense
shadows. A reasonable illuminance on vertical surfaces is required if the
reading of identification marks or labels is frequently necessary.
| 57
Industry indoor
A suitable method of lighting these spaces is to use a closely spaced overhead
layout of luminaires with a wide distribution.
Lighting should take into account the safety of pedestrians in the presence of
moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.
Storage rack areas - Points of note are;
High racking can reduce lighting levels by up to 50%. Therefore an empty
space calculated for 300 lux will only achieve approximately 150 lux if high
racks are installed with narrow aisles.
It is good practice to light narrow aisles with runs of fluorescent luminaires
with narrow distributions arranged along the aisles to even out the vertical
illuminance from top to bottom of the racking whilst giving adequate
illumination along the aisle.
For mounting heights above 15m HID lamps may be used in luminaires with
a narrow lighting distribution across the aisle and a wide lighting distribution
along the aisle.
Cold stores - Points of note are;
It must be ensured that the lamp and luminaire chosen are capable of
operating within the low temperatures involved.
Thermally insulated fluorescent lamps may be used. Alternatively high pressure
sodium lamps can operate reliably at 40C.
Food and drink processing plants - Points of note are;
The food and drink industry covers a vast range of working areas, where
ambient temperatures can range from 30C to 50C, from oil or fat vapour
laden atmospheres to hazardous environments where the lighting equipment
has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire or
explosion. Therefore great care must be taken to ensure a suitable luminaire is
chosen for the specific conditions.
Where food product is processed luminaires near the product should be
housed in an enclosure that prevents the lamp or any part of the luminaire
accidentally falling into the product.
The luminaire should be easily cleaned, maintained and re-lamped, having
minimum horizontal surface area upon which dust can rest and smooth lines
with no crevices in which fungus can grow (IP55 minimum).
Industry indoor
Schemes
Aircraft Hanger
Scheme: Aircraft maintenance hanger, 125m x 40m, varying height

Luminaire(s) used: C
oncavia XL 1000W HIE, mounting height 15m, Concavia L 400W HIE, mounting
height 9m and Concavia L 250W HIE, mounting height 7m
Hanger area floor: Eav = 591 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.71
| 59
Industry indoor
Schemes
Storage racking
Scheme: Storage racking, racks 5.1m long x 6m high

Luminaire(s) used: 12 Indus RDx 2x49W T16, mounting height 6m
Racking: Eav (vertical) = 137 lux
A train workshop lit using fluorescent battens mounted on

trunking. The luminaires are positioned between the trains to
give a good vertical component of light falling on the sides of
the carriages.
Factory lighting using Popular Range luminaires. The

luminaires are track mounted to allow easy modification of the
lighting layout. It may therefore be easily adjusted to suit the
requirements or any changes to the layout of the factory space.
Industry indoor
Low-bay luminaires lighting a machine workshop. The Lopak

luminaires provide a good even illumination, allowing work
upon complex machines with minimum shadowing. Note that
this task has no special requirement for colour discrimination. If
this was the case the lamp type should be chosen to show
colours correctly.
Hi-bay luminaires lighting a large factory space. The luminaires

need to be able to cope with the relatively hostile and dirty
environment, and due to problems of access maintenance
requirements for the luminaires need to be minimal. The shape
of the luminaire aids in self-cleaning, directing air within the
reflector to help remove dirt, and the use of high pressure
sodium lamps ensures a long lamp life.
| 61
5.5 Industry outdoor

Techniques
General
The purpose of industrial lighting is to enable quick and accurate work, safely, and in a
good visual environment. Points of note are:
Illuminance on the task is the main criteria used for industrial lighting.
Therefore the extent of the task area needs to be determined.
Illuminance is often required for a vertical task. Illuminance on a vertical
surface is much more sensitive to changes in the spacing between luminaires
than illuminance on a horizontal surface.
Industrial areas generally contain obstructions that affect the lighting. For
overhead obstructions where possible install lighting below the obstruction. If
the area contains a few large obstructions ensure that all parts of the space
are lit by at least two luminaires. If the space contains multiple or extensive
obstructions the spacing between luminaires will need to be reduced to
counteract these and additional low level supplementary lighting may be
required. In all cases care should be taken to ensure obstructions do not
cause shadowing on the task.
Luminaires should be chosen to ensure they are suitable for the environmental
conditions in the space. Many industrial spaces have conditions of excessive
heat, cold, vibration or a corrosive atmosphere. Information on any airborne
chemicals is important as plastics and rubbers have differing resistance to
specific chemicals. Additionally in hazardous environments the lighting
equipment has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire
or explosion (section 9 - Directives and Standards).
Many industrial environments have impurities in the power supply due to
electrical motors running, or couplers connecting/disconnecting huge loads
giving spikes and voltage fluctuations. In conditions with poor quality of
power low loss magnetic ballasts should be considered instead of electronic
ballasts as they could be more durable and tolerant. Alternatively industrial
high frequency circuits with extra protection may be available.
At the design stage consideration should be given as to how the lighting
installation is to be maintained. Frequently access to light fittings is difficult
and methods to improve ease of access should be considered, along with
use of technology that minimises the necessity for intervention for
maintenance.
Industry outdoor
Building sites
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain
machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians, along with building materials,
excavations and incomplete structures.
Building sites can provide a special environment, in that it is common for a
maximum permissible voltage of 110V to be stipulated for all equipment that
is accessible to site workers. This excludes the use of high-pressure discharge
fixtures except where installed at a height that excludes access by normal site
personnel. Temporary lighting is normally by special linear fluorescent or
tungsten halogen luminaires.
Luminaires should be sited to allow for vehicular access to all necessary
areas.
Key luminaires:
Cargo handling, storage areas

Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain
machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians and in which the size and position of
obstructions may vary over time.
Care should be taken to avoid lighting obscuring or decreasing the visibility
of signalling equipment. This can include direct light and reflected light from
other surfaces.
Lighting equipment should be sited to ensure it does not obstruct movement of
cargo handling equipment, and should not be in too close proximity to
electrified lines.
Higher light levels are required in areas where goods are loaded/unloaded
and for potential conflict areas where cargo is sorted into handling bays or
railway sidings.
| 63
Industry outdoor
For large container storage areas general area lighting may be insufficient for
giving adequate light on the task. Additional task lighting in the form of
floodlights mounted on crane structures, or low voltage sealed beam units
mounted on forklift trucks can be used. Additional local lighting can also be
used mounted on fixed hoppers and conveyors. It should be ensured that the
transition between areas with higher light levels to those with lower light levels
is gradual to allow the eye to adapt to the changed light level.
Key luminaires:
Petrochemical and other hazardous areas

Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain a
hazardous atmosphere, machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians and in which the
consequences of safety issues may be especially serious.
For petrochemical facilities and tank farms plant layout is normally complex
with major light obstruction and work being performed at many levels above
ground level. High mounted floodlights in a number of positions situated
outside the main area can provide adequate light for safe movement and
some task work. Additional task lighting may be required for specific
locations.
Luminaires used should be correct for the environment they are used in.
Environments are classified using the ATEX system and luminaires should be
adequate for the ATEX classification of the environment (section 9, Directives
and Standards).
Industry outdoor
Quarries and open cast workings
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area that may contain
machinery, motorised vehicles, pedestrians and uneven and loose ground conditions.
With quarries and open cast mines the dimensions of the area to light will
change over time. Therefore the lighting installation should be designed for
the expected maximum dimensions of the excavations, both in size and depth
of workings. This will help prevent the need to relocate lighting masts, and
will allow forward planning for additional lighting to be installed as the
workings increase in size. As the workings increase in size re-aiming of
existing luminaires may be required.
Key luminaires:
Sales areas
Main objective is to advertise the presence of the sales area, and to allow customers to
examine and purchase goods. For areas such as petrol filling stations, safety is also very
important and local regulations for these should be consulted.
The illuminance of the sales area should be proportional to the brightness of
the surrounding district and should respect the requirements for the
environmental lighting zone classification (see section on control of obtrusive
light).
A high vertical component of light is generally required to show the sales
goods. Additionally the colour rendering qualities of the lighting should be
chosen to ensure the goods are displayed with a good colour appearance.
If the sales area is adjacent to a road care should be taken to ensure the
lighting does not introduce glare to motorists or pedestrians.
Key luminaires:
| 65
Industry outdoor
Lorry parks
Main objective is to provide a safe environment in an area that contains large motorised
vehicles and pedestrians.
Where possible lorry parks should be lit from the boundaries of the parking
area. This minimises the risk of columns and lighting being damaged by
manoeuvring vehicles. If columns have to be mounted within the parking area
they should be protected by crash barriers or similar.
Lighting should be mounted as high as possible (12m or more above ground
level) to minimise shadowing from lorry trailers.
Ease of maintenance should be considered during design, and head-frames
that may be raised and lowered should be considered.
Key luminaires:
Industry outdoor
Schemes
Transformer sub-station
Scheme: Transformer sub-station

Luminaire(s) used: Troika 400W HST (main building) and PRT 500W QT-DE with 3m mounting
height (transformer areas)
Typical transformer area: Eav = 23 lux
| 67
Industry outdoor
Schemes
Railway lighting
Scheme: Railway lighting, section 100m x 24m

Luminaire(s) used: Victor Stora 150W HST catenary mounted with 7.3m mounting height,
3 luminaires per wire, and 250W HST mounted columns with 10.3m
mounting height, 1 luminaire per column. Columns spaced at 25m
Track area: Eav = 41 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.22
Floodlighting at a port facility. The floodlights mounted on

the top of the structure light the suspended walkway, whilst
additional floodlights mounted below the walkway prevent
deep shadows being cast by the walkway onto the dockside.
5.6 Healthcare
Techniques
General
The lighting of healthcare spaces presents one of the most difficult tasks for any lighting
designer, lighting both for an enormous range of tasks, some times requiring extreme
levels of visual performance and yet creating a space that satisfies todays energy
requirements and just as importantly the comfort needs of the patients, staff and visitors.
The choice of lighting can affect task performance, well-being and whether patients and
visitors feel the space is clean and safe. The information given below is in two sections,
the fundamental requirements for lighting for healthcare and lighting requirements for
specific locations.
The fundamental requirements for lighting for healthcare could be as follows:
Cleanliness
Infection control is of prime importance in all healthcare buildings. Airborne
particulates as small as 0.5m can transfer harmful bacteria. In addition,
transmission by the touch of a hand can add to the spread of infection. In
lighting terms we need to defend against this by using luminaires that have
the minimum area of horizontal or near horizontal surfaces on which dust may
collect. All luminaires that could collect dust or be touched by hand should be
designed to be easily cleaned.
In areas of high infection risk, luminaires with only downward and vertical
faces or those specifically designed for clean environments. Such luminaires
will utilise materials impervious to bacteria, and also designed with suitable
ingress protection for dust and moisture both into the luminaire and from the
ceiling void through the luminaire into the clean space.
Daylight
Research shows that daylight and window view can have positive effects on
patients, their sleep patterns, circadian rhythms and recovery rates form many
illnesses. Thus it is common practice for modern spaces to include good
daylight design. Given that good levels of daylight should be expected in
areas for treatment, administration, waiting, circulation and overnight stay, the
use of lighting controls offers not only added comfort but also impacts heavily
on energy. The addition of lighting controls can allow for changing tasks,
changes in daylight and add levels of user comfort to a space.
| 69
Healthcare
Fields of view
Remember that the field of view in many healthcare spaces may include the
ceiling and upper walls and often may include luminaires. The point of view
of a recumbent patient will need to be thought about to limit discomfort glare
in many circulation and treatment spaces.
Colour
Skin tone and eye colour in many healthcare establishments are often
important in diagnosis. This is extended to include flesh and other colours
during invasive treatments. Hence the ability of light sources to render true
colours is vital in all areas where diagnosis and treatment is carried out, and
a consistent, high quality source of colour rendering should be provided. All
lamps within these areas should have an Ra of at least 90.
In other spaces where diagnosis and treatment is not carried out colour
rendering can be relaxed to an Ra of 80, but on no account should lamps of
different colour rendering be mixed in the same space.
The other aspect to colour is that of colour temperature. Common practice is
to use 4000K lamps in all healthcare spaces, but in areas where there is a
wish to provide a more homely feel, the colour temperature may need to be
matched to that prevalent at home, for example nearer 2700K for the UK.
Similarly different colour temperatures should not be mixed in any one space.
Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting is required for the movement of patients, staff and visitors
to a place of safety. In certain healthcare buildings the emergency lighting
will need to take account of tasks that have to continue even when other
spaces may be evacuated, this is called Standby lighting. In critical areas,
such as operating theatres, delivery rooms and high dependency units, the
illuminance provided by the standby lighting should equal 90% of the normal
mains illuminance or there about. Other important tasks but in non-critical
areas will require standby lighting generally to 50% of the normal level.
Some patients will almost certainly be physically or mentally incapacitated. In
this case it is likely that the condition of patients will mean it is difficult to
evacuate them in an emergency. Emergency lighting for these situations
should be sufficient to allow progressive evacuation, or to allow time at points
of refuge. Apart from the above emergency lighting should be designed to
meet the requirements of EN1838.
A generator will generally supply standby lighting and special account of the
changeover and run up time will be needed. Escape routes generally will be
covered by luminaires with integral emergency control gear.
Healthcare
Light for comfort
Recent research shows strong links between good lighting, the colour of light
and human comfort. For instance warm colour temperatures make patients
look healthier and improve patient moral, but care must be taken to prevent
compromising the ability for clinical diagnosis.
Recent research also indicates that light therapy may have potential for
improving the quality of life for elderly people. The reception of blue light
decreases with age due to the aging of the eye reducing its efficiency,
especially at the blue end of the spectrum. Also in the elderly the reduction in
mobility and tolerance of adverse weather (such as cold, wind and rain)
mean elderly people experience a reduction in ability to go out of doors.
Therefore they receive less exposure to bright light, and especially bright light
of the correct wavelengths. Additionally the circadian functions may be
compromised through age and damage caused by small strokes. All of these
result in poor quality of sleep. Light therapy may be used to help improve
sleep quality, using both artificial light and by designing the environment to
aid access to natural light and to make the outdoor environment more
attractive and friendly. However the use of blue biased white light for health is
still a relatively new concept with limited knowledge on benefits and potential
side-effects so at present blue biased white light should be used sparingly and
with care.
Artificial lighting should incorporate features to help provide sufficient light
during waking hours for health benefits, but during the night only provide
minimum light for safety, preferable amber, orange or red in colour, to preserve
the bodies sleep cycle. Importantly, the consequences of any artificial lighting
on the carers should be carefully considered to prevent further problems.
Colour and reflectance
High reflectance materials are required to give visual lightness, otherwise the
surface and hence the space itself will appear dark. Equally areas of strong
colour, such as murals in childrens wards, will need to be well lit to give full
vibrancy.
High chroma colours will affect clinical diagnosis Grey is a good, if boring,
clinical background and has been shown to relax and reduce stress. But the
effect of surface colour can be immense, not only in terms of reflected light but
also energy efficiency and wellbeing. For instance colour should be chosen to
flatter the patients appearance, soft lighting enhances this. Also consider
colour psychology e.g. Use of blues and green (used for calming effect in
mental health institutions) may actually exacerbate depression, the modern
fashions (greys and browns) may be under stimulating for long-term patients.
| 71
Healthcare
The lighting requirements for specific locations could be as follows:
Entrance canopies
It is important that entrances are clearly lit to advertise the way into the
building whilst providing sufficient light for the task perhaps including driving,
unloading ambulances, access for wheel chairs, and so on.
Lighting solutions should provide good vertical illumination avoiding down
lights with harsh cut-offs. This will provide good facial recognition for CCTV.
Entrance halls, waiting areas and lift lobbies
Lighting here should emphasise points of interest such as reception desks,
signage and onward routes.
Where there are a number of routes to different departments signage may
take the form of coloured lines, flooring or other decoration, the lighting
should enhance this where ever possible
Reception
These areas, including enquiry and patient reception, should make the patient
and visitor feel welcome and provide both staff and visitors with good facial
modelling through good vertical illuminance.
Staff here will often have to use computer display screens, but the emphasis
on this should never out weigh user comfort. An approach focused on the
many tasks and points of view is important.
Hospital streets and other circulation routes
Hospital streets form the major links between clinical departments with
smaller corridors often running off to other areas. Streets will have relatively
high use and will be wider and often higher than conventional corridors. In
many corridors, certainly those in areas occupied by patients overnight, the
lighting will require dimming or switching to a lower level at night. This is can
be achieved either through dimming or switching, care being needed to
maintain uniformity above 0.2.
Where there is sufficient daylight savings can be made using daylight linked
dimming controls.
Spill light and glare to patient rooms and to trolley bourn patients must also
be considered, the latter being achieved through asymmetric luminaires
mounted along one side of the corridor.
Healthcare
Ward corridors need specific night lighting techniques to allow safe
movement of staff without affecting patient rest. The lighting near the doors to
bedded wards will require careful illuminance and luminance control. Three
hour self-contained emergency lighting is needed on all escape routes.
Stairs
Stairs require careful lighting and tread colour design to ensure the tread is
clear to all users including those with visual disability. Treads need clear and
reasonably uniform lighting with some element of contrast to the riser.
Glare from wall-mounted fittings should be limited by using lower brightness
light sources, whereas soffit mounted luminaires often create installation and
maintenance problems.
Stairs will need careful emergency lighting.
WCs, washrooms and changing areas
Lighting should be sympathetic avoiding harsh directional light or shadowing.
Lighting should be positioned for lockers, mirrors sinks and make up areas
with the task, facial modelling and veiling reflections in mind.
In wet or humid environments the lighting should be of a suitable ingress
protection, normally IP54 or better.
Lighting of bedded areas
The general lighting must be adequate for the care of the patients by the
nursing staff. For these duties to be performed efficiently the illuminance inside
a curtained bedded area should be no less than 300 lux from a combination
of ambient and task lighting and the illuminance in the central space between
the bed foot rails should be not less than 100 lux (75 lux when all curtains
are closed), measured at floor level. Good glare control is needed with UGR
limited to 19. However, note that in some countries additional luminaire
luminance limits are also specified.
The balance of brightness and colour of the surroundings should help to
provide a visually pleasing interior. To achieve this the reflectance of the major
surfaces should be of the order of 0.7 for the ceiling, 0.5 for the walls and
0.2 for the floor, though higher ceiling and wall reflectance is essential when
lighting the ward from the bed head position.
Suspended luminaires: The ceiling height for suspended luminaires should not
be less than 3m to ensure adequate clearance for mobile apparatus used at
the bedside. The mounting height above the floor should not be less than
2.7m nor greater than 3.5m.
| 73
Healthcare
Ceiling mounted luminaires: The ceiling height may be 3m or less. In areas
with ceiling heights between 2.4m and 2.7m, it is possible to provide the
recommended illuminance at the bedhead only by using ceiling mounted
luminaires.
Wall mounted luminaires: Modern lighting systems comply with the general
recommendations using only semi direct wall mounted luminaires with
fluorescent lamps. The most suitable height for wall-mounted luminaires is a
minimum of 1.7m.
Recessed and semi-recessed luminaires: Recessed and semi-recessed
luminaires may be used in ceilings between 2.4m and 3m high. If these
luminaires will not provide the illuminance required at the bedhead a dual
system will be required.
Dual systems: For dual systems in which supplementary lighting along the side
walls of the bedded area is used, ceiling mounted luminaires may still be
suitable.
Reading lights/examination lighting: The patients reading light is required to
give 300 lux directly on a task area in front of the patient. Staff or nursing
tasks at the bedhead can also use the reading light. If treatment is given at
the bedside requiring an illuminance exceeding 300 lux, either a mobile
examination luminaire is required or the reading light is to be designed to
provide this illuminance by switching. Hand-held switches, if used, should be
of the extra low voltage type. Reading lights are usually provided for all beds
in hospitals, but it may be undesirable to have them within easy reach of
children and mentally ill patients. For such circumstances, high-level wall or
ceiling mounted luminaires should be used and the switches should be out of
the patients reach.
Night lighting: Night lighting is required to provide enough light for safe
movement of patients and staff. It should not disturb lightly sleeping patients.
The luminance of any luminaire left on during the night should not exceed
30 cd/m2 as seen by patients from their beds, the cut off angle being 20
within the curtained area and 35 in central zones. The illuminance for the
circulation space should be an average 5 lux on circulation spaces, 0.85m
off the floor and a maximum of 10lux. The illuminance on the bedhead
should not exceed 0.5 lux
Watch lighting: The purpose of watch lighting is to allow continuous
observation of a particular patient after the general lighting has been
switched off, without the disturbance, which would be caused by the patients
reading light. An illuminance of 15-20 lux is adequate.
Healthcare
Nurses stations and staff bases
Nurses stations provide for a number of tasks including dispensing medicine,
ad hoc meetings, greeting visitors and PC use. Lighting should allow for all
these tasks both during the day and at night. To do so will require lighting that
has good luminance control both to reduce glare to PC users and patients
sleeping nearby.
Dimming control is essential to allow staff to reduce the illuminance at night.
Operating Theatres and associated clinical spaces
Lighting here needs to provide for clinical examination, preparation, treatment
and movement, this will include good vertical illuminance from the ambient
lighting. The theatre surgical lights are specialist and should be provided as
part of the overall theatre equipment.
Lighting colour rendering and temperature should be chosen for clinical
diagnosis rather than energy efficiency.
In an emergency all lighting should be retained at full brightness.
Lighting also needs to provide good uniformity, be dimmable to suit the
surgical need and take account of the high number of monitoring screens,
often using negative polarity displays.
Luminaires chosen for these spaces must be easy to clean and maintain and
should have an IP rating of 65 from below and 54 or better from above.
Ancillary areas & other specialist spaces
Healthcare buildings contain many ancillary areas to do with the efficient and
safe functioning of the whole building. Many of these are covered elsewhere,
but special care may need to be paid to protecting healthcare environments
from hospital bourn diseases. Improved IP ratings or luminaires suitable for
regular wash down and cleaning may need to be considered.
In specialist treatment and examination rooms not mentioned above there may
be other requirements too, such as dimming and glare control in ophthalmic
rooms, noise and EMC control in scanner and audiology and electromedical
screening rooms.
| 75
Healthcare
Schemes
Healthcare rooms
Scheme: 4-bed ward, 7.6m x 6.6m x 2.7m

Luminaire(s) used: Bedhead mounted uplight and reading light
Ward floor: Eav = 141 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.68
Scheme: Consulting room, 8m x 3m x 2.7m

Luminaire(s) used: 3 Diffusalux Hospital 2x35W T16
Desk height: Eav = 440 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.7
Healthcare
Lighting in hospital wards may use bed head luminaires with
integrated services such as oxygen, electricity, etc. or ceiling
mounted luminaires (either surface mounted or recessed). The
advantage of a bed head luminaire is the flexibility of lighting,
with uplighting supplying ambient light to the ward, and
differing amounts of down light allowing a patient to read or a
doctor to examine the patient. An additional advantage for bed
head systems is ease of access for maintenance and cleaning.
Ceiling mounted luminaires allow easier centralised control of
lighting by nursing staff and may be a more energy efficient
solution as, unlike bed head systems, they do not rely on uplight
being reflected from the ceiling to give ambient lighting to the
room. When using ceiling recessed lighting it is important that
it is planned in conjunction with other services to ensure a clear
space in the ceiling void for the luminaire.
Corridors and circulation areas should be well lit and airy.

Ideally ceiling mounted lighting should avoid the centre of
the corridor as recumbent patients being wheeled along the
corridor should not be looking directly into a luminaire as this
may be glaring, and looking into luminaires whilst travelling
down the corridor may create an unpleasant flicker effect.
| 77
5.7 Super/hypermarket
Techniques
General
The purpose of a super/hypermarket lighting scheme is to make the store as appealing
as possible to customers. It also needs to satisfy more down-to-earth requirements such as
facilitating orientation or to attract customer attention to special displays or points of
interests. Luminaires have to be chosen in order to underline and reinforce the individual
character of the shop brand or chain of stores. Colour appearance of the light
determines the overall ambience but colour rendering characteristics have a direct
impact on ensuring that the objects are shown to their best advantage.
The fundamental requirements for shop lighting could be as follows:
Creating atmosphere: the way goods are presented and lit, as well as the
general atmosphere, can positively influence a customer.
Creating interest: using accent lighting to create areas that make a customer
curious and wanting to see more.
Visual guidance: the lighting must help the customer navigate around the
shop.
Flexibility: marketing trends and initiatives change frequently and in order to
influence customers into rediscovering a shop it should be possible to easily
adapt the lighting to new requirements.
Lighting should allow consumers to examine the merchandise and should help
complete the sale.
General lighting
Main objective is to provide a background ambience and to give light for guidance,
especially in the case of frequent modifications to the store layout or promotions.
As well as good horizontal light levels vertical light levels are important as
shop goods tend to be held in vertical shelving units
As this is background store lighting a high uniformity is required
Luminaires should be placed perpendicular to shelving in order to facilitate
any reorganisation of the shelving and the possibility of variable spacing of
shelving due to different types of goods being sold in different areas.
Super/hypermarket
Key luminaires:
Accent lighting
By locally increasing or decreasing the quantity of light it is possible to create variation
in shadows and brightness. The aim of this is to give a maximum expression to
merchandise, enhancing form, texture and colour in contrast with the surroundings.
Ideally this should optimise the relationship between space, product and customer in
order to enhance the prospects of a sale.
Accent lighting should be at least 3x brighter than the surround to be
noticeable or 5x brighter to be meaningful.
Focal-point lighting, which highlights a specific central display with feature
merchandise, should be 10x brighter than the surround and generally uses
spotlighting
Display case lighting illuminates merchandise in glass or open cases and
shelves. It can be linear fluorescent or spotlighting depending on the type of
display
Perimeter lighting provides vertical illumination for merchandise along walls,
such as vertical shelving and can use valance systems or linear wall-washing
systems
Key luminaires:
Lighting clothing
The primary purpose of lighting is to make merchandise look good, increasing the
desirability of the item leading to a sale. When lighting clothing a flexible lighting
solution is needed to allow the lighting to be reconfigured when displays are altered or
moved. The market positioning of the store (high, mid, low-tier) should be considered
when designing the installation, and also the possible options for display, as clothing
| 79
Super/hypermarket
may be hung on rails, displayed on shelves or shown in an entirely novel way. Differing
materials used in the design of the display fittings and the size of the displays will require
differing lighting techniques. However lighting should remain discrete to ensure the main
focus is the merchandise, and should be as efficient as practicable.
One of the main issues with clothing is colour rendering and colour
temperature. Customers need to see the items they are thinking of buying in a
quality of light that shows the garment correctly. Any post purchase
dissatisfaction when seeing the article in the daylight must be avoided. The
Ra of the lamp must be at least 85 so that colours are reproduced as faithfully
as possible. Also note that the UV characteristics of the lamp should be
checked to ensure that it is suitable for the material being lit and will cause no
effects such as fading of colours.
New generations of metal halide lamp offer a wide choice of warm or cool
white light. LEDs with their improved performance are also becoming more
widely used. LED luminaires can be smaller and easy to blend into the
background. However, downlights and track mounted spotlights remain the
most common fixtures.
Key luminaires:
Greengrocery
Main objectives are to ensure that fruits and vegetables are shown under the best colour
rendering bright light. Using specific type of lamps that create colourful accents can
bring out freshness of produce. Warm accents are preferred with a low content of
actinic radiations (to prevent fading of colour in goods) and low heat radiation.
This kind of light is often realised with suspended structures hanging above
the displays allowing spotlights integration.
Key luminaires:
Super/hypermarket
Bakery, cheese and delicatessen
A warm, oven-fresh appearance can be created on the bread, while cream pastries
appear appetising when illuminated by halogen lamps or warm white metal halide.
Key luminaires:
Wines and spirits

A lower lighting level helps to recreate the atmosphere of a wine cellar. With lower dark
ceilings mounted with fluorescent downlights the atmosphere may be emphasised further.
Key luminaires:
Fresh food counters

The ceiling is often lower than in the rest of the hypermarket. Recessed luminaires
provide a good illuminance level, accentuating the freshness of the displays with a
combination of different high Ra colour lamps.
Key luminaires:
| 81
Super/hypermarket
Task lighting
This provides illumination for a specific functional area such as the checkout counter. This
is not to be confused with accent or focal-point lighting. Particular attention has to be
paid to avoid any glare at the cashier position in order to assure a comfortable activity
with no mistakes. The area beyond the checkout should be lit to a level that provides a
transition zone for shoppers leaving the supermarket and going into daylight or the dark
of night.
Key luminaires:
Guidance
Indoor guidance - due to the diversity of goods a clear communication with colours,
graphemes, and lighting has to be established in order to guide customers. This
guidance is sometimes mandatory for safety reasons: exit ways being indicated in case
of emergency evacuations.
Key luminaires:
Signage
Additional to guidance the use of lighting to signal locations and features is important.
For outdoor lighting, facades, communication, logos, etc. help present the sales policy
and brand positioning.
Key luminaires:
Super/hypermarket
Schemes
Super-store
Scheme: Computer super-store, 37m x 51m x 7m

Luminaire(s) used: Primata II 2x58W T26 with 5m mounting height, Sirios 150W HIT-DE
(spotlight) and 2x55W Voyager Twinspot (emergency lighting)
Sales area: Eav = 802 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.68
| 83
Super/hypermarket
Schemes
Hypermarket
Scheme: Hypermarket, 80m x 63m

Luminaire(s) used: Arena 2x70W T26
Scheme: Hypermarket, 80m x 63m

Luminaire(s) used: Arena 2x70W T26
Wall-washing luminaires illuminating food products on shelving.

It is important to ensure a good level of vertical illuminance
on shelving so that products are adequately lit. Colour of light
can make a large impact on the appearance of goods and
should be carefully matched to the requirements of the product
on display.
Super/hypermarket
The lighting should allow for large obstructions such as signage
and seasonal decorations to be displayed without causing
shadowing.
Lighting demands may vary across the store, with differing

store configuration and colour needs. Accent lighting along the
front of counters can make them stand out and appear more
welcoming.
Consideration should be given as to the goods being lit. Glass

and crystal objects should be made to sparkle, light appearing
to come from inside the object, whilst solid objects such as
clothes need to have light projected onto them.
| 85
5.8 Road lighting

Techniques
General
The human eye does not perform well in the dark or at dusk when visual performance is
impaired by lower visual acuity, poorer colour discrimination and a much lower
tolerance to disability glare hence the increased accident risk to drivers and
pedestrians.
Road lighting plays a very important role in reducing accidents, and research has
shown that good road lighting will significantly reduce accidents. Road lighting provides
guidance through conflict areas such as junctions. This can be reinforced by the use of
different lamp colours to distinguish a change of road classification or area definition.
Road lighting can also have a secondary effect of preventing crime.
The amount of light required on a road to reveal objects i.e. vehicles, pedestrians and
obstructions depends upon the amount or density of traffic, the speed of the traffic and if
pedestrians are present mixed usage areas. Crime rates also determine the lighting
level required. For traffic routes a silhouette vision system is used.
Operating costs and environmental impact are important and the use of photocells to
reduce the number of hours the lighting is used can be very economical. Lighting control
systems can provide even further savings by allowing switching or dimming of lamps at
of-peak or night time situations. Points of note are:
Luminance is the main criteria for traffic route lighting, so the road
characteristics and the observer positions needs to be determined.
If illuminance has to be considered all the involved areas have to be taken
into account including vehicles and pedestrian.
As one of main concerns in road lighting is extended maintenance operations
luminaires with high IP ratings are recommended
In addition to extended maintenance periods it is also desirable to reduce the
maintenance and installation operations to a minimum, therefore the use of a
tool-free lantern is suggested.
Lamps with a high luminous efficacy are mainly used, preferably HST/E ones.
Additionally latest technology has improved efficacy in lamps with a higher
colour rendering such as CFL and HIT-CE and some of the latest standards
benefit this technology and allows using a lower class but improving the
quality of the light.
Road lighting
The use of electronic control gear is recommended. Although this increases
initial investment it is shortly repaid by extending lamp life and maintenance
periods.
Lighting controls for road lighting applications cover a wide range of
applications, from a single fitting controlled by a photocell to a large-scale
installation monitored from a remote control point and managing luminaire
data in real time. Therefore lighting controls should be considered because in
addition to reducing power consumption they extend lamp life and give the
possibility to remotely identify failures and optimise maintenance operations.
Multiple fitting enclosures are available although each has an optimal
application. Polycarbonate enclosures are more resistant to vandal attacks,
shallow glass maximises optical performance and flat glass reduces possible
glare issues.
In low mounting height installations with a risk of vandal attacks, a
polycarbonate bowl is highly recommended and the use of vandal proof
screws to fix the luminaire to the column and reinforced closing clips secured
by special screws are also recommended.
When considering a possible proposal for a road it is recommended to have
information of the existing road lighting. Many projects are a continuation of
previous installations or new parts from a previously light area. In these cases
it is good to introduce newer technologies without confusing the users. Better
optical fittings can be used but try to keep a similar layout, mounting height,
etc.
At the design stage not only the requirements for the road have to be
considered, in all cases the adjacent areas should be taken into account and
that will define the best option. When houses and the road are close to each
other low mounting heights, use of brackets and low glare fittings are a highly
recommended although this may not lead to be the best functional solution.
Highways and high speed roads - Points of note are;
These roads are designed for high speeds (>60km/h) and no pedestrians,
cyclists or slow vehicles are involved. There are no intersections and access is
controlled.
Traditional mounting heights are above 12 m to properly light a twin
carriageway with 3 or 4 lanes plus a hard shoulder at either side. Brackets
should be considered to optimise performance.
| 87
Road lighting
Although traditionally columns have been installed in a central reservation, an
opposite installation with columns behind the hard shoulder can improve
maintenance operations and reduce traffic disruption when in process.
As glare becomes a major concern an optimised designed optic and/or the
use of flat glass enclosures are necessary.
Key luminaires:
Main Roads - Points of note are;

The main usage of the road is for vehicles at high speed (>60km/h) but
pedestrians, cyclists or slow vehicles may also be present on footpaths, cycle
paths and slow lanes. Intersections can be present and need special
attention.
A common installation is using columns around 10m high and in an opposite
or twin central configuration but it needs to always be related to the road
layout, the number of lanes involved and the lighting criteria to achieve.
Where cycle and pedestrian pathways are present the use of luminaires with
different lamp settings is beneficial to comply with requirements for the road
and also to be able to correctly light the pathways without needing to change
the pole characteristics.
As in all road lighting applications a high IP rating has to be considered to
extend maintenance periods.
Key luminaires:
Road lighting
Ring roads and radial roads - Points of note are;
These are usually medium speed roads and high-speed urban roads where
pedestrians and cyclists are common.
Luminaire mounting heights around 8 and 10m in a staggered or single sided
arrangement are usual, although many other possibilities can be considered
due to the multiple layouts of these roads.
As these roads can be of multiple lanes the main concern is the common use
by cyclist and pedestrians usage.
In some cases, when a road has many lanes and cycle and/or pedestrian
pathways are also present the use of twin poles may be considered (i.e.
using an additional luminaire at a separate mounting height to light the
adjacent pathways) or alternatively the use of bollards which also provide a
physical separation between traffic types. In these cases using different light
sources for motorised and other traffic (such as high pressure sodium and a
white light lamp) can help to differentiate between the two areas.
Key luminaires:
Mixed traffic roads - Points of note are;

These are normally medium to low speed roads with a large number of slow
vehicles and pedestrians. Intersections are very common. Regional roads and
urban roads are mainly part of this group as well as commercial streets.
Columns no higher than 8m are commonly used in a single sided or
staggered layout, although in some commercial streets with wide footpaths an
additional column and luminaire may be used to achieve high quality lighting
and differentiate areas.
For regional roads low luminance classes should be applied and illuminance
classes where pedestrian usage is relevant.
Key luminaires:
| 89
Road lighting
Residential and local roads - Points of note are;
These roads are normally used by low speed mixed traffic. Pedestrian areas
and local and residential roads are mainly part of this group.
Low mounting heights are common, with column height usually under 6m.
Single sided layouts may be used to reduce installation costs although layouts
may vary due to multiple access points to private car parks or properties. The
use of staggered layouts is common when parking lanes and wide footpaths
are present.
Lighting classes tend to be from lower categories and in residential areas the
use of high colour rendering lamps to improve perception is recommended.
In applications where crime ratios are high and facial recognition is required
vertical and semi-cylindrical illuminance classes should be applied.
Low glare luminaires should be considered to reduce light trespass onto
adjacent residential housing. Additionally the location and the orientation of
the luminaires can help avoid any light trespass into houses.
Key luminaires:
Conflict areas and junctions - Points of note are;

In these areas traffic, either motorised or pedestrian, converges from many
directions. Lighting in these areas has to increase awareness and guidance to
drivers and pedestrians regarding the geometry of the area and the position
of other users.
In terms of lighting the highest applicable class should be used in these areas,
using the highest class of the incoming roads.
Road lighting
Access and exit lanes should be highlighted, including a short section of these
lanes away from the conflict area. This is to ensure any obstacle in these
areas is visible.
When positioning the luminaires the main aim is to help the incoming vehicles
visibility. When entering a junction from a minor road a luminaire should be
positioned to make vehicles visible as they approach the conflict area.
Columns can play a major role not only in terms of providing lighting but also
to give guidance to the geometry of the area. A common technique is to
increase the height of the columns in the conflict area and on the approaches.
On roundabouts columns placed in a single sided configuration around the
outer part of a curve provide a clear guidance for a driver as they approach
the area.
Key luminaires:
| 91
Road lighting
Schemes
Traffic
Scheme: Traffic route, 3 lanes, opposite arrangement. Total width 10.95m

Luminaire(s) used: Triumph 1 150W HST, 10m mounting height, 36m spacing, 5 tilt
Road: Lav = 5.75 cd/m ; Emin/Eav = 0.59;
Threshold increment = 2%
Scheme: A
ccess ramp, width 4m
Luminaire(s) used: Orus 70W CDM-T, 0.9m mounting height, 10.5m spacing
Road: Eav = 33 lux ; Emin = 15 lux
Road lighting
Lighting columns and fixtures may be themed to blend into
and complement the area they are situated within. Careful
choice of column height is necessary to prevent lighting
becoming excessively visible and detracting from the view.
However, a column height that is too low will reduce installation
performance and require additional lanterns.
Whenever designing an installation the impact of the lighting
hardware on a scene during daylight hours should be
considered, as well as the performance of the lighting during
darkness.
Catenary lighting solutions in which the lanterns are suspended

along the centre of the carriageway are popular in many
countries and remove the need for lighting columns and
brackets. This can create a less cluttered environment at street
level, although in architecturally interesting areas thought should
be given as to the effect of the additional cabling on the field
of view.
Frequently lighting columns collect additional street furniture,

such as banners or signage. Lighting columns are constructed
to withstand a defined windage (that is the force of the wind
on the column). Windage is directly related to the surface
area of any furniture mounted on or fixed to the column, and
therefore adding additional objects to the column will increase
the windage loading, and may cause weakening of the column
and structural failure.
| 93
5.9 Urban decorative roadlighting and

amenity areas
Techniques
General
Amenity lighting provides the essential lighting for the city or town shopping centres,
residential streets, cycle paths, pedestrian crossings, precincts, town squares, parks, car
parks both indoor and outdoor, underpasses and general security lighting. The mix of
slow moving vehicles and pedestrians creates a challenge and the main emphasis is
towards pedestrians, reducing accidents and helping prevent crime and the fear of
crime.
Lighting can fulfil both functional and decorative elements by providing sufficient lighting
to provide orientation and direction with security after dark. Good amenity lighting can
provide guidance through city or town areas by the use of themed lighting, whether by
using styled lighting equipment or by the use of different colour appearance light sources
to provide aesthetic interest.
Operating costs and environmental impact are important and the use of photocells to
reduce the number of hours the lighting is used can be very economical. Lighting control
systems can provide even further savings by allowing switching or dimming of lamps at
of-peak or night time situations.
Feeder Roads - Points of note are;
The risk of accidents is much greater on feeder roads from the high volume
and speed of vehicles, particularly where children, elderly, partially sighted
and handicapped pedestrians are present. Correctly designed lighting
systems however will help drivers and pedestrians recognise potentially
dangerous situations and will also help reduce crime against people, vehicles
and property.
Feeder Roads generally use asymmetric light distribution street lanterns on
810m columns with outreach arms to position the lantern in the optimum
location for road geometry. Alternatively lanterns can be post top mounted
(without the outreach arm) but the lanterns will need the ability to re-direct the
lantern peak intensity (typically using an adjustable lampholder) into road
centre to improve efficiency and reduce installation and running costs.
For dual carriageway installations lanterns mounted back to back on centrally
mounted lighting columns provide good economy and lighting efficiency.
However it is important to ensure the pavements are adequately illuminated.
Urban decorative roadlighting and

amenity areas
White light sources Metal halide, compact fluorescent and induction lamps
provide good colour rendering conditions for drivers and pedestrians,
improving visual perception and helping to provide early warning of
impending situations. High-pressure sodium light sources are more efficient but
suffer from poorer colour rendering characteristics.
Vandalism should not be a problem to lanterns mounted at 8-10m but in
extreme cases polycarbonate bowls might be required.
Key luminaires:
Local and residential roads - Points of note are;

For local and residential roads post top lanterns on 5-8m poles with a
symmetric or asymmetric distribution will help provide good vertical
illuminance. Light above the horizontal should be avoided to reduce sky
glow, improve efficiency and create less glare to drivers and residents.
Narrow pavements may need lanterns mounted using wall brackets.
Lanterns can be themed or styled to suit neighbourhood road and architectural
layout. Strongly themed lanterns may require a lower mounting height 4-5m.
White light sources provide good colour rendering conditions for drivers and
pedestrians improving visual perception and helping to provide early warning
of impending situations.
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires may be required using polycarbonate.
Key luminaires:
| 95

amenity areas
Open Pedestrian/Shopping Precincts
The object of the lighting should promote easy movement of pedestrians with a feeling
of general security and well-being. Points of note are:
For arcades and canopied areas lighting levels should be relatively high to
match those of the surrounding shop windows. Good colour rendering is
important and therefore compact fluorescent and metal halide white light
sources are preferred.
Creating visual interest can help to highlight architectural features within the
areas and can also provide guidance through the area.
Post top lanterns on 4-6m high columns with a symmetric lighting distribution
will help provide a good balance between the horizontal and vertical
surfaces. Wall mounted luminaires or recessed IP rated downlights can be
used to reduce installation costs associated with lighting columns.
Architecturally/period styled lighting equipment will provide a good
integration into the surrounding building architecture. This is especially
important where daytime integration needs to be considered in architecturally
sensitive areas.
Light above the horizontal should be avoided to reduce sky glow, improve the
efficiency of the installation and help prevent glare to drivers.
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires may be required.
Key luminaires:
Squares/Open areas
Access to squares is often through mixed vehicle and pedestrian access routes
requiring high levels of illuminance for safety.
A pleasing effect may be created using decorative or themed post top
lanterns mounted on 5-6m high columns with architectural/themed styling.

amenity areas
Additional feature lighting for fountains, trees/shrubs and pathways should be
used. The use of LED or low wattage metal halide ground inset uplights can
create exciting lighting effects, guidance and interest, particularly when using
colour and movement, helping to attract pedestrians into the square. Care
must be taken to ensure good drainage is allowed for all inset uplights.
Lighting bollards can help to reduce the visual impact of lighting equipment
during the day. However care must be taken in positioning high brightness
light sources at almost the same height as a car drivers eye-line. The use of
internal louvres or refractors will help reduce glare by shielding the bare
lamp.
The lighting of statues and adjacent buildings must be co-ordinated with the
general ambient lighting level within the square so they compliment the overall
effect.
Fountains can be effectively lit using submersible floodlights beneath the
falling water to make the light refract and spread over a wider area. The use
of colour filters will also help the effect. Fibre optics and LEDs can be used to
create colour and movement, particularly if the light emitting elements are
positioned adjacent or inside the fountain spouts.
Shrubberies, trees and flowerbeds can benefit from localised lighting to
provide a contrasting effect at night. Light and shadow can be effective
particularly on trees, even in winter. The use of colour filters can also help, but
too much colour will reduce the efficiency of the lighting system.
Key luminaires:
Footpaths
The level of lighting is primarily determined by the crime risk whilst also
providing guidance and the ability to negotiate obstructions and stairways.
Dark patches and high light/dark contrasts should be avoided as they can
affect adaptation and impair visibility. The lighting of areas adjacent to
footpaths will help to improve the feeling of safety.
| 97

amenity areas
For open areas such as parks the same lighting principles apply however
crime prevention may require a higher uniformity and extra lighting to the
sides of the footpath to create a safer feel to the pathway. Good vertical light
onto adjacent areas to reveal shrubs and risk areas will help create a feeling
of safety.
Lighting is generally either by post top symmetric lanterns mounted on 5-6m
columns, bulkhead or amenity lanterns mounted on adjacent walls or
surfaces, or by low-level bollards. For areas with a high crime rate high level
floodlighting may be required.
White light sources provide good colour rendering conditions for pedestrians,
improving visual perception.
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires will be required.
Key luminaires:
Cyclepaths - Points of note are;

With increasing numbers of cycle paths being built from re-claimed railway
track beds and new build in city centres and housing developments it is
important that the safety of the cyclist is considered against possible collisions
with other cyclists, potholes or bumps on the pathway. At speeds of up to
40km/h good uniformity of the cycle path surface is paramount to allow
reasonable perception of danger as early as possible.
If cycle paths are set back from a main road or outside built up areas a
separate lighting system is required. This can comprise 5-6m high columns
with asymmetric post top lanterns that have a wide angled distribution to
provide a minimum number of lighting points. The wide beam distribution will
also provide a good vertical illuminance helping guidance along the path.
Metal halide, high-pressure sodium and compact fluorescent light sources will
provide the correct optical and economic running cost solutions. However, the
use of white light is preferred.

amenity areas
Key luminaires:
Pedestrian crossings - Points of note are;

It is important to ensure that all pedestrian crossings are lit to provide a safe
route to users across all traffic routes, whether they are routes with heavy
volumes of traffic, or relatively rural areas where traffic density is much lower.
In the dark it must be as safe as during the daytime and safety is enhanced
by the use of additional signalling and the use of a separate lighting system.
Light sources having a different colour to the general road lighting create
additional alertness or signalling effects.
By positioning lighting columns 0.5 -1.0 times the mounting height from each
side of the pedestrian crossing good positive contrast is achieved in the zone
helping motorists quickly see pedestrians.
When lighting a pedestrian crossing the lanterns are normally mounted
between 5- 6m and need to have a double asymmetric light distribution with
good glare control to ensure drivers are not dazzled. In some instances
additional baffling may be required on the lanterns. The lighting distribution
should be narrow along the road axis and wider along the axis of the
pedestrian crossing to ensure pedestrians on the edges of the crossing are
visible.
High-pressure sodium light sources should be considered if white light metal
halide or compact fluorescent lamps are used for the general road lighting.
Key luminaires:
| 99

amenity areas
Indoor multi-storey car-parks - Points of note are;
The provision of good lighting will aid in user orientation, ensure high levels
of visibility of vehicles and pedestrians and give a feeling of safety to
pedestrians. Good vertical lighting is required for all these criteria, especially
for approach roads, entrances and exits.
Additional or supplementary lighting should be installed in the access and exit
zones of the car park and also on ramps, corners and intersections for
additional guidance.
Emergency lighting will be required to allow the safe evacuation of
pedestrians in the event of an emergency.
The orientation and location of luminaires in the drivers line of sight should be
arranged to prevent glare or distracting visual effects.
Good quality T16 or T26 fluorescent luminaires will provide good uniformity
and levels of vertical illuminance combined with low luminaire brightness to
prevent glare issues. When using T16 luminaires additional thermal protection
of the lamps may be necessary. Integration of emergency lighting is a normal
requirement.
Metal halide and high-pressure lamp luminaires may be used but care must
be taken to control glare and to ensure a separate lamp emergency lighting
system is provided.
All lighting equipment should be vandal-resistant.
Fluorescent, metal halide, and induction lamps all have good colour
rendering and will provide good colour perception. This is particularly
important in multi-storey car parks that identify floors by colour theme.
Key luminaires:

amenity areas
Outdoor car-parks - Points of note are;
Outdoor car parks are more likely to be subject to high crime rates of both
car theft and robbery. They are normally situated on the periphery of towns,
stations, schools and retail centres. Access routes, ticket dispensers, entrance
barriers and exits all need good lighting to ensure pedestrians and drivers
safety.
A common approach for lighting is to use 68m lighting columns, either on
the edge of the car park or centrally mounted using double asymmetric low
glare flat glass floodlights to provide a good level of horizontal and vertical
illuminance at ground level. Care must be taken to avoid spill light onto
adjacent housing, railway lines or other sensitive transport areas. The use of
street lanterns with double asymmetrical light distribution is also suitable,
however more centrally positioned lanterns will be required to achieve good
illuminance uniformity across the car park.
Supplementary white lighting at ticket dispensers, entrance barriers and exits
will help colour and perception, particularly if reading is required.
Multi-storey car park roof levels use a similar approach to outdoor car parks
where the column height is 6-8m and their location is co-ordinated into the
structural elements of the roof structure. Luminaires should be double
asymmetric distribution street lanterns as they have better glare and spill light
control.
Metal halide, high-pressure sodium and compact fluorescent lamps are the
preferred lighting sources to ensure low running and maintenance costs as
many car parks are illuminated through the night.
All lighting equipment should be vandal-resistant.
Key luminaires:
| 101

amenity areas
Underpasses / pedestrian tunnels - Points of note are;
All pedestrian underpasses require artificial lighting as they have a small cross
section, which means daylight decreases rapidly. Adaptation is less of a
problem for pedestrians as they move slowly compared to motorists; even so
the entrance zone of an underpass should be well lit. Lighting should help
pedestrians see the faces of other people to help give a feeling of security.
Light wall surfaces improve the vertical illuminance important for facial
recognition.
Depending upon the size and complexity of the underpass emergency lighting
may be required to allow the safe evacuation of pedestrians in the event of
an emergency.
Lighting equipment can be surface mounted or recessed, either individually or
in a continuous line. All equipment must be fully vandal proof including
electrical feeds. Fluorescent cornice mounted luminaires generally provide
good uniformity of illuminance and a good vertical component of illuminance.
These can be inset into cladding or decorative mouldings to create a clean
appearance with additional security protection against vandalism. Easy
access with a security key is essential to ensure good maintenance practice.
Discharge lamps may be used but good glare control is important to prevent
any loss of discrimination by pedestrians of other users of the underpass due
to glare.
As underpasses can remain illuminated throughout the night metal halide,
high-pressure sodium and fluorescent lamps are the preferred lighting sources
to ensure low running and maintenance costs. Care should be taken in the
use of high-pressure sodium lamps where good colour rendering is required.
Key luminaires:

amenity areas
Schemes
Footpaths
Scheme: Amenity park area, path width 2m

Luminaire(s) used: 26 x Promenade 42W CFL bollards, 1m mounting height
Footpath: Eav = 8 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.26
Scheme: Amenity park area, path width 8.4m

Luminaire(s) used: 27 x Avenue Virtual, 70W HIT-CE, 10m spacing, 3m mounting height
Footpath: Eav = 21 lux; Emin/Eav = 0.25
| 103

amenity areas
Schemes
Shopping centre car parking
Scheme: S
hopping centre car parking,
297m x 163m
Luminaire(s) used: 96 x Dyana 2 150W
HIT, 8m mounting height,
0 tilt
Park area: Eav = 21 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.32
Mica recessed luminaires illuminating a pathway. The pools of

light give guidance and reassurance whilst still allowing darker
more intimate areas. Splashes of light on the wall reveal the
texture and warmth of the stone and provide visual interest,
whilst the lighting also provides good illumination for the steps.
The daylight appearance of lighting can be as important as the

lit effect. Lighting hardware should, as far as is possible, blend
into the surroundings and enhance the appearance of a space
even when not in use.
5.10 Urban architectural floodlighting

Techniques
General
The purpose of architectural floodlighting is to reveal the beauty of a structure or in some
cases add a dimension by showing a structure in a new way. Architectural lighting adds
an aesthetic quality to a scene. Points of note are:
Generally a structure will have one or more principal viewing positions.
Therefore the lighting should be sympathetic for an observer positioned at
these viewpoints.
The light levels used on a structure should be in harmony with the light levels
of the surrounding area. In darker areas comparatively little light can be used
to good effect, but in areas with a large amount of ambient lighting higher
light levels will be required.
A coherent flow of light across a structure is often desirable, implying one
general aiming orientation for the main floodlights. This direction should not
coincide with the most common viewing direction for the structure as no
shadows will then be visible and the scene will appear flat and uninteresting.
Care should be taken when mounting the floodlighting equipment to ensure
that the lighting units do not appear in silhouette against the lit scene, as this
will spoil the overall effect.
Structural detail
The main objective is to highlight significant features of the structure whilst ensuring the
structure still appears as a coherent whole. Points of note are;
Light naturally attracts peoples attention so highlighting specific features will
help an observer read the structure. Care should be taken to only light those
details that are required, as too many highlights will destroy the effect and
either makes the structure appear bland and uninteresting or disjointed and
incoherent.
Completeness of lighting is an important consideration to ensure a coherent
whole. Care should be taken to avoid a floating appearance, caused by the
base of the structure being under lit, or high level lit detail seeming
unconnected due to the upper parts of the structure being insufficiently lit.
Shadows can make as useful a contribution to the final lit effect as do
illuminated areas. A good technique is to highlight specific features and to
give a low-key wash of light to the rest of the structure. Therefore smaller
lighting units are needed to highlight the detail, as well as units with a more
general distribution to cover the broader area.
| 105
Urban architectural floodlighting

Positioning floodlights at a distance from a structure and therefore giving light
closer to the horizontal will tend to reduce the visibility of the textures of the
materials used in the construction of the structure. Conversely positioning
floodlights in a close offset position, and therefore giving light closer to the
vertical will tend to enhance the visibility of the textures of the materials used
in the construction of the structure.
Daylight has a generally downward bias, forming shadows from architectural
details below the detail itself. Floodlighting a structure from above can mimic
this effect, whilst floodlighting from below will reverse the shadows and can
often give a fresh appeal to a structure by giving it an individual day time
and night time appearance. Lighting laterally will enhance any vertical
features of the structure.
Showing features in silhouette may enhance the lit appearance of a structure.
Lighting behind features such as columns will show the form of the structure
and display the columns in silhouette against the lit structure.
Obtrusive light
The main objective is to maximise the amount of useful light (that is light falling onto the
structure) and minimise waste light that spills light onto the surroundings or upwards into
the sky. Points of note are:
Close off set lighting will reduce waste light by minimising light lost through
scatter in the air, especially in urban areas with lower air quality.
When uplighting a structure the upward light ratio (ULR) is not very useful as
an indication of obtrusive light. A more useful measure is the utilisation factor,
that is the amount of light actually lighting the structure compared to the total
amount of light produced by the scheme. This gives the percentage useful
light, and therefore the percentage waste light. It should be remembered that
any reflected light will be in a predominantly upward direction and can give
a significant contribution to obtrusive light. Therefore where possible
uplighting should be used for structures that use low reflectance materials in
their construction.
To minimise obtrusive light additional attachments should be used on the
floodlight such as louvres or visors to shape the floodlight beam and help it
conform to the shape of the structure.
Where possible niches and overhangs should be used to contain obtrusive
light.

Floodlight technology
The main objective is to ensure that the correct technology in terms of lamp, optic and
floodlight body is chosen for the application. Points of note are:
The fabric of a structure has a colour, or in many cases a mixture of colours.
Light sources that are monochromatic or strongly biased towards a small
range of colours can distort the structure appearance. Therefore, light sources
with a wide spectrum, (such as metal halide) or with a colour temperature that
blends with the structure materials (such as high-pressure sodium on sandstone)
should be used. Colour filters or RGB colour mixing should be used with care
but can be very effective for dramatic effects or seasonal/festive events.
Floodlights have a beam distribution that is mainly relative to the shape of the
reflector. A round reflector will produce a conical beam useful for long-throw
requirements, typically to pick out a single feature. A rectangular reflector will
produce an asymmetrical beam useful for lighting areas rather than small points.
Constraints in mounting position or specific application requirements often
require a modified beam distribution. Additional optical components such as
refractor glasses that vary the beam shape, or louvres that reduce obtrusive
light are useful in getting the correct result.
Floodlighting set-ups are generally aimed at night to enable fine-tuning of the
finished appearance. However maintenance will be done in daylight, and
often the floodlight will need to be moved to allow access to the lamp, etc.
Floodlights with a re-positioning lock system are helpful to ensure the lit
appearance is maintained over successive maintenance operations.
Key luminaires:
Schemes Building facade
Scheme: Building faade

Luminaire(s) used: Avenue Deco bollard
50W MBF, Avenue
Deco 125W MBF at 3m
mounting height, Efact
LED, Mica B 70W HIT-DE
and Contrast Pinspot
70W Par 30.
Road Eav = 7lux
Pavement: Eav = 15lux away from the faade,
Eav = 35lux along store faade
| 107

The curved roof is washed with light, making it appear to float
over the building. The structure itself glows from the interior light
spilling through the glass facades.
Lighting of glass facades is difficult and it is more usual to let
spill light from the interior light up the building and define its
night-time appearance.
The suspension tower and cabling are lit to provide a distinctive

appearance. Narrow beam floodlights are directed along the
cables to make then glow, whilst the central tower is washed
with light. The structure seems to float above the surface of the
water.
The appearance is built up using layers of light. The lower

section of the building has a general wash of light with
highlighting above the central columns. Lighter and darker areas
give depth to the faade. The upper storey mainly comprises
grand window openings, and these are lit with a white light
to accentuate the detail of the window surrounds. The detail
around the top of the faade (below the roof line) is lit to define
the transition to the roof space, and additional windows within
the roof space are lit, along with chimney work, with a small
amount of spill light showing the roofline.
5.11 Sports lighting

Techniques
General
The purpose of sports lighting is to provide lighting that allows a sport to take place
safely (i.e. designed to suit the speed of play and size of any objects used in the sport)
and provide good viewing conditions, both in visibility of the sports action and comfort
of the audience. Points of note are:
For all sports a good level of modelling is required. Modelling is the effect of
light and shadow produced when light flows from one main direction (known
as key light) and additional lower levels of lighting flow from other directions
(known as fill light), producing a coherent three-dimensional image of a
scene. If there is insufficient key light and all the lighting is fill light objects
become flat with little discernable detail. If there is insufficient fill light harsh
shadowing will occur, obscuring areas in the field of view. Both cases will
cause a reduction in the ability of sports participants to correctly see and
react to events on the field of play, and will also cause problems for
spectators and television cameras.
For high-speed sports the elimination of any stroboscopic effects from high
intensity discharge sources is important. Stroboscopic effects may make a
moving object appear stationary, or make the object seem to jump from one
position to another. For these sports the use of high frequency control gear is
recommended.
Lighting requirements are defined by EN 12193. Additional requirements
may be defined by sports governing bodies such as FIFA, Olympic Delivery
Authorities, etc. and by television authorities, such as Sky.
Some sports (notably FIFA regulations for football) also define requirements for
uniformity gradient (UG). This is measure of the rate of change of illuminance
across an area, and is expressed as the ratio between the illuminance levels
of two adjacent measurement points. That is
Emeasurement point 1
UG =
Emeasurement point 2
EN 12193 defines requirements based on the lighting class (I, II, or III). This
is derived from the level of competition, international and national, regional,
local, training and recreational. At the lower standard of play there is
flexibility with the light source options (i.e. high pressure sodium, metal halide)
but at class I and II metal halide or fluorescent light sources with high colour
rendering abilities are required.
| 109
Sports lighting
Each sport has a playing area that is the principal playing area (the area
inside the line marking for tennis or football for example) and a total area that
is defined as the principal playing area, plus an additional safety outside the
principal playing area.
Lighting levels for sports are normally defined in terms of the minimum
average horizontal illuminance on a reference plane, and a uniformity of
illuminance. In some instances the plane of illuminance will be relevant to the
sport and the spectator viewing distance, or TV camera-viewing plane. Here
the normal to camera illuminance and vertical illuminance will be relevant.
As some sporting areas are large, have the need for high levels of illuminance
or are used for a long period in the day, highly efficient lighting systems are
required to keep energy consumption low. Maintenance is also important to
ensure system efficiency and functionality and therefore all lighting equipment
should be safely accessible and maintainable throughout life.
When lighting exterior sports facilities to achieve good uniformity lighting
equipment must be mounted on masts of sufficient height to ensure floodlight
aiming angles are no greater than 70. This will ensure a high utilisation of
lamp flux, minimum electrical load, and lower installed costs.
When designing lighting for sports facilities it is important to minimise
obtrusive and spill light. For guidance on this see section 6.8.
All sports facilities require safety lighting (that is lighting designed to allow
safe movement of players and spectators in the event of a power failure or
emergency). Relevant guidelines form the sports governing bodies should be
consulted for this information.
Sports halls - Points of note are;
Most sports halls are suitable for different sports and non-sporting events, all
requiring different visual requirements. The most demanding visual activity
should dictate the lighting design layout and light levels.
One lighting layout will generally not be sufficient to meet all requirements, as
specific sports require different lighting configurations. Therefore it is essential
that lighting controls are used to switch a selection of luminaires for different
requirements.
Luminaires should be impact resistant against balls and projectiles, and
designed and mounted to minimise the risk of objects becoming trapped
Sports lighting
The layout of a sports hall may be altered using partitions, and therefore care
should be taken to ensure glare is controlled along all lines of sight, with and
without the partitions. Additional lighting may be required when partitions are
in place and this should be checked during design.
For aerial sports, e.g. badminton and volleyball, the positioning of the
luminaires outside the playing area may be necessary to avoid disability
glare for players looking upwards.
As a sports hall can support many types of activity it is important to ensure
good uniformity is achieved throughout the hall. This allows competitors to
quickly and accurately monitor an opponents movement, particularly
important in combat sports.
Key luminaires:
Table tennis and badminton - Points of note are;

Badminton shuttlecocks are small and fast. Players are continually required to
visually follow the trajectory of the shuttlecock and there are therefore specific
recommendations for luminaire positions and requirements for good vertical
illuminance. A low ceiling reflection factor will help to improve the visibility of
the shuttlecock.
For competition table tennis it is important that excellent uniformity is achieved
over the table top and up to five metres from the table edges. The elimination
of any stroboscopic effects from high intensity discharge sources is important.
A good level of vertical illuminance is required to ensure visibility of any high
balls.
Fluorescent lighting systems provide the best arrangements for high levels of
horizontal and vertical uniformity over the playing areas. Pendant, surface or
recessed T16 or T26 luminaires with a parabolic louvre are suitable.
Key luminaires:
| 111
Sports lighting
Fencing - Points of note are;
Fencing has specific requirements for both horizontal and vertical illuminance
as the movements are very fast with a fine foil blade and the visual task is the
torso of the players.
Fluorescent pendant, surface or recessed T16 or T26 luminaires with a
parabolic louvre are suitable.
Key luminaires:
Boxing - Points of note are;

In boxing the speed and force of movement over extremely short distances
requires very high lighting levels at competition levels, normally between
1000 lux and 2000 lux average horizontal illuminance. This also ensures
that the referee, judges and spectators can see adequately and comfortably.
Normally a purpose made lighting assembly will support the lighting
equipment above the ring. Narrow beam luminaires should be used to
provide the necessary high levels of illuminance efficiently.
High colour rendering qualities are required from the light source, which is
recommended to be metal halide with an Ra of 85+. This is also required for
video and CTV transmissions.
Pendant or surface narrow/medium beam metal halide floodlights are
suitable with baffle/louvre attachments to control glare.
Key luminaires:
Sports lighting
Indoor tennis halls - Points of note are;
Tennis can be a very fast sport demanding good visual conditions to allow
judgement of the ball trajectory, its speed and anticipated bounce position on
the court. Therefore good illuminance and uniformity with the elimination of
shadows and glare are a requirement from the lighting system. The lighting
will also need to extend beyond the playing area to cover the important
zones behind the baselines and sidelines.
To prevent players being dazzled when looking at high balls the luminaires
should be positioned outside the playing area, and not positioned behind the
baseline up to a distance of three metres where serving takes place.
Luminaires should be impact resistant against balls and projectiles, and
designed and mounted to minimise the risks of object becoming trapped
Additional wall colouring or screening with low reflectance matt material will
help players to get additional information about the balls position on the
court.
Pendant or surface mounted T16 or T26 fluorescent reflector luminaires with a
protective grille are suitable. Alternatively pendant or surface mounted
low-bay metal halide luminaires with a louvre assembly and protective grill.
Key luminaires:
Squash courts - Points of note are;

The ball used for squash is smaller than a tennis ball, is dark coloured, travels
up to 200 km/h and bounces in any plane. As the walls are used to create
complex trajectories with players moving very quickly across each others line
of sight early anticipation and vision are required to hit the ball accurately.
Good illuminance on all four vertical planes together with high horizontal
illuminance uniformity is needed against a light vertical background to
improve perception of the ball.
Fluorescent lighting is most suitable with two asymmetric distribution luminaires
mounted parallel to the front to wash the wall, and an asymmetric distribution
luminaire washing each of the sidewalls. Mounting the luminaires at 1m from
the wall prevents reflected glare.
| 113
Sports lighting
Surface mounted or recessed T16 or T26 fluorescent asymmetric reflector
luminaires with a protective grille are most suitable.
Key luminaires:
Figure skating and ice hockey - Points of note are;

Most indoor rinks are used for recreational purposes with additional events
carried out on specific occasions. Therefore the lighting installation needs to
be flexible.
Luminaires are normally mounted over the ice in a regular array to provide
good uniformity of illuminance and general average horizontal illuminance.
The ice hockey puck is black and to help spectators see it when it is flying
through the air high reflectance surroundings should be used around the ice.
Decreasing the spacing between luminaires near the goal increases
illuminance in this critical area.
Luminaires should be impact resistant if mounted less than 5m above the ice.
High bay style luminaires with prismatic optics and metal halide lamps will
help provide a good level of vertical illuminance and a high uniformity of
illuminance on the horizontal plane whilst using the minimum number of
luminaires. Floodlights can also be used but care should be taken to control
both direct glare and reflected glare from the surface of the ice. The use of
double asymmetric beam floodlights will help.
Key luminaires:
Sports lighting
Swimming pools - Points of note are;
Swimming pool lighting caters for a variety of visual tasks. The competitive
swimmer has a much different seeing task to other swimmers where the main
attention is focussed on staying in lane and the turning point at the end of the
lane. Water polo players need lighting with a good ambient lighting effect.
Swimming instructors, coaches, pool attendants and spectators all need to
see across the pool and into the water to identify swimmers and situations.
For recreational swimming pools themed or decorative lighting effects may be
required.
Because water reflects direct incident light the positioning of the luminaires
needs to be carefully selected to avoid luminaire reflections and disability
glare. Luminaires positioned around the pool help to reduce unwanted
reflections. When this is not possible asymmetric distribution luminaires
positioned above the water may be used but maintenance of the luminaires
should be considered.
Underwater lighting will help to reduce reflected glare from the pool surface
as well as improving viewing conditions on the pool bottom. Synchronised
swimmers need underwater lighting to help monitor the movement and
position of other swimmers. However for competitive swimming and water
polo underwater luminaires should be switched off.
For diving pools supplementary lighting is required to improve the vertical
illuminance, particularly for judges who need to assess the divers
performance at the point of entry into the water. For springboard diving the
lighting in the diving zone requires a good ratio of horizontal to vertical
illuminance.
Luminaires for indoor swimming pools must be protected against chlorinated
and possibly salty air and as such need to meet high standards of electrical
reliability and protection against corrosion. Luminaires should be protected to
IP65 and have fixings that are made of stabilised austenitic stainless steel.
High ambient temperatures may require control gear to be mounted remotely
to ensure long life and reliability. The use of floodlights will help resolve some
of these issues as floodlights are mainly designed for exterior use and have a
high degree of protection and resistance to the elements built in.
Good colour rendering lamps are required to provide the correct ambience
and visual comfort for competitors and bathers. Metal halide lamps with a
warm or cool appearance can be used to good effect.
Surface mounted or recessed fluorescent luminaires with an acrylic panel/
bowl are suitable, as are metal halide or high pressure sodium floodlights
wall mounted or pendant mounted for uplighting or direct lighting of the pool.
| 115
Sports lighting
Key luminaires:
Outdoor football and rugby - Points of note are;

The most common approach is the use of lighting masts, approximately four
each side of 12m20m height to achieve a minimum angle above the pitch
centre of 20 to the lowest floodlight, but preferably 25. These are spaced
along the long axis of the playing area, positioned away from the touchlines
to avoid collisions. For football they are also positioned away from the
corners to avoid glare to goalkeepers. The floodlights are normally rated
1kW 2kW and have a double asymmetric beam shape to ensure good
uniformity and glare control.
An alternative option is four corner masts where long throw symmetrical
narrow beam floodlights are used. The same conditions apply to mast
positioning and height to achieve high utilisation of lamp flux and the
avoidance of glare.
For rugby pitches the dead-ball zone, which can be up to 22m long, will
need to be adequately illuminated. In some instances the spill light from the
playing area will be sufficient but only to a depth of 6m. This is in addition to
the playing area length of up to 100m between goal lines. A total area shall
include a strip the length of the pitch including the dead ball area of no less
than 6m wide on each side of the pitch.
Lighting can be positioned on the roofs of adjacent grandstands if they are of
sufficient height and location to comply with floodlight positional requirements,
and of sufficient structural strength to allow the weight of the floodlights.
Double asymmetric or symmetrical beam floodlights using high-pressure
sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.
Key luminaires:
Sports lighting
Hockey - Points of note are;
The playing area for hockey is slightly smaller than for football, but the lighting
principles are the same with regards to mast positions and heights. The use of
a smaller ball and the speed of the sport require a higher lighting level for
Class III installations and a better uniformity for Classes II and III than for
football and rugby.
Double asymmetric or symmetrical beam floodlights using high-pressure
sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.
Key luminaires:
Track and field - Points of note are;

For track and field stadiums the most cost effective solution is to locate 6-8
masts around the whole perimeter of the track with a clearance of 4.5m from
the track edge. The mast height is determined as for football but with the
additional requirement of a maximum mast height to ensure adequate vertical
illuminance for competitors on the outside of the track. The masts mounted
along the straight section of track illuminate the centre field area providing
good vertical illuminance for javelin, shot, hammer and discus events.
Double asymmetric or flat glass double asymmetric beam floodlights using
high-pressure sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.
Key luminaires:
| 117
Sports lighting
Freestyle skiing and ski jumping - Points of note are;
Downhill skiers require the whole piste uniformly illuminated from beginning to
end so depressions and surface irregularities are revealed. As high speeds
can be achieved the position of floodlights are important to provide the
correct visual conditions, therefore floodlights are placed either side of the
piste whilst being aimed across and down the slope to reduce glare to the
skiers.
Wide horizontal and narrow vertical angle floodlights metal halide lamps
mounted on masts up to 12m high are suitable for this application.
Ski-jumpers require good horizontal lighting at the take-off and at the landing
or touchdown point for judging and safety. The landing area needs to have a
high level of uniformity (0.7) for the class III standard of skiing. The
illuminance on the jump hill is measured on the surface of the snow.
Key luminaires:
Sports lighting
Schemes
Tennis court
Scheme: Double tennis court, 24m x 11m

Luminaire(s) used: 4 x Champion 2kW HQI-TS/N/L, 12m mounting height
Pitch: Eav = 397 lux, Emin/Eav = 0.81
Lighting from the edges helps prevent glare to players.

| 119
Sports lighting
Schemes
Football Stadium
Scheme: Football stadium with 4 x 25m corner columns

Luminaire(s) used: 48 x Mundial R 2kW HQI-TS
Pitch: Eav = 538 lux; Emin/Eav = 0.76
A football stadium lit using Mundial

floodlights. The luminaires are mounted
along the roof of the stand down
two sides of the pitch, and a mix of
light distributions is used to correctly
illuminate all the playing area. Lighting
levels for television are supplied
by ensuring good levels of vertical
illumination in the camera directions.
Additional luminaires on the inside of
the canopy lights the seating areas
and ensures the security and safety of
spectators.
Sports lighting
Schemes
Ice Hockey Stadium
Scheme: Ice hockey stadium, 117.5m x 17.3m x 23m

Luminaire(s) used: 316 x Indus XS, 2 x 80WT16, 17m mounting height
Pitch: Eav = 422 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.07
A relatively high level of illumination is required due to the fast

moving nature of the game and the small size of the puck.
Lighting levels by the goals are increased to aid the ability of
the goalkeeper, officials and spectators to see the puck.
| 121
Sports lighting
Schemes
Indoor tennis court
Scheme: Indoor tennis court, 36m x 18m x 6m

Luminaire(s) used: 32 x Titus Sport, 3x49W 5m mounting height
Tennis court: Eav = 531 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.35
Indoor tennis courts lit using the Sporting luminaire. The

luminaires are integrated into the architecture of the roof and
are positioned to light from the edges of the playing areas,
preventing players having to look directly at a luminaire.
Sports lighting
Schemes
Ski shute
Scheme: Ski shute, 30m x 150m

Luminaire(s) used: Either 36 x Sonpak
25/40 with HIT400W or
27 x Sonpak 25/40
with HST400W
Ski slope: HIT 400W Eav = 1.24 lux;
Emin/Eav = 0.02
HST 400W Eav = 1.41 lux;
Emin/Eav = 0.02
A ski slope lit using 270 Mundial 2kW floodlights. The

floodlights are positioned and aimed to prevent glare to skiers,
whilst revealing the texture of the surface of the slope to ensure
safety. This requires aiming away from the direction of view of
skiers, and the use of glancing angles to show surface texture.
Additional care should be taken to prevent reflected glare from
the snow.
| 123
Sports lighting
Schemes
Sports hall
Scheme: Multi-purpose sports hall, 17m x 18m x 7.6m

Luminaire(s) used: 18 x Titus Sport 4 x 49W, 7.6m mounting height
Floor: Eav = 364 lux; Emin/Eav = 0.61
Scheme: M
ulti-purpose sports hall, 17m x 18m x 7.6m.
Emergency lighting
Luminaire(s) used: 2 x Voyager Twinspot, 6m mounting height
Floor: Eav = 2.46 lux; Emin/Eav = 0.23
When lighting sports venues it is essential to consider the

safety of the participants and spectators in the event of loss of
power or an emergency. Therefore emergency lighting should
be installed that complies with the relevant requirements and
standards.
6 Specific Techniques
6.1 Indoor lighting controls (ILC)
The purpose of Indoor Lighting Controls (ILC) is to provide the
right light at the right time and place, saving as much energy as
possible, whilst simultaneously providing the comfort expected
for any application, such as offices, lecture and conference
rooms, school classrooms, sport halls, or in hospitals and
supermarkets. Industrial installations may also benefit from the
energy savings provided by ILC if fluorescent luminaires such as
trunking systems are being used.
In offices up to 40 per cent of the energy used is needed for
lighting, within schools this percentage can be even higher.
In industrial applications that figure is between 10 and 15
per cent depending on the lighting technology used. Potential
energy savings are:
Electronic ballasts + dimming: 30%
Dimming + presence link: 50%
Dimming + presence link + daylight link: 70%
There are many different levels of controls to choose from.
These should be chosen to fit the needs and activities within
an application and to achieve the required energy saving and
comfort.
One of the most basic controls and the first step into manual
dimming is RotaryDIM, a very simple recess wall mounted
rotary DSI dimmer that can be connected to Thorn High
Frequency DSI dimmable (HFD) luminaires, controlling up to
20 DSI ballasts in total. The lighting can be raised, dimmed
and dimmed to off, by turning the control knob. This product
combines digital dimming with the intuitive operation known
from domestic lighting controls.
Thorn Pull SwitchDIM (PSWD) luminaires come with
integrated pull cord momentary action switches. Typically used
in offices lit with suspended luminaires. Using the pull cord
momentary action switch the user may manually set the light
level from 100% down to 1%, and switch the light on and off.
The easiest way to automate lighting is the use of
SwitchLite presence detectors, installed into recessed
ceilings, mounted onto ceilings, into corners or onto walls.
These detectors switch the lighting on when movement is
detected, and, after a configurable Off delay time, switch it
off when vacancy is detected. Different SwitchLite presence
Fig. 6.1 RotaryDIM DSI dimmer
Specific Techniques
| 125
Specific Techniques
detectors are available suitable for various mounting needs
and detection patterns, and using passive infrared (PIR) or
microwave technology to detect presence and absence.
Some products additionally provide an integrated photocell
that can be set so that the detector only switches lighting on
when the ambient light level is below a preset level. This
kind of presence detection is typically used in spaces such as
corridors, staircases, warehouses, storerooms or lavatories,
and can reduce the energy usage by up to 90 per cent.
Instead of lamps being switched on for the whole day they are
automatically switched off when not needed.
Thorn High Frequency SensaDigital (HFS) luminaires
combine manual dimming with daylight and presence link.
These luminaires provide an integrated miniature multi-sensor
head. Depending upon the connections provided within the
luminaire HFS luminaires may also be used to control standard
HFD luminaires in a so-called master and slave arrangement.
The number of DSI ballasts incorporated in the master as well
as the slave luminaires can be up to four in total: E.g. in an
office or a meeting room up to four single-ballast luminaires can
be linked to maintain illuminance during the whole day (taking
into account the available daylight as well as the ageing of
lamps and dirt on the luminaires), and additionally can provide
a presence-link function as described above. Alternatively for
the control of a larger space with more luminaires, a remote
SensaDigital head can be used, for example the SENSA
MRE SEND DSI. This multi-sensor head can control a group of
HFD luminaires incorporating up to eight DSI ballasts in total,
and incorporates the same functionality as described above for
the SensaDigital luminaires.
Fig. 6.2 Presence detector
Fig. 6.3 HFS luminaire
This portfolio is called SensaDigital. For the manual control

of SensaDigital an infra-red handheld controller SENSA
SENRC is available, as well as an infra-red programming
tool SENSA SENP for the configuration of Off delay time,
operation mode, maintained illuminance level and many other
settings.
For applications such as classrooms and open plan offices
either several remote SensaDigital heads connected
to standard dimmable luminaires, or several master-slave
arrangements of SensaDigital luminaires with standard
dimmable luminaires can control several luminaire groups
individually, reflecting the flow of daylight within a bigger area
126 | Specific Techniques
Fig. 6.4 Handheld controller
Specific Techniques
and the presence of people within the different zones lit by the
luminaire groups.
For versatile one-room applications the SensaModular
system may be used. This is a Lego-like portfolio consisting
of two differently sized control modules, and accessories for
automation and operation. Both control modules have DSI/
DALI auto detection outputs for the use of either HFD or HFX
luminaires (HFX stands for High Frequency DALI dimmable).
The large SensaModular controller shows three digital
outputs, the small controller two digital outputs for controlling
luminaire groups: Table 6.1 shows the number of ballasts that
can be connected:
3-fold output controller
2-fold output controller
Using DSI ballasts only
50DSI + 50 DSI + 50DSI
50DSI + 50DSI
Using DALI ballasts only
25DALI + 25DALI + 25DALI
25DALI + 25DALI
Using DSI and DALI ballasts
25DSI + 25DSI + 25DALI, or 25DALI + 25DALI + 25DSI
25DSI + 25DALI
Table 6.1 SensaModular Controller Capacity
To keep commissioning and maintenance simple, the

addressing feature of DALI is not used with SensaModular
when DALI ballasts are connected (so called broadcast
operation). Both controllers show inputs for the connection
of standard double, single momentary action or centre-off
retractive switches to manually dim, brighten and switch each
output individually. The large controller also shows a switch
input for the joint operation of all three outputs. A standard
230VAC presence detector, for example a SwitchLite
detector, can be connected to the controllers, and the Off
delay time and operation mode (automatic, semi-automatic or
corridor) can be set via integrated rotary switches.
Using the intelligent interface - a polarity-free 2-pole connection
- the system can be extended. To link the luminaire groups
to the incoming daylight, SensaModular provides three
possibilities, all reflecting the daylight flow:

Either one look down multi-sensor head per group, ideal in

larger and zoned applications such as open plan offices,
or
one multi-sensor head for all groups, ideal for smaller

applications such as single offices, or
0%
25%
50%
Artificial light
Daylight
Fig. 6.5 Look down sensors
0%
25%
50%
500lx
Artificial light
Daylight
Fig. 6.6 Look out sensors
Specific Techniques
| 127
Specific Techniques

one look out photocell for all groups, ideal for applications
comprising rows of luminaires and not requiring infrared
control, such as classrooms and sports halls, but especially
any application with ceiling heights above 3m.
Both the multi-sensor head and the photocell are part of the
SensaModular offer. Different illuminance levels for the the
two or three luminaire groups can be set and stored. With the
multi-sensor heads the luminaire groups are not only linked to
daylight, but also to presence and absence. The configuration
of Off delay time and operation mode happens the same way
as when a standard detector is used (described above).
With the SensaModular infra-red handheld controller
the multi-sensor heads are allocated to the luminaire groups.
This remote control can also be used to set and recall three
scenes, and to switch, dim and brighten each luminaire group
individually.
Alternatively, or additionally, the SensaModular recess wall
mounted scene plate enables manual control of the luminaire
groups and the setting and recall of three scenes as well, and
the active scene is visualised via LED indicators.
In some countries Thorn offers the SensaAdvanced
portfolio, one of the most versatile systems on the market,
allowing the control of up to 99 luminaire, blind and screen
groups, in up to 99 rooms, and the possibility to create up
to 20 scenes per room. This portfolio works with any type of
luminaire and provides different DSI, DALI, relay outputs and
phase dimmers. Blinds, blackout blinds and projection screens
may also be controlled using SensaAdvanced. Different
operation and commissioning units, such as wall mounted scene
plates and touch panels are available, as well as infrared
control and software to use a PC or laptop for recalling scenes.
Time automation enables the installation to be switched at
Fig. 6.7 SensaAdvanced components
128 |
Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques
certain times and days and, with sequence automation,
dynamic changes of light levels, direction and colour can be
achieved. Partition management enables the system to adapt
to partition walls being closed or opened, and enables the
individual or joint control of the adjacent areas. Scheme design
and commissioning of SensaAdvanced is available as
a service, please contact your Thorn representative where
applicable.
In some countries Thorn offers the SensaLink portfolio,
enabling the linking of several groups of multi-sensors, either
remote sensors or sensors integrated into HFL luminaires (HFL
stands for high frequency SensaLink) within a larger space,
throughout the floor of a building or through the whole building.
The sensor groups work as described for SensaDigital
above. Additionally these groups can be linked such that
a group listens to other groups. This feature is used to keep
lights on in corridors or notional corridors, and in staircases
and common zones while one of the adjacent areas reports
presence. Blackout blinds and projection screens may also
be controlled via SensaLink. Different operation units are
available such as wall mounted scene plates and infrared
control, allowing storing and recall of up to six scenes.
A versatile infra-red commissioning tool is used to configure and
address the system. This portfolio also provides relay outputs for
switchable luminaires. During commissioning DSI outputs can
be changed to DALI broadcast outputs if required. The partition
management functionality enables the system to adapt to
partition walls being closed or opened, and enables individual
or joint control of the adjacent areas. Scheme design and
commissioning of SensaLink is available as service, please
contact your Thorn representative where appropriate.
Fig. 6.8 SensaLink components
Specific Techniques
| 129
Specific Techniques
Instead of HFD luminaires containing DSI ballasts, DSI
compatible transformers and phase dimmers are available and
can be connected to any DSI output:

Phase dimmers allow the dimming of luminaires with

high voltage incandescent or tungsten halogen lamps,
as well as luminaires incorporating low voltage tungsten
halogen lamps plus electronic or magnetic transformers.
Electronic transformers allow the control of

luminaires incorporating low voltage tungsten halogen
lamps without transformers.
Fig. 6.9 A phase dimmer
Using these DSI controllable devices the connected luminaires

can be part of any scheme incorporating Indoor Lighting
Controls, can be daylight-linked, can contribute to lighting
scenes and much more.
Fig. 6.10 An electronic transformer
Specific Techniques
6.2 Lighting for display screen equipment
In areas containing display screen equipment (DSE) special
care must be taken to prevent bright images being reflected in
the screen from bright surfaces such as windows or luminaire.
Display screen equipment is any screen used for displaying
information, whether it is attached directly to a personal
computer, measuring equipment or specialist applications, for
instance air traffic control screens.
These reflections are caused by the geometry between the
glare source, screen and user allowing the image of the glare
source to be reflected into the users eyes. If the glare source is
a luminaire this tends to be the light emitted by the luminaire
above 65 (above the black lines in Figure 6.12).
To prevent this either the luminaire should have optical control to
remove any bright luminance above 65, or the display screen
should be moved (either rotated or tilted) to alter the geometry,
thereby removing unwanted reflections. Note, this is more
critical in large rooms or open plan areas, as the geometry of
small office spaces normally means that luminaires are unlikely
to be seen in a display screen. Yet, in reconfigurable areas
care is still needed as removing walls may convert small office
spaces into an open plan area.
To help a designer in choosing a suitable luminaire for DSE
applications a table of luminance limits has been produced
for angles of 65 or higher. This table gives luminance limits
dependant upon whether modern screen technology (type
I and II) or older screen technology (type III) is being used.
Additionally the type of information being displayed has an
impact on the susceptibility of the screen to bright images.
Negative polarity information (i.e. bright text on a dark
background) is more susceptible to disturbing images than
positive polarity information (dark text on a light background).
This information can be used along with a luminaire
manufacturers data to ensure that the luminaires chosen for an
installation that contains DSE are suitable.
Fig. 6.11 R eflections in a computer screen

caused by lighting
Fig. 6.12 A
polar curve showing light emitted
above 65
Specific Techniques
| 131
Specific Techniques
For critical applications, such as air traffic control screens, these
limits may need to be applied for angles of 55 or higher.
However increasing the degree of glare control can produce
gloomy spaces unless additional lighting is used to illuminate
the ceiling and upper walls.
Note, that whilst newer screen technology has been less
likely to reflect disturbing images due to anti-glare coatings
and matt screens, some new screens (notably for laptops)
are improving technology and are no longer matt, but highly
reflective. This development will continue as computers develop
as entertainment systems (for watching DVDs etc.). This is due
to matt screen technology tending to blur images very slightly,
reducing their sharpness, and also the technology having
limited capability to correctly show black. Consequently to
correctly show audio-visual content in high definition matt screen
technology is not used. This will, unfortunately, mean these
screens are more susceptible to problems from glare sources.
Table 6.1 Luminance limit recommendations
132 |
Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques
6.3 Light for learning
The importance of light in our learning environments cannot be
under estimated. Research shows that light impacts our health
and level of alertness and this extends to those spaces in which
we are taught. It is now widely accepted that good lighting in
schools can have an important effect on educational attainment
and rates of learning.
We also need to consider the impact of our designs on the
wider environment, from the use of material resources to the
impact on the community and the pupil. Lighting in schools
needs to be sustainable, to continue to serve the needs of
the community and future students, taking into account likely
changes in curriculum, demographics, methods of teaching,
computer use and so on.
Our lighting design for the future of educational facilities needs
to consider the following:

The proven link between improved school environments

and student/staff morale and staff retention
The need to create schools which would represent good

value for money and have a long functional life
A requirement to diversify the school curriculum and to

extend community use of educational facilities
There is now, more than ever, an imperative to create

sustainable schools, which would have a low impact on the
environment, exploit natural light and ventilation and reduce
use of natural resources. Lighting has a large part to play in
each of these, and can do so by using the equipment and
complying with the legislation around product application and
performance.
Fig. 6.13 A
PC intensive university teaching
space lit with direct/indirect luminaires
Specific Techniques
| 133
Specific Techniques
Methods of teaching
There a generally considered to be three methods of teaching:

Teacher-led discussions, an interactive approach to

learning.
Large group teaching, the more traditional formal

instruction.
Small group learning, individual practical and project

work.
Each creates different requirements for the space in which they

happen. The first requires flexible lighting, creating a relaxed
informal atmosphere. The second is more focused on the tasks
within the space - the teacher, the board and the ambient. The
last is most specifically about ambient and task, where the task
lighting will be local to the student and varied according to
their need.
Lighting application
Generally there are two recognised illuminance levels required
in classrooms and these, whilst general targets to aim for, need
to be varied to account for task, time of day and the age of
the pupil.
Levels of 300-500 lux should not be exceeded, but should be
focused on 300 lux for the young and 500 lux for the mature
student. A task uniformity of 0.8 is desirable.
To maintain this level and maximise efficiency all teaching
spaces should use daylight as a primary source and dim the
artificial light accordingly, initially by the windows. To give true
sustainability lighting controls must be provided that are simple
to understand and operate, give flexibility of use and deliver
energy savings. Specific requirements will require task lighting
(i.e. the need to specifically light the task, rather than creating
high overall ambient lighting levels)
Specular, louvred fittings are not required, except perhaps in
dedicated computer suites, and even here their use should be
restricted and satin, rather than full mirrored louvres used.
Use of down lighting with a tight cut-off should be avoided
as this will lead to strong modelling of facial features making
it difficult for the visually, or hearing impaired, to see facial
features and to lip-read.
Fig. 6.14 Lighting in large lecture rooms should

be flexible to allow different scene
setting options to be used to suit the
teaching requirements
Specific Techniques
It is recommended that light sources should be between
2000-4000K with a colour rendering in excess of Ra80.
All light fittings must be flicker-free and provide a Limiting Glare
Index of 19.
Primary artificial lighting choice should be direct/indirect in
nature to create the right balance of performance, efficiency
and comfort in learning spaces. The important thing is to put
light onto all surfaces, and in particular, light the face of the
teacher and pupils, so that true communicative learning can
take place.
While PC use is widespread, and growing, modern screen
technology can easily handle high luminance well beyond that
covered by EN 12464-1, but note that it has been shown
recently that students do not learn well with a high proportion of
self-motivated PC teaching alone. Lighting for computer screens
should not impinge on lighting for effective teaching.
Fig. 6.15 D
irect/indirect lighting with good light
distribution onto wall displays
Effective Distribution
Lighting for visual comfort is not just about the light sources it is
also about the distribution of light:

Walls and ceilings need lighting with both direct and interreflected light
This requires relatively high reflectance surface finishes

e.g. >70% for the ceiling, >60% for the walls (display
boards may lower this to 30-50%) and as high as
practical on the floor
Gloss finishes should be avoided as they can cause

veiling reflections and glare
Some walls and displays should have accent lighting, to

create the effect of directional light that feeling of dappled
sunlight through a window for instance
Average supplementary wall illuminance should be around

2/3rds of the task illuminance
The design approach should concentrate on providing ambient,

task and accent lighting
Specific Techniques
| 135
Specific Techniques
The basic principle is to achieve a well-balanced lighting
environment, with good brightness management, which avoids
sharp, distracting lighting contrasts. It is important to remember
that while working on PCs, students will probably be receiving
information from a teacher at the same time, so providing good
vertical lighting on the face, which might be viewed from any
position in the classroom, is equally important.
In fact, good vertical illuminance is important in all teaching
spaces being able to see the face of the teacher and the
facial expressions of other students is a key component of good
communication and is vital to effective learning. About 80%
of the information we take in is visual and in a teaching space
most of that happens on the desk or within the 40 band (20
above and below the horizontal from the eye).
Fig. 6.16 A
n example of lighting with good
vertical illuminance at the board
Get the lighting wrong and it becomes difficult to see the

teacher, or the board, for instance. If we cant see the teachers
face because contrast or vertical illuminance is poor, then
we may fail to read their body language, or in the case of
the hearing-impaired, be unable to lip read. Also consider
the colour of the background compared to the teachers skin
tone. Lighting a light skin tone against a white background
presents different problems to a dark skin tone against a white
background. Good design will have to cater for all the diverse
ethnicities of teaching staff.
Using Daylight
Good daylighting is also paramount -- artificial lighting makes
up 25 per cent of the energy costs of a typical school. Recent
research in the US showed that high levels of daylight are
associated with improvements in learning rates, increased
attendance and 20 per cent higher results in reading and
maths. It also can also lead to energy savings of 30-60 per
cent (70 per cent if automatic blinds are used).
So ecologically and on a human level we cannot ignore
daylight. All schools need to use daylight as their primary
light source, with daylight factors of 4-5 per cent and a
minimum 20 per cent of glazing on external walls. As well
as letting in daylight, this allows students and staff to retain a
link to the outside weather, environment and changing light
conditions throughout the day. This helps to improve morale and
concentration and to maintain their circadian rhythms.
Fig. 6.17 A
classroom with ample daylight
Specific Techniques
6.4 Emergency lighting
Emergency lighting is provided when the supply to the normal
lighting fails. It helps people to see their way and move to
evacuate quickly to a safe place out of the building. It also
avoids panic, restores confidence and enables specific tasks to
be made safe.
Emergency lighting should be provided in all areas where,
when the normal lights fail, there is insufficient daylight or
borrowed light available for those people on the premises.
A risk assessment should be made to identify the places and
routes where people may be at risk and need evacuating in the
event of the normal lighting failing.
An emergency lighting scheme should be designed with
sufficient consideration to the type of premise, size, complexity,
kind of activities and type of people involved. Special
consideration should be given to places where the elderly and
those with disabilities may be present.
There are four main points to consider for an effective
emergency lighting scheme:
1 Exit Signage
Visible safety signs and signage to indicate the escape
route and final exit should be available at all material times
(luminance of the signs safety colours must be at least 2 cd/
m). The escape route signs must be located so that occupants
from any part of the premises can see and identify the direction
for evacuation.
2 Mandatory Points
Emergency luminaires have to be carefully positioned to ensure
a compliant emergency lighting scheme. To provide adequate
illumination they need to be mounted close to potential hazards
on the route, such as stairs, a change of direction or crossings
and places requiring emphasis, such as first aid posts, fire
fighting appliances and marshalling points. Also for places
where people may need reassurance in the event the normal
lights failing, such as lifts, toilets or closets.
Specific Techniques
| 137
Specific Techniques
3 Illumination levels and infill lighting
In addition to the lighting of mandatory points, infill luminaires
may be required to achieve the correct lighting levels.
An adequate level of illuminance on the floor of escape areas
(minimum 0.5 lx) and escape routes (minimum on centre line
1.0 lx) should be made available within 5 seconds of the mains
failing to avoid anxiety, and remain operative for at least 1
hour, or longer if required, for safe evacuation. Additionally
take care to illuminate the volume of space (from floor up to a
height of 2.0m) through which people move during evacuation
by mounting luminaires above head height.
High-risk task areas should be illuminated to an adequate level
(minimum 15 lx) within 0.5 seconds of the normal lights failing
for as long as required to complete making the task safe or
whilst people pass by if it is by the escape route.
Illumination should be carried out with light sources having a
colour rendering index of at least Ra 40 so that safety colours
in an escape area or on an escape route can be seen and
discriminated.
Stylish luminaires should be chosen to blend in with the
design of the overall lighting scheme, but they must suit the
environmental conditions of the location. For example use
IP65 emergency lighting luminaires outside the final exit. The
luminaires may be dedicated standalone types or integrated
into standard lighting luminaires. They can be self-contained or
central power fed depending on the size and complexity of the
premises, the operation and servicing and practicalities and
through life economics of the installation.
4 Maintenance and testing
Once the scheme is installed and commissioned, it is essential
that the luminaires are properly maintained and ready to perform
in the event of an emergency. To make sure installed emergency
products are always fit for purpose, regular testing has to be
conducted by the building operator. Therefore consideration
should be given at the design stage to the intended method
- be it local switch, automatic self-testing or an automatic
remote/central controlled testing system. Also assess and plan
a schedule for servicing the lamps and batteries at required
intervals. Finally, remember the commissioning and certification
requirements for both the design and the installed scheme.
Specific Techniques
Emergency lighting system considerations
Standby lighting is used as an alternative to normal lighting but
it can also form the emergency escape lighting solution. When
it does it must follow the rules governing escape lighting.
Escape lighting covers the need for clearly defined escape
routes in the premises formed by corridors or paths indicated by
painted lines. Open areas are defined as places where there
is no clear route or where the routes are changing such as a
large shop, open plan office or multi purpose hall. A high-risk
task area is where some uninterruptible activity is ongoing,
such as a chemical dip process, or some other process that
requires unbroken lighting conditions for safe shut down. In
some places where there is high risk of smoke accumulation
(airlines, passenger ships) low location way guidance systems
are provided to supplement the escape route lighting.
Emergency Lighting
Emergency escape lighting
Escape route lighting
Standby lighting
Open area (anti-panic) lighting
High risk task area lighting
Low location way guidance
Fig. 6.18 Specific forms of emergency lighting
Specific Techniques
| 139
Specific Techniques
Clearly defined escape routes
Clearly defined escape routes are taken to be up to 2m wide.
Here the horizontal illuminance at floor level on the centre line
should be not less than 1 lux, and the centre band of at least
50 per cent of the route width should be illuminated to at least
half the centre line value. The diversity of illuminance should not
exceed 40:1. Wider routes may be treated as 2m wide strips
of escape routes but preferably as open areas. The design
illuminance is to be provided within 60 seconds, but preferably
within 5 seconds of the supply failure. To avoid dazzling
people it is important not to exceed the intensity limits related to
the mounting height of the luminaires.
50% of width
not less than 0.5 lx
not less than 0.5 lx
not less than 1.0 lx along centreline

Fig. 6.19 Escape route plan (up to 2m wide)
Safety signs
Strategically placed signs permanently indicating the escape
directions from the premises are essential to alleviate anxiety
and confusion by the people present. The signs should conform
to the graphic design, colour and luminance criteria given in
the EN1838 standard. It is important that during an emergency
only signs that give a positive indication to the way out should
be illuminated and that the signs are mounted high enough
(above 2.0m) so that they are not obscured.
Open areas
Areas where the furnishing or equipment on the floor is
frequently reconfigured will not have clearly defined escape
routes and are therefore treated as open areas, as defined
above.
In these the illuminance on the floor should be a minimum
0.5 lux anywhere up to 0.5m from the walls and 50 per cent
should be provided within 5 seconds, 100 per cent being
provided within 60 seconds of the normal lights failing. The
diversity of illuminance should not exceed 40:1. To avoid
dazzling people the intensity limits for the luminaire should not
be exceeded for the mounting height in the scheme.
Exit signs should be located so that they are visible from any
part of the space.
Large areas require

min 0.5 lx up to
border of 0.5m
of the perimeter
area. Max. to min.
illuminance
ratio not greater
than 40:1.
Exit sign
must be
visible from
all parts
of open area
Fig. 6.20 Escape route illuminance requirements
Specific Techniques
High risk task areas
During the failure of the normal lighting supply, emergency
lighting is required in places where machinery, plant or other
processes may present a hazard if left in operation, and that
must be shut down before evacuating the area, In some cases
the escape route may be alongside these hazardous tasks
and therefore needs to be highlighted. There are also places
where the task activity cannot be halted and needs standby
emergency light (such as in an operating theatre).
The high risk tasks areas should be illuminated as required by
the task and in any event the maintained illuminance should
be not less than 10 per cent of the required maintained
illuminance for that task and should not be less than 15 lux and
be available in full within 0.5 seconds. The uniformity should
not be less than 0.1. For this a no-break or maintained system
should be considered.
Power systems for emergency lighting
Emergency lighting systems are usually powered from batteries
or generators that are automatically triggered by a detection
system as soon as the mains system fails. The system duration
or category is defined by the period the system is able supply
power to the load. Usually given as 60 minutes (1 hour) or 180
minutes (3 hours). The two main types of electrical systems in
use are self-contained and central power:
Self-contained systems
Each luminaire is equipped with battery, charger, indicator
and changeover device. These elements may be integral to the
luminaire or housed in a separate unit mounted less than 1m
from the luminaire. The mains supply charges the battery, which
cuts in when the mains system fails. Self-contained systems are
easy to install and extend, and require minimal maintenance.
The system may include a self- testing facility that can carry
out the routine monthly and annual operational tests and give
local indications of the status. They can also be connected to a
central managed automatic testing system and can give printed
report of any defects.
Each luminaire is equipped with batteries and

inverter to power one lamp on mains failure
The gear may be remote mounted, if so the box

should be within 1m of the luminaire.
Fig. 6.21 Self-contained system
Specific Techniques
| 141
Specific Techniques
Central systems
Here the power is provided by remote central batteries or
generators and is distributed through sub-circuits to a number
of slave luminaires. These systems are best suited for large
premises. They will require space to house the large battery
sets or generator. The wiring of the sub-circuits has to be
protected and be of high-integrity. During design due allowance
should be made for voltage drops. As part of the high
integrity considerations the luminaires with loop-in/out wiring
facility must also have protected glands and terminal blocks,
alternatively the luminaires may be treated as an individual spur
connection to a protected emergency power ring sub-circuit.
The system must include monitoring of the mains supply and
detection of failure of local circuits in each part of the premises
to bring on the emergency lighting.
Fig. 6.22 Central system
Mains
mode
Em ergency
mode
Mains
Em ergency
mode
Mainsmode
mode
Emergency
mode
Non-ma
inta ined
Non-ma
inta
ined
Non-maintained (NM)
(NM)(NM)
Mains
mode
Em ergency
mode
Mains
mode
Em ergency
mode
lamp
off is
lamp
is on
lamp
off
on
lamp
isis off
lamplamp
is onis
Non-ma
inta ined
Maintained
Maintained
(M)
Maintained
(NM)
Mains
mode
Em ergency
mode
Mainslamp
mode
Em ergenc
(M) (M)
is on
is on
lamp
is off
lamp lamp
is on
lamp
is
off
lamp
is
lamp
ismode
on
lamp
is on
on
Non-ma
inta ined
lamp
is
on
lamp
is
on
Mains
Em
ergency
mode
Mains
mode
Em
ergency
mode
Combined
(C)
Maintained
(NM)
Combined
Combined
Non-ma
inta ined
Non-ma
inta ined
(M)
lamp
is
off
lamp is on
lamp is off
lamp i
(C)
(C)
(NM)
(NM)
lamp is on
lamp lamp
is on is on
lamp is
onp is on
mains
lam
p
is
on
emergency
lam
Maintained
mains
lam
p
is
on
emergency
lam
p
is
on
mains
lamp
is
on
emergency
lamp
is
on
lamplamp
is offis off
lamplamp
is onis on
Combined
(M)
Maintained
Maintained
Fig. 6.23 Summary of modes of operation
(C)
lamp(M)
is on
lamp is on
lamp is on
lamp i
Su
memergency
mary
ofmains
mode
spoper
of
oper
mains
lam. 6.21
pSu
is m
on
isp on
Fig(M)
.Fig
6.21
mary
of mode
slam
oflam
ation
is
onation
emergency lam p is on
Combined
Luminaire mode of operation
lamplamp
is onis on
lamplamp
is onis on
(C)luminaires can
There
are
a number of ways that emergency
Combined
Combined
operate.
In
where
a battery
is present,
itisis on
charged
y ofmains
mode
s(C)
of
ation
lam
palloper
iscases,
on
lam sp of
Fig
. 6.21
Su
memergency
mary
of mode
oper ation mains lam p is on emergency
(C)
by the mains supply.
mains
p is onemergency
emergency
p is on
mains
lam plam
is on
lam plam
is on
Non-maintained
y of mode
s of oper(NM)
ation
Fig . 6.21 Su m mary of mode s of oper ation
The lamp is only lit when the mains fail and is operated by an
Fig
.
6.21
Su
m
mary
of
mode
of oper
Fig
.
6.21
Su
m
mary
of
mode
s of soper
ationation
emergency power source.
Maintained (M)
The lamp is lit at all material times and is powered by the mains
supply under normal conditions. In an emergency, when the
mains fail, an emergency power source cuts in to power the
lamp.
Specific Techniques
Combined (C)
This is a variant of the maintained luminaire in which one lamp
is powered by the mains supply during normal conditions.
A second lamp operates only under emergency conditions
powered by an emergency power source. This type of
luminaire provides light at all material times and is best suited
for signage.
Planning Schemes
The lighting calculations involved in emergency lighting are
straightforward. It is important to base all calculations on real
photometric data for the specific lamp and luminaire, with the
output in the worst (minimum) condition. The EN 13032-3
European standard gives the format of the photometric data and
defines the critical factors for to be used in calculations.
Planning Sequence
There is no precise sequence to be followed, but this
checklist indicates a possible course. (It is most important that
consultation with relevant bodies over the specific plans is
carried out early in the design process).
1. Establish licensing requirements
2. Examine building plans
3. Mark exits and final exits
4. Mark escape routes
5. Identify open areas and special locations
6. Mark location of hazards, fire-fighting appliances, and
alarm call points.
7. Identify small toilets with no windows and toilets over 8m.
8. Identify closets, control rooms, special plant rooms and lifts
9. Note illuminance and other specification requirements.
10. Select signs and escape luminaires fit for the purpose.
11. Position luminaires at essential locations.
12. Add extra luminaires to complete scheme.
13. Check uniformity and glare.
14. Prepare installations instruction.
15. Prepare commissioning procedure, including illuminance
checks.
16. Prepare operation testing service instructions.
17. Prepare logbook.
Specific Techniques
| 143
Specific Techniques
Inspection and Servicing
Regular inspection and servicing of emergency lighting
schemes is essential. In the scheme design these matters must
be considered and adequately documented. The standards EN
1838 and EN 50172 provide the framework for certification
of completion of installation and certification for periodic
testing and servicing. The onus for these activities falls on the
competent person of the owner/user of premises. Any faults
noticed should be recorded in the logbook
To verify that adequate emergency lighting is available at all
material times the system needs to be inspected and tested
monthly and to make full duration tests annually. At the end of
each test the circuit is restored to charge conditions and the
charge indicator should glow to show that the battery is on
charge. The inspection needs to confirm that the luminaires
are in place as designed, the lamp in maintained luminaires
is functioning and the signs are visible. The testing may be
made by automatic systems but these must provide noticeable
feedback and warning if action is required.
Servicing considerations are straightforward. The batteries or
fuel tank for the generator may need topping up. The luminaires
need cleaning, failed lamps changing and the batteries
in self-contained luminaires replaced at the manufacturers
recommended interval. Regular servicing will keep the systems
effective and reliable for operation at all material times.
Specific Techniques
6.5 Low mount road lighting
When lighting roads there are a number of cases where
conventional lanterns do not provide the best solution to the
real road situation. Mounting heights may be restricted by
structures or local regulations, obtrusive light may be an issue,
or maintenance may have to be completed at very high speeds
for example to reduce operators exposure to fast-moving
traffic, or where downtime for service has to be reduced to
the absolute minimum. In situations such as these conventional
lighting is often deficient and an alternative solution is to use a
luminaire that incorporates flat beam technology, such as the
Thorn Orus lantern. A flat beam lantern is designed to satisfy
standard lighting criteria in a low height format, and therefore
offers engineers a new resource in road lighting. In the case
of the Orus lantern a mounting height of 0.9m is standard.
Therefore where the use of high columns or other structures is
an issue flat beam lanterns can deliver optimised performance
without glare for road users.
Fig. 6.24 A
flat beam installation on a road
bridge
Specific Techniques
| 145
Specific Techniques
The flat beam concept
Flat beam technology must address two issues unique to
low-level mounting, glare and performance. By positioning the
optical light engine below the drivers eye line the risk of direct
glare is reduced, and by projecting light transverse to the road
the optical system can offer a very sharp and controlled light
distribution, maximising performance. This controlled distribution
lights a road surface at grazing incidence angles, and drivers
perceive higher levels of road lighting because the peak of
the reflected beam is roughly in the direction of the eye. This
does not mean higher glare because the light distribution is
sharply reduced, practically nil when the lantern is installed at
the optimum height below the drivers eye line. Therefore flat
beam technology can give road users the benefits of increased
perceived brightness and visibility. An added benefit is that the
low mounting height acts as a good optical and visual guide to
the road layout.
Fig. 6.25 A
flat beam lantern mounted on a
bridge structure
With conventional luminaires, the ratio of spacing to mounting

height is between 3.5 and 5, but with a flat beam lantern the
figure is between 10 and 18. Similarly taking the ratio of lit
width to mounting height conventional luminaires produce a
figure between 0.8 and 1.2, whilst with flat beam technology
the figure improves to between 8 and 13. This allows
increased spacing of the lanterns, between 8m and 15m for
Orus, which is important to prevent a flicker effect from the
lanterns. With these spacings the eyes can adjust dependent on
speed, meaning that the flicker effect is maintained below 4Hz
and in most cases less than 2.5Hz, keeping driver discomfort to
an acceptable minimum.
Conventional Installation
8m
8m
24m
New concept
0,90m
8m
24m
Fig. 6.26 C
onventional versus low mount lighting
Specific Techniques
Application of flat beam technology
As mentioned flat beam lanterns can be used where traditional
road lighting using columns or faade mounting is not feasible,
for reasons such as:

Ease of access
Extreme weather
Structural fragility
Maintenance difficulties
In the vicinity of airfields or other sensitive areas
Risk of obtrusive light
Other environmental or resource issues
Flat beam lanterns can be specified for use on roads with

or without pedestrian traffic. Without pedestrians, the
optical design can direct light entirely onto the road. Where
pedestrians are present an alternative optical design that
creates a circle of light around the luminaire helps drivers
to detect a pedestrians entire body. This option also allows
for facial recognition by other pedestrians. Flat beam lighting
is also an excellent solution where obtrusive light has to be
reduced. For example, it can be specified in certain residential
areas, or in areas where the surrounding buildings are
illuminated and road lighting should therefore be unobtrusive.
Flat beam technology is also suitable for use in parks and
gardens. Here the luminaires can spread light at low level
without distracting attention from other illuminated features.
8m
10m
8m
10m
Fig. 6.27 F lat beam lighting in road

configurations (upper) and pedestrian
configuration (lower)
Durability
Obviously a potential problem when using flat beam
technology is the additional rigors imposed through the lanterns
closeness to the road and therefore the harsh effects of road
usage, and also the ease of access for vandalism. It is essential
that the lanterns are constructed from high quality materials and
engineered for low maintenance and a long operating life.
Optical components such as the visor need to be strong, UV
stabilised and scratch resistant. Tamper resistant screws will be
needed and the lantern and mounting will need a suitable IK
rating, such as IK10/40 joules. As the lantern is close to the
road and therefore the spray caused by road traffic both optic
and gear should comply with IP66.
Specific Techniques
| 147
Specific Techniques
Lighting Data for the Thorn Orus lantern
When flat beam technology was integrated into Orus, priority
was given to the limitation of glare. Calculations show that
TI is considerably below 10 per cent while luminance and
uniformity exceed relevant standards. The system is designed
with a specific lamp burner cap so that direct light cannot reach
the eyes of a driver or the rear mirrors of a car when installed
at the compulsory height of 0.9m. In a complete installation,
Orus offers drivers a unique guidance effect which tracks the
contours of the road, ahead and behind. Orus can be installed
either single-sided, with luminaire spacing between 8 and 15m,
or on both sides of the road with the same spacing. In the latter
configuration it will cover roads up to 20m wide, giving ample
coverage for roads with multiple lanes including cycle lanes
and central reservations. The wide choice of lamps from 35
to 70W HIT-CE G12, or 60W HIT-CE PGZ12 CosmoWhite
gives planners ample scope to adjust Orus to any project. Light
output from Orus luminaires is surprisingly resistant to obstruction
by queues of traffic. Tests have shown that there is no
occultation nor distracting shadows, while light emitted from the
system is distributed ahead of, behind and beneath vehicles. It
is also reflected by the road surface. Spacing options between
8 and 15m also reduce any pools of darkness, while lighting
from vehicles further maintains lighting levels. Orus luminaires
mix perfectly with classic column mounted systems. Because
they use white light they can be used to highlight sections of the
highway where care is required, as in a hazard black spot or
area of restricted speed.
Fig. 6.28 The Orus lantern
Specific Techniques
6.6 Road tunnel lighting
The aim of lighting a tunnel is to create a safe environment
that allows road users to pass through the tunnel without any
accidents, and the lighting needs to be suitable for both
daytime and night-time hours. The most critical requirement is to
detect obstacles on the road, especially when you are entering
and leaving the tunnel.
To help in the design process tunnels are normally divided into
five zones, the entrance zone, the threshold zone, the transition
zone, the interior zone and the exit zone.
Entrance
zone
Theshhold
zone
Transition
zone
Interior
zone
Exit
zone
Portal
Exit
Fig. 6.29 The five zones of a tunnel
The entrance zone is the part of the tunnel just before the
entrance, and it has a length equal to the stopping distance
of a car at the traffic design speed. During daylight hours the
driver is adapted to the high luminance outside the tunnel. To
avoid the entrance to the tunnel appearing as a black hole and
to ensure that a driver approaching the tunnel entrance can
detect obstacles on the road, suitable lighting must be installed
in the tunnel entrance, the threshold zone.
The threshold zone is the first zone inside the tunnel and has
a length equal to the stopping distance of a vehicle at traffic
design speed. Luminance values (Lth) should be calculated
according to the calculation method shown in the document CIE
88:2004 and this is related to the luminance outside the tunnel
and the speed of the traffic passing through the tunnel. The
road luminance can be reduced after a distance of half of the
stopping distance into the tunnel.
Fig. 6.30 The entrance zone
Specific Techniques
| 149
Specific Techniques
Between the threshold zone and the interior zone a number of
transition zones occur. In these transition zones the luminance is
gradually reduced until it reaches the level of the interior zone.
The luminance values can be reduced in steps of 3:1, but the
last step from transition zone to interior zone should not be
greater than two times the interior zones values.
The interior zone is the longest part of the tunnel and the
luminance level should comply with the recommendations given
in the standard. These recommendations give the luminance
level as a function of the stopping distance and traffic flow. For
very long tunnels the interior zone may be split into two subzones. The first sub-zone is equivalent to the distance of travel of
a vehicle at traffic design speed. The second sub-zone contains
the remaining length of the interior zone.
The exit zone has to follow the same luminance level as the
interior zone, but where additional hazards may occur in the
tunnel, or in long tunnels, it is recommended to increase the
luminance level immediately prior to the exit.
Fig. 6.31 T he interior zone of a tunnel lit from

one side by a continuous row of
luminaires
For all zones the lighting levels on the walls is recommended

to be at least 60 per cent of the road luminance values of
the relevant zone up to a height of 2 meters above the road
surface. Uniformity of luminance in the zones must be a ratio of
0.4 (minimum to average on the road and walls up to a height
of 2m above the road surface). A longitudinal uniformity of 0.6
is required along the centre of each lane of the road.
The perception of flicker can occur in a tunnel. This generally
occurs when the luminaires are not mounted in a continuous
row when discomfort from flicker occurs due to the luminance
changes from that of the bright luminaires to the darker surface
between luminaires. The length of the experience, the amount
of light (peak value and duration) and flicker frequency has
an impact on the experience. To minimise flicker discomfort it
should be ensured that the flicker frequency is either below 2.5
Hz or above 15Hz.
For example: F or a traffic design speed of 60Km/h
(16.6m/sec) and a luminaire spacing of 4m
the flicker frequency is 16.6/4 = 4.2Hz.
Fig. 6.32 A
tunnel lit using floodlights in an
opposite configuration
Specific Techniques
Optics for a tunnel
The main aim for the lighting is to provide a good contrast
between the object and the road. For this luminaires may be
placed either above the road surface, or at the side of the
road surface. Two main types of luminaire optics exist for tunnel
lighting, giving a different distribution.
Symmetrical optics
This optic type is often placed above the lanes and the light
distribution is symmetrical both along the road and transverse
to the road. Symmetrical optics may sometimes be placed in
the junction between wall and ceiling making maintenance of
the luminaires easier and removing the need to close the tunnel
during maintenance time.
Fig. 6.33 Symmetrical optics
Counter beam optics

This optic type is asymmetrical and main beam is orientated
against the traffic, to create a maximum contrast between the
object and the road. Luminaires are placed above the traffic
lanes
To design a complete tunnel lighting installation takes a high
amount of knowledge and experience. The international
document CIE 88:2004 gives information on designing a
tunnel lighting scheme, and local standards should be consulted
for relevant national requirements.
Fig. 6.34 Counter beam optics
Specific Techniques
| 151
Specific Techniques
6.7 Lighting maintenance
When a lighting installation is first commissioned conditions
are at their optimal, that is the luminaires, lamps and reflective
surfaces in the space are new and clean. Through the life of
the installation these conditions will deteriorate as age and dirt
reduce the effectiveness of the lighting. Consequently when
designing a lighting installation it is common to design for a
maintained lighting value, that is the lighting level achieved
when the luminaires, lamps and reflective surfaces are at their
oldest or dirtiest.
To calculate maintained lighting levels it is necessary to
calculate the light loss at the point when the luminaires, lamps
and reflective surfaces are at their oldest or dirtiest. This means
that the maintenance cycle for the installation must be defined.
Fig. 6.35 The maintenance cycle
The maintenance cycle consists of three main activities:

1. Cleaning and maintaining the luminaire
2. Cleaning and maintaining the lamp
3. Cleaning and maintaining the reflective surfaces in the
lit space. In exterior area lighting the impact of reflective
surfaces may be negligible. However in applications
such as tunnels and underpasses, and also the lighting
of building facades regular cleaning can improve the
performance of the lighting scheme.
Specific Techniques
An example is shown in Figure 6.35, in which the luminaire
is cleaned every two years, and is cleaned and re-lamped
and the reflective surfaces are cleaned every six years. In this
example the installation maintenance factor is 67 per cent,
so at worst case only 67 per cent of the initial lighting level is
being realised. Note, the installation will never reach the initial
lighting levels achieved when new, as deterioration of some of
the components within the luminaire, and of the surface finishes
within the space, cannot be fully recovered by cleaning.
The main factors that influence the loss of lighting performance
through life for an installation are:

The cleanliness of the environment. In industrial or urban

environments airborne dirt will be much higher than in
clean room or rural environments. Therefore either the
luminaires and reflective surfaces within the space will
need cleaning more often or the maintenance factor for
the installation will be reduced.
The type of luminaire specified within the installation. In

dirty environments using an open luminaire will allow
dirt deposition within the luminaire that is very difficult to
clean. Using a sealed unit prevents dirt from entering the
luminaire and therefore only the external surfaces require
cleaning and may be cleaned more vigorously.
The lamp technology used within the installation. Different

lamp types have different characteristics with respect to
lumen maintenance and lamp life and deciding when
to relamp is a compromise between these two factors.
Selecting a lamp with good lumen maintenance through
life will reduce the light loss due to lamp aging. However,
the installation performance also relies on all (or at least
the majority) of lamps working. So either a spot lamp
replacement system must be used where any failed lamps
are immediately replaced, or the installation maintenance
factor must include an adjustment for the percentage of
broken lamps expected before relamping. Therefore,
relamping must be done when the lamp lumens have
reached a minimum acceptable value and the number of
failed lamps in the installation has reached a maximum
acceptable level.
Specific Techniques
| 153
Specific Techniques
The installation maintenance factor is then the product of all the
maintenance factors of the installation components.
MFinstallation
= luminaire MF x lamp lumen MF x lamp

survival MF x reflective surface MF
Where
luminaire MF the amount of light lost due to the
luminaire through aging and dirt
deposition on the luminaire
lamp lumen MF the amount of light lost due to a
reduction in lamp flux as the lamp ages
lamp survival MF the amount of light lost due to failed
lamps which are not immediately
replaced
reflective surface MF the amount of light lost due to reduced
reflection from surfaces within the
installation
Data for these factors should be available from manufacturers.
However the data will assume the unit is operating within
normal conditions as specified by the manufacturer. Operating
outside these conditions could (and probably will) alter the
characteristics of the unit. For example operating a lamp in a
hot environment may increase the lumen output of the lamp, but
at expense of lumen maintenance and lamp life.
Many lighting design software allow the maintenance
schedule to be defined and use this to calculate an installation
maintenance factor. However further guidance on calculating
and using maintenance factors may be found in publications
CIE 97-2006 - Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems
and CIE 154:2003 - The Maintenance of Outdoor Lighting
Systems
Standard tables for luminaire and room surface maintenance
factors exist in CIE 97 and in the absence of more
comprehensive manufacturers data these may be used. They
rely on the classification of the environment being lit into very
clean, clean, normal or dirty, and classification of the luminaire
according to its resistance to the effects of dirt (type A to G).
Specific Techniques
Table 6.2 gives help in deciding which environment should be
used, along with advice on typical cleaning intervals.
Inspection interval
3 years
Environment
Very Clean
Activity or Task area

Clean rooms, semi conductor plants, hospital clinical areas*, computer centres
Clean
Offices, schools, hospital wards
2 years
Normal
Shops, laboratories, restaurants, warehouses, assembly areas, workshops
1 year
Dirty
Steelworks, chemical works, foundries, welding, polishing, woodwork
Table 6.2 Typical inspection periods for differing environmental conditions

*In clinical areas more frequent inspections may be required
Table 6.3 gives guidance on deciding the type of luminaire,

which is then used in the luminaire maintenance table to
determine the luminaire maintenance factor.
Type
Luminaire type
Luminaire description
Bare batten
bare lamp luminaires
Open top housing

(natural ventilated and
self cleaning types)
Direct-indirect luminaires without cover, direct-indirect luminaires with indirect reflector and
closed optical device, wallwashing luminaires (vertical opening), wall mounted luminaires
open top and base, downlights with open top
Closed top housing

(unventilated)
Recessed and surface mounted luminaires (e.g. with louvres), downlights, spotlights
Enclosed IP2X
General purpose luminaires with closed covers and optics
Dust proof IP5X
Dust proof IP5X (protected, clean room luminaires)
Indirect lighting and

uplight
Free standing, pendant, wall mounted uplighters with closed base, cove lights
Air handling and forced

ventilated
Air handling body and optic used with air-conditioning or ventilation systems
Table 6.3 Luminaire type and description
When the environment and luminaire type have been

determined the tables shown below may be used to give the
luminaire maintenance factor and room surface maintenance
factor. The room surface maintenance factor depends upon
the downward flux fraction (DFF) for the luminaire, which is
defined as
DFF = downward light output ratio / total light output ratio.
Specific Techniques
| 155
Specific Techniques
Elapsed time
between
cleanings
in years
Environment
Luminaire type
A
0.5
1.0
1.5
Any
VC
VC
VC
0.98
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.83
0.95
0.91
0.87
0.80
0.96
0.95
0.91
0.88
0.95
0.90
0.86
0.83
0.94
0.87
0.83
0.79
0.95
0.93
0.89
0.85
0.94
0.89
0.81
0.75
0.93
0.84
0.74
0.66
0.94
0.92
0.87
0.83
0.94
0.88
0.82
0.77
0.93
0.85
0.79
0.73
0.94
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.92
0.92
0.88
0.83
0.94
0.92
0.89
0.85
0.93
0.86
0.81
0.74
0.91
0.81
0.73
0.65
1,00
1.00
0.99
0.98
1.00
0.99
0.96
0.93
0.99
0.97
0.94
0.89
Elapsed time
between
cleanings
in years
2.0
Environment
Any
Luminaire type
A
1
2.5
3.0
VC
VC
VC
0.94
0.89
0.84
0.78
0.93
0.87
0.82
0.75
0.92
0.85
0.79
0.73
0.92
0.84
0.80
0.75
0.91
0.82
0.76
0.71
0.89
0.79
0.74
0.68
0.91
0.80
0.69
0.59
0.89
0.77
0.64
0.54
0.87
0.74
0.61
0.52
0.91
0.83
0.77
0.71
0.90
0.81
0.75
0.68
0.89
0.79
0.73
0.65
0.93
0.91
0.86
0.81
0.92
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.92
0.90
0.84
0.79
0.88
0.77
0.66
0.57
0.86
0.73
0.60
0.51
0.85
0.70
0.55
0.45
0.99
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.98
0.95
0.91
0.86
0.98
0.95
0.90
0.85
Table 6.4 Luminaire maintenance factors based upon type and environment
0.50/0.30/0.20
0.50/0.50/0.20
0.50/0.70/0.20
0.70/0.30/0.20
0.70/0.50/0.20
0.70/0.70/0.20
0.80/0.30/0.20
0.80/0.50/0.20
0.80/0.70/0.20
reflectances
ceiling/walls/floor
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.98
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.95
0.91
0.86
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.91
0.97
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.98
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.95
0.91
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.94
0.91
0.97
0.94
0.89
0.84
0.98
0.96
0.92
0.89
0.99
0.97
0.95
0.92
1.00
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
0.97
0.93
0.88
0.81
0.98
0.95
0.91
0.86
0.99
0.97
0.94
0.91
0.97
0.94
0.89
0.83
0.98
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.99
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.98
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.98
0.97
0.94
0.89
0.99
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.50
room surface maintenance factors utilisation plane
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.00
environment
time/yrs
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
5.00
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
5.50
0.95
0.91
0.85
0.80
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.96
0.92
0.87
0.81
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.86
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.91
0.96
0.93
0.89
0.84
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
6.00
Specific Techniques
Table 6.5 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=1.0 (direct luminaires)
Specific Techniques
| 157
Table 6.6 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=0.5 (direct/indirect luminaires)
0.50/0.30/0.20
0.50/0.50/0.20
0.50/0.70/0.20
0.70/0.30/0.20
0.70/0.50/0.20
0.70/0.70/0.20
0.80/0.30/0.20
0.80/0.50/0.20
0.80/0.70/0.20
reflectances
ceiling/walls/floor
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.94
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.84
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
0.94
0.88
0.78
0.67
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.73
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.79
0.94
0.89
0.80
0.69
0.96
0.91
0.84
0.75
0.97
0.93
0.88
0.80
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.79
0.97
0.95
0.90
0.84
1.00
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
0.95
0.90
0.81
0.70
0.96
0.93
0.85
0.76
0.97
0.94
0.89
0.81
0.96
0.91
0.83
0.72
0.97
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.98
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.97
0.93
0.86
0.76
0.97
0.94
0.89
0.81
0.98
0.96
0.92
0.85
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.00
environment
time/yrs
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
5.00
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
5.50
0.93
0.87
0.77
0.67
0.95
0.90
0.82
0.73
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.78
0.93
0.88
0.79
0.69
0.95
0.91
0.83
0.75
0.96
0.93
0.87
0.80
0.95
0.90
0.83
0.74
0.96
0.92
0.86
0.79
0.97
0.94
0.90
0.84
6.00
Specific Techniques
0.50/0.30/0.20
0.50/0.50/0.20
0.50/0.70/0.20
0.70/0.30/0.20
0.70/0.50/0.20
0.70/0.70/0.20
0.80/0.30/0.20
0.80/0.50/0.20
0.80/0.70/0.20
reflectances
ceiling/walls/floor
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
0.90
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.92
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.85
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.76
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.93
0.86
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.90
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.92
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.76
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.90
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.91
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.76
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.89
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.91
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.76
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.89
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.91
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.89
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.91
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.90
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.92
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.82
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.85
0.72
0.55
0.94
0.87
0.76
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.93
0.86
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.91
0.82
0.67
0.50
0.93
0.85
0.72
0.55
0.94
0.88
0.76
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.68
0.51
0.93
0.86
0.73
0.56
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
0.92
0.84
0.70
0.52
0.93
0.87
0.74
0.57
0.95
0.89
0.78
0.62
1.00
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
very clean
clean
normal
dirty
0.93
0.86
0.72
0.54
0.94
0.88
0.76
0.59
0.96
0.90
0.80
0.64
0.93
0.86
0.73
0.55
0.95
0.89
0.77
0.60
0.96
0.91
0.80
0.65
0.94
0.87
0.75
0.57
0.95
0.90
0.78
0.61
0.96
0.91
0.81
0.66
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.00
environment
time/yrs
0.89
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.91
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
5.00
0.89
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.91
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
5.50
0.89
0.81
0.66
0.49
0.91
0.84
0.71
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.90
0.81
0.67
0.50
0.92
0.84
0.72
0.55
0.93
0.87
0.75
0.60
0.91
0.83
0.69
0.52
0.92
0.85
0.73
0.57
0.94
0.88
0.77
0.61
6.00
Specific Techniques
Table 6.7 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=0 (indirect luminaires)
Specific Techniques
| 159
Specific Techniques
To determine the lamp lumen maintenance factor and lamp
survival factor data published by lamp manufacturers should be
used. Examples are shown below.
Lumen maintainance FH/FQ and FC
120
100
Maintainace %
80
60
40
20
0
100
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
Lifetime hours
16000
18000
FC
20000
FH/FQ
Figure 6.36 Example lumen maintenance curve (courtesy Osram)

Lumen maintainance T5 FQ HO, FH HE and FC
120
100
Maintainace %
80
60
40
20
0
100
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
Lifetime hours
Figure 6.37 Example lamp survival curve (courtesy Osram)
12000
14000
16000
FC
18000
20000
FH/FQ
Specific Techniques
For example, a closed top recessed louvred luminaire with an
upward light output ratio of zero uses 14W T16 lamps (Osram
FH), and is installed in an office with surface reflectances
of ceiling:70%, walls:50% and floor:20%. The room and
luminaires are cleaned every three years, and the lamps are
replaced every 8000 hours. Therefore:
Luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)
Luminaire is a closed top recessed louvred fitting, which
is type C. As the luminaire is installed in an office this is a
clean environment. Therefore, from Table 6.4 for a cleaning
interval of three years the luminaire maintenance factor is
given as 0.74.
Room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)
As the luminaire has an upward light output ratio of zero
the downward light output ratio must be the same as the total
light output ratio, and therefore the DFF equals one. Using
Table 6.5 for reflectances 0.80/0.50/0.20 gives a room
surface maintenance factor of 0.94.
Lamp lumen maintenance factor (LLMF)
From Figure 6.36 when the lamp has been running for 8000
hours the lamp lumens has reduced to 92% of the original
output (red curve).
Lamp survival factor (LSF)
From the red curve on Figure 6.37 when the lamps have
been operating for 8000 hours 96% of the lamps will still be
functional (e.g. 4% of the lamps will have failed).
Thus the maintenance factor is:
MF =
MF *
RSMF * LLMF *
0.74 *
0.94 *
0.614
LSF
0.92 * 0.96
Specific Techniques
| 161
Specific Techniques
6.8 Control of obtrusive light
Obtrusive light is the light that does not illuminate a task or
reference area but spills onto other non-related areas. This
not only reduces the efficiency of the lighting installation as a
proportion of the light produced is being wasted, but can also
cause inconvenience or damage in the surrounding areas.
Obtrusive light may be thought of as having three components;

Spill light, which is light emitted by a lighting installation

that falls outside the boundaries of the property for which
the lighting is designed.
Sky glow, which is light that contributes to the brightening

of the night sky.
Light trespass, which is a special case of spill light when

light spills onto surrounding properties. An additional form
of light trespass is when the direct view of bright luminaires
from normal viewing directions causing annoyance,
distraction or discomfort.
Fig. 6.38 A
n example of an installation
producing sky glow
Waste light
ULOR
Waste light
Sky glow direct and reflected flux
DLOR
Spill light
Light
trespass
Reference area
Immediate surrounds
Surrounds
Fig. 6.39 The components of obtrusive light
Specific Techniques
A selection of lighting technical parameters are used to define
limits for obtrusive light, depending upon the type of obtrusive
light being experienced or measured. All the parameters
depend upon the environmental zone the installation is within,
which effectively defines the amount of background brightness
from the surround area. The environmental zones are shown in
Table 6.8.
Zone
Surrounding
Lighting Environment
Examples
E1
Natural
Dark
National parks and protected sites
E2
Rural
Low brightness
Industrial or residential rural areas
E3
Suburban
Medium brightness
Industrial or residential rural suburbs
E4
Urban
High brightness
Town centres and commercial areas
Table 6.8 Definitions of environmental zones
The lighting technical parameters used to define limits for

obtrusive light are;

ULR, the upward light ratio. This is the proportion of light

that is emitted at or above the horizontal when a luminaire
is mounted in its installed position. For an installation it is
the sum of individual luminaire upward light ratios in their
installed orientation and this indicates the contribution of
an installation to sky glow.
Environmental Zones
Light
Technical
Parameter
Application Conditions
Upward
Light Ratio
(ULR)
Ratio of luminous flux incident on horizontal

plane just above luminaire in its installed
position, to total luminaire flux.
E1
E2
E3
E4
05
0 15
0 25
Table 6.9 Upward light ratio limits
Specific Techniques
| 163
Specific Techniques

Ev, the vertical illuminance on surrounding properties.

Limits apply to nearby dwellings and special attention
should be taken to vertical illuminance on windows. If land
has been designated for dwellings but no construction has
occurred these limits still apply for the potential dwellings.
Environmental Zones
Light
Technical
Parameter
Illuminance in vertical plane (Ev)
E1
E2
E3
E4
Pre-curfew:
2 lux
5 lux
10 lux
25 lux
Post-curfew:
0 lux
1 lux
2 lux
5 lux
Table 6.10 Vertical illuminance limits on properties
I, the maximum intensity of a luminaire in a designated

direction. Limits apply to every luminaire in an installation,
and are evaluated from every direction where views of
bright surfaces of luminaires are likely to be disturbing to
residents. Mind you, this only applies where the viewing
direction is not short-term, but is likely to be maintained.
Light
Technical
Parameter
Luminous intensity emitted by
luminaires (I)
Environmental Zones
E1
E2
E3
E4
Pre-curfew:
2500 cd
7500 cd
10000 cd
25000 cd
Post-curfew:
0 cd
500 cd
1000 cd
2500 cd
Table 6.11 Luminous intensity limits in a designated direction
Specific Techniques

TI, the value of threshold increment. Threshold increment is

a measure of the loss of visibility caused by the disability
glare from a luminaire installation. The limits apply where
users of a transport system are subject to a reduction in
visibility caused by a non-transport installation, and limiting
values are for positions and viewing directions relevant to
the direction of travel for users of the transport system.
Road classification (see section 4.05)
Light
Technical
Parameter
No road lighting
M5
M4 / M3
M2 / M1
Threshold
Increment
TI
15 %
based on adaptation
luminance of 0.1 cd/m2
15 %
based on adaptation
luminance of 1 cd/m2
15 %
based on adaptation
15 %
based on adaptation
Table 6.12 Threshold increment limits
Lb, the luminance of a building faade. This is the

average luminance of the building faade, and may be
approximated using

Eav x
Lb =
Where Eav is the average illuminance of the building

faade and is the reflectance of the building faade.
Ls, the luminance of a sign. This is the average luminance

of a sign and may be approximated similar to that
described above, using the average illuminance and
reflectance values for the sign.
Light
Technical
Parameter
Environmental Zones
E1
E2
E3
E4
Building Facade Luminance (Lb)
Taken as the product of the

design average illuminance and
reflectance factor divided by .
5 cd/m2
10 cd/m2
25 cd/m2
Sign Luminance (Ls)
Taken as the product of the

design average illuminance and
reflectance factor divided by
, or for self-luminous signs the
average luminance.
50 cd/m2
400 cd/m2
800 cd/m2
1000cd/m2
Table 6.13 Luminance limits for building facades and signs
Specific Techniques
| 165
Specific Techniques
To control obtrusive light various strategies may be used
depending upon the application;

Using floodlights that have a tightly controlled beam

allows more precise control of the light. Therefore the best
level of beam control for the application should be used.
Using floodlights that allow the luminaire to be aimed

close to the vertical (i.e. with the face of the floodlight
nearly horizontal and pointing downwards) reduces
the impact on sky glow due to reduced upward light.
Applications which can use specialist flat-glass
floodlights (which are designed to be mounted with the
front face of the floodlight horizontal) should do so, as
these are ideal for controlling obtrusive light.
A higher mounting height can allow floodlights to be

aimed closer to the vertical, and can allow floodlights with
tighter beam control to be used. This allows better control
of glare and spill light. However, the structures will be
more intrusive during daylight hours.
Similarly the closer a column is to the area to be lit the

better the control of the lighting as this allows floodlights to
be aimed closer to the vertical and floodlights with a wide
distribution can be used with simplified shielding (such as
a visor).
Using luminaires with lamps that have a lower lumen

output leads to a reduced mounting height, which
helps reduce spill light. However, more luminaires will
be required which may reduce the efficiency of the
installation (but consider that if the control of light is better
then more of the light is being usefully utilised within the
scheme, therefore less light overall may be required. This
is because a scheme that has less light control is over
lighting to compensate for the spill light).
Relevant publications for further reading are

CIE S 015/E:2005 Lighting of Outdoor Work Places
EN12464-2:2007 Lighting of workplaces part 2: outdoor
work places
Specific Techniques
6.9 Lighting for crime prevention
A firm body of evidence now exists to support the theory that
lighting can have a positive effect on crime prevention. With
the increasing prevalence of CCTV cameras in shops and
public spaces lighting also has an important role in aiding the
authorities in identifying suspects. These benefits however have
to be designed into a lighting installation, and it should be
accepted that improvements in lighting cannot overcome bad
design of structures or of a space. (For example the pedestrian
tunnel shown has untended shrubs, a perfect hiding place, and
an overhang ideal for a person to hide on, even before the
pedestrian has entered the blackness of the tunnel).
Lighting can be used to affect two aspects related to crime

Actual crime. This is the act of a criminal event occurring.

Lighting can either inhibit crime, or aid in the identification
of a suspect.
The fear of crime. This is the mental worry of a criminal act

occurring. Fear of crime tends to be more prevalent than it
used to be due to improved communications. Knowledge
of crime that occurs in a different geographical area can
induce fear of crime in a totally unrelated area, however
irrational. Lighting can be used to create a safe and
reassuring atmosphere.
Fig. 6.40 A
forbidding entrance to a pedestrian
tunnel
It is important to understand that when considering lighting for

a space it is not always possible to understand the problems
of the space without seeing it in all conditions. Frequently the
daytime appearance is completely different to that at night.
How can lighting be used as a tool in the fight against
crime? Some general points can be made. For exterior areas,
including car parks, light fixtures and fittings should incorporate
vandal resistant features such as polycarbonate or reinforced
glass fittings with sources positioned out of reach. The effect of
lighting should not be restricted, either by internal fixtures and
furnishings or by exterior structures or landscaping.
Lighting columns/fixtures should not aid access, for example
over perimeter fencing/walls. And cables and wiring serving
lighting systems should be enclosed to restrict accidental
damage or criminal attacks.
Specific Techniques
| 167
Specific Techniques
When lighting for crime prevention the main requirement of
lighting is to ensure a high level of visibility and modelling. It
must be understand that whilst precisely targeted increases in
lighting generally have crime reduction effects, more general
increases in lighting seem to have crime prevention effects
but this outcome is not universal. However, even untargeted
increases in lighting generally make people less fearful of crime
and more confident of their own safety.
To increase visibility and modelling requires consideration to the
illumination on the vertical or semi-cylindrical planes. Pedestrians
need to be able to see other people clearly at a maximum
distance, to be able to perceive any possible threat, either from
facial expression, posture or objects carried (such as a knife)
allowing them sufficient time to react to the threat.
When considering street lighting a change in design approach
is required. Generally street lighting is designed for maximum
efficiency, using the fewest lanterns/columns and switching
lanterns dependant on time. However, lighting should be
designed for both road users and pedestrians, either by using
lanterns that have a high level of performance in lighting both
the road and paths, or with combined lighting units (Figure
6.41), or by separate lighting units for each task. Lighting
should provide maximum quality and reduce shadows. Hence,
lower wattage lamps spaced closer together are preferable,
and lamp type should be chosen carefully to ensure a good
colour of light and colour rendering (white light has been
shown to increase peoples feelings of security, whilst a lamp
that obviously renders colour incorrectly reduces a persons
confidence in the lighting).
If lighting units are dimmed or switched off during the night high
levels of maintenance are essential as the failure of a lighting
unit will have a larger effect if only some of the lighting units are
lit compared with the case if all the lighting units were on.
When lighting footpaths and cycle paths they should be lit in
a manner that shows the direction that the path takes. Care
should be taken where necessary to illuminate beyond the
boundaries of the path in order to increase the visual area and
provide more confidence to people using those routes. It should
Fig. 6.41 C
ombined lighting units with high
mount lanterns and bollard height
lighting
Specific Techniques
be recognised that steps and changes in level are also part of
the path and they should not be considered as independent
areas. In urban areas it is important not to rely on lighting from
commercial premises to supplement the amenity lighting as if the
commercial lighting is switched off heavy shadows may occur.
Lighting of commercial buildings should be controlled to prevent
high levels of illumination resulting in adjacent areas appearing
gloomy or dark (as shown). For open areas such as parks or
large pedestrian spaces the lighting should give guidance on
the configuration of the space.
A specific hazard for footpaths are pedestrian tunnels. These
generally have two problems, dark inside and light outside
during the daytime, or light inside and dark outside during the
night. This has implications for visibility as the eye has to adjust
to the different conditions which takes time, especially when
passing from relatively bright light into darkness. The lighting
needs to be controllable to adjust to the different lighting
requirements (e.g. higher light levels during the day and lower
light levels at night with lighting outside the tunnel matched to
the light levels inside the tunnel). As lighting units in pedestrian
subways are generally accessible by the public they should be
vandal-resistant and maintained to a high standard.
Fig. 6.42 F aade lighting creating areas of

deep shadows
Car parks should also be considered as pedestrian areas.

N.B.;

Cars are generally stationary at entrance and exit points.

Therefore these areas need higher lighting levels.
Special consideration should be given to stairwells, lift

areas and areas with payment machines.
If possible light coloured surface treatments should be

applied to ceilings, columns and walls to maximise and
reflect the effect of the lighting system
Specific Techniques
| 169
Specific Techniques
When lighting for CCTV cameras additional points need
consideration. To aid in the production of a good image the
following ratios should be checked;
Ratio 1 =
Upward horizontal illuminance
Downward horizontal illuminance
Ideally Ratio 1 > 0.3
Ratio 2 =
Downward horizontal illuminance
Vertical illuminance towards camera
Ratio 3 =
Average luminance of subject
Average luminance of background
and < 3.0
Ratio 4 =
Vertical illuminance left
Vertical illuminance right
and < 3.0
Ratio 5 =
Vertical illuminance to the back
Ideally Ratio 5 <3.0
Vertical illuminance toward the camera
Ideally Ratio 2 < 5.0
For interiors a luminaire with a batwing distribution will give

good facial modelling. Additionally when considering the
camera position better quality may be achieved by mounting
the camera in a position sympathetic to photography (e.g.
between light fittings and with a low contrast background.
Therefore lighting should not cause heavy contrast patterns
down the wall used as a backdrop to the camera sight). It may
be possible to channel customers and would be criminals using
a roped queuing system to between luminaires where more
acceptable light conditions are available. Consider daylight
as this can cause problems due to colour differences or high
contrast between subject and background
For exteriors the relationship between subject and background
brightness should be controlled with a maximum of 3:1 (ratio
3) and the relationship between horizontal and vertical toward
camera illuminance should ideally be no greater than 5:1 (ratio
2). Therefore for example, ensure the camera is not aimed so
that dark black sky is the background. Vertical illuminances at
head height on the three sides of the head should not exceed a
ratio of 3:1 between themselves (e.g. right to left, right to front
and left to front.). Cameras should not be directed toward any
bright light source.
Finally always ensure the lamp used has good colour rendering
capabilities to aid in discriminating colour of garments, etc.
Fig. 6.43 C
CTV images taken using different
lighting systems
Specific Techniques
6.10 Lighting and health
When producing a lighting design the ability of lighting to
provide an atmosphere by manipulating the lit effect is one of
the key skills of the designer. The feel of a space can affect
the experience of an observer within that space. Within the
Thorn PEC philosophy this is the Comfort attribute, and has
descriptors such as calm, lively, balanced, reassuring, inspiring,
welcoming, glitter, etc. This use of the lit experience whilst
possibly affecting our mood does not normally affect our health,
except under inappropriate use of lighting for a given situation.
Recent research, however, has shown that how we design
luminaires and lighting installations does have implications on
our health. Research has discovered a third receptor in our
eye, which exists along with the rods and cones that allow us
to see. This receptor does not produce a visual effect and has
an action spectrum towards the blue end of the visible light
spectrum (the yellow curve labelled NI in the diagram).
Fig. 6.44 The photic, scotopic and non-image forming receptor response curves
Fig . 6.45 The pho tic, scotop ic and non -im age forming
rece ptor respon se curves
Specific Techniques
| 171
Specific Techniques
The third receptor has direct implications on our feelings of
wellness and well-being. It links into the bodys hormone
mechanisms, affecting the body clock, alertness, mood
and others. This opens up the possibilities of using light and
designing lighting to modify the operation of the body, thereby
affecting a persons physical health. Indeed this is already
used in the treatment of seasonal affective disorder (SAD) when
very high levels of blue rich light are used to help alleviate
this condition, and light has shown promise in treating sleep
disorders caused by illnesses such as Alzheimers disease, in
treating sufferers of delayed phase sleep disorder which is
characterised by late sleep onset and late awakening (generally
younger people) and in treating advanced phase sleep
disorder which is characterised by early sleep onset and early
awakening (generally elderly people).
Vision
roads and cones
Visual acuity
Visual performance
Emotions
Hormones (melatonin)
Sleep quality
Non-vision
wellness
3rd receptor
Fig. 6.45 E
ffects due to the visual and non-visual pathways. The red and blue
lines indicate light signal paths through the head.
Nevertheless it is a large step from using light therapy for

treatment of specific conditions in a controlled environment to
applying this knowledge in general lighting applications to
aid health, with a consequent shift of responsibility towards
rigorous medical ethics and testing. Research shows it is quite
possible to modify the biological clock to optimise its timing
for night shift workers. It is also possible to give a burst of blue
light at suitable times during the day to enhance alertness, or
in a nursing home to increase sleep quality at night. However
research also raises questions as to possible side effects.
Biological clock
Mood and depression
Alertness
Specific Techniques
A body of knowledge indicates, for example, that during
periods of darkness the body produces hormones which
act as inhibitors to cancer. The implication of this is that by
manipulating the bodies hormone production we would also be
affecting the bodies defence against some diseases.
Equally using lighting for health in situations such as residential
care homes or nursing homes could be beneficial to the
patients, but at the expense of care staff that may be working
shift patterns at odds with their patients sleep patterns.
As well as medical factors, practical problems arise. With
respect to the shifting of the body clock for night workers the
process of shifting the body clock can take several days, which
would be inappropriate for rapidly changing shift patterns. Also
given a worker will probably travel to or from work in daylight
conditions, and daylight normally supplies a much larger
illuminance at the eye than that achieved by artificial lighting,
this would inhibit the effects of trying to reset the body clock.
However, evidence suggests that the body clock does become
adjusted without any direct intervention for those doing semipermanent night shift work, taking a period of approximately
15 nights for adaptation.
It is necessary to understand and accept that people react
differently to a stimulus and internal research within Thorn
indicates that some people are more sensitive to blue enhanced
light than others. As an example, in blue enriched light some
workers found white paper to be a glare source, producing
headaches. Additionally there was a case of a worker
who had had eye surgery finding the blue enhanced light
uncomfortable when returning to work immediately after the
operation.
Manipulating the lit effect to produce stimulating and interesting
environments or controlling light to give dynamically changing
spaces can improve the quality of life for users of the space.
Yet, until more is known about the effects and side effects of
the non-visual effects of lighting, designing to modify biological
mechanisms should be treated with extreme caution.
Specific Techniques
| 173
Specific Techniques
6.11 Sustainability
One of the worlds most pressing concerns is achieving
a sustainable environment. So what is sustainability?
Sustainability, just like light, is essential to life and needs to be
taken seriously. It encompasses the need to conserve resources,
reduce energy demands, limit harmful emissions, reduce waste
and encourage renewable processes.
All these considerations are to protect our natural environment
and life for the future. The urgent need for action is recognised
by all and there are an increasing number of national and
international initiatives and legislations to drive for sustainable
living. A sustainable approach will ensure that the needs
of today are fulfilled without compromising the ability of
future generations to meet their needs. The ideal sustainable
arrangement is when a solution can be perpetually used,
reused or renewed with no waste. Electric lighting has a major
impact on sustainability. The key to sustainability in lighting is
ecodesign, efficient operation and planned recycling at the end
of the product life. These are fundamental considerations in the
Thorn PEC programme. Eco-design is practiced in the creation
of a lighting product, whilst operation is when the product is put
into service in lighting schemes. End of life is when the product
is no longer required or is unable to fulfil its function.
Extraction
Refining
raw
materials
Maintain
End of life
Recycle
LCA
Distribute
Install
Operate
Fig. 6.47 Product life cycle analysis (LCA)
Design
Manufacture
Package
Sustainable design
Fig. 6.46
Specific Techniques
Eco-design is design of product with the entire life cycle in
mind. The life cycle covers consideration of the product from
extraction and refining of raw materials, through design,
manufacture, installation, use and maintenance to the end of
useful life, when dismantling and recycling of the materials
commences. Employing life cycle assessments will check the
environmental impact of the solution through life. It ensures that
care is taken during design to employ absolutely the minimum
amount of restricted hazardous substances and that the
minimum amount of virgin materials, water and energy are used
during manufacture.
Consider also the energy efficiency during the operation
phase and the need to dismantle the product quickly and
without waste at the end of life. Luminaires should be designed
for disassembly and dematerialisation (eg use of snap fit
connectors rather than screws) and making parts multifunctional.
All products should be marked for easy identification and
removal. The generation of electrical energy required for
lighting is a major contributor to CO2 emissions. For every
kWh of energy 0.42kg * of CO2 is liberated and added to
the greenhouse gases in the atmosphere, increasing global
warming. The proportion of energy demand by lighting
products can be split into three phases: creation (12%), use
(80%) and disposal (8%). The most energy consumption by the
product is clearly during operation and much of this can be
influenced by prudent design and component selection. The key
elements of this selection are lamps and control circuit including
ballast type. Today the most useful and efficacious light source
is the fluorescent lamp. It can be linear or compact and employ
poly-phosphor coatings yielding good colour and light output.
The lamp requires a ballast to operate, which can be magnetic
or electronic. Magnetic ballasts (copper and iron) have the
advantage of being lower in cost and recyclable. Electronic
ballasts, however, can operate the lamp at high frequencies, in
excess of 10 kHz thus eliminating flicker, are more efficacious,
use less energy, and are lightweight one-piece control gear that
can be dimmable and automatically controlled. Lighting controls
add much to operational efficiency. The controls maybe a
simple on/off switch or a sophisticated computer programmed
system.
Fig. 6.48
Fig. 6.49
* EU average
Specific Techniques
| 175
Specific Techniques
Controls save energy use by providing electric light only where
and when needed. Controls can link up to respond to constant
illuminance, daylight availability and presence of people. With
efficient products, correct lighting scheme design and the use of
control systems substantial energy saving can be made without
jeopardising the quality of the required lighting condition.
The next obvious step is to protect the rapid depletion of raw
materials. In this process sustainable product designs must use
less material, make greater use of more recycled materials and
plan to use more recyclable materials. With such practice of
good management of resource, increased energy efficiency,
employment of new technologies and the drive for renewable
energy generation will ensure good future for light and lighting.
Fig. 6.50
Fig. 6.51 Recycling plant
Specific Techniques
6.12 Outdoor lighting controls (OLC)
The prevalent technology used in conventional outdoor lighting
has minimal control. Time clocks or photocells determine if a
luminaire is on or off and monitoring and reporting of luminaire
faults is dependant upon local residents or street patrols. The
lighting is therefore inflexible and the quality of maintenance
can be poor.
The use of modern outdoor lighting controls can overcome these
difficulties and supply many additional benefits. Benefits of
using lighting controls can be
A reduction in unnecessary night-time lighting by providing

facilities to dim or turn-off luminaires based upon user
needs.
Contributing to the reduction of traffic accidents and crime

rates by providing needs-specific lighting, for example
increasing lighting levels during busy times at road
junctions, motorway exits or areas of mixed pedestrian
and motorised traffic.
To allow lighting to easily adapt to special occasions. For

example during a street festival lighting can be controlled
to ensure suitable light levels based on the needs of
the event (this may involve increased lighting or even a
decrease in light levels if festival lights are being used).
Allowing energy needs to be more accurately defined and

optimised, reducing energy consumption and therefore
CO2 emissions and also saving money.
Additional benefits in the management of the lighting equipment

may be

Allowing the status of luminaires to be monitored and

failures to be automatically reported, so that defective
components may be replaced when they fail.
Allowing maintenance schedules to be rationalised based

upon computer records of lamp burning hours, luminaire
cleaning schedules, etc.
Specific Techniques
| 177
Specific Techniques

Reducing travel costs through automatic reporting of faults,

removing the need for street patrols
Lighting control and monitoring are the two central abilities

of the Thorn Telea system. Telea offers the flexibility of two
communication technologies :

A Powerline communication system uses the mains cabling

to transmit signals
An RF communication system uses radio frequency to

transmit data.
In both cases there is no need to install new cables, and both

systems allow instant reporting of fault conditions using SMS
messages to an assigned person.
A Telea installation consists of:

Luminaire controllers
Comboxes
Central Management server
Powerline Data
Communication
Radio
Frequency Data
Communication
Network
connection,
e.g. TCP/IP
Powerline Data
Communication
Fig. 6.52 Components of a Telea installation
Specific Techniques
Luminaire controllers
These are installed in each individual luminaire, either inside the
lantern or within the column. The controller switches the lamp on
and off and depending on the capabilities of the ballast may
also control power reduction/dimming. The controller allows
various operating parameters to be measured (such as burning
hours, lamp faults, etc) and feeds the information back to the
Combox. It contains an astrological clock and internal memory
enables programmes to continue to operate in the event of
signal breakdown. The two types of controller (Powerline and
Radio Frequency) may be mixed on one single installation.
Repeater functionality integrated into Telea controllers make the
communication extremely reliable and adaptable to any grid
topology and also remove the need for external relays.
Fig. 6.53 T elea Powerline luminaire controller
Combox features
A Combox consists of the following components :

one Combox controller
one transceiver (PL or RF)
one 24V power supply
three filters (PL only)
one GSM modem
Installed at the switch cabinet, the Combox controls up to 255

luminaire controllers. It integrates all switching programmes and
feedback from the controllers and feeds information back to the
central server. It can send error messages reporting luminaire
faults to one or several designated mobile phones.
There are two types of Comboxes, used respectively for
Powerline or Radio Frequency luminaire controllers. Both types
can control up to 255 luminaire controllers. The RF Combox
does not actually need to be contained within a switch cabinet,
only requiring power to operate, but the use of a switch cabinet
is normal practice.
Maximum distances between the Combox and the first luminaire
controller, or between two controllers are approximately 200m
for Powerline and 100m for Radio Frequency installations.
Fig. 6.54 T elea Combox RF SMS
Specific Techniques
| 179
Specific Techniques
CME central server features
Installed in the control room this comprises a hardware and
the CME software. The CME server is optional (an installation
may run with only Comboxes and luminaire controllers) but is
necessary for central monitoring and offers an intuitive interface
for configuring and monitoring the installation.
Data transfer between the server and Comboxes is achieved
through telephone (GSM) or computer network (TCP/IP)
communication protocols. In the case of GSM communication
the data transfer is usually programmed to occur at the end of
night, so that errors that might have arisen during the night can
be visualised on the screen the following morning.
The CME server can be interfaced with existing servers within
technical limitations. For example, the Geographical Information
System (GIS) enables lighting points to be visualised on a map
and faults or maintenance data such as burning hours to be
easily recognisable using colour coding. Please contact your
Thorn representative for further information.
Upgrading existing luminaires
The Telea system can be implemented into existing as well as
new lighting installations. For example the RF switch controller
(LSRF) fits into any luminaire equipped with a NEMA socket,
adding Telea functionality to the standard photocell. In addition,
all Powerline controllers can be supplied in boxes designed
for installation in poles, enabling retrofit installation when
mechanical and temperature constraints prevent the integration
into the gear compartment.
Telea for new lighting installations
For new installations Thorn can integrate Telea luminaire
controllers into several Thorn streetlighting luminaires. This
completely in-house service guarantees the conformity of all of
the luminaires to existing standards, including Electro-Magnetic
Compliancy (EMC).
Fig. 6.55 Telea CME software
7 Checklists
7.1 Life cycle analysis
When installing new lighting, or refurbishing an existing
scheme, it is important to quantify and compare the benefits
of possible alternative replacement lighting systems. These
benefits are quantified in terms of a life cycle calculation
for each lighting system, that is over the planned life of the
installation how much will each system cost. These values can
be compared and the most favourable option chosen. (Note
that the most favourable option from a financial viewpoint may
not be the best option from a lighting viewpoint. At some point
a decision will have to be made as to the relative importance
of these factors and a compromise reached).
If the chosen system is to be a replacement for an existing
installation a cost benefit of the new system compared to the
existing installation may be made by calculating the pay back
period, as shown Section 7.2.
Worksheet 7.1 aids life cycle analysis. Formulae used is this
worksheet are:
Luminaire costs = Number of luminaires x cost of one luminaire
Lamp costs = number of luminaires x number of lamps per luminaire x cost of one lamp
Installation costs = number of luminaires x installation cost per luminaire
Room cleaning costs = cost of room cleaning x service life of system (years)

room cleaning interval (years)
Luminaire cleaning costs = cost of luminaire cleaning x service life of system (years)

luminaire cleaning interval (years)
Lamp replacement costs = cost of lamp replacement x service life of system (years)

lamp replacement interval (years)
Energy costs = (number of luminaires x system power of luminaire x service life of system x annual burning hours x
energy cost per kWh x %energy savings due to controls)/1000
Operating costs = room cleaning costs + luminaire cleaning costs + lamp replacement costs + energy costs
Annual operating costs = operating costs/service life of system
(Note that the model given on the following page is a static

model in that it ignores the costs of depreciation of equipment
and interest payments).
Checklists
| 181
Checklists
Building Project
Option 1
Luminaire type
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire
System power of luminaire (W)
Operating data
Service life of system (years)
Annual burning hours
Lamp replacement interval (years)
Luminaire cleaning interval (years)
Room cleaning interval (years)
Number of luminaires
Lamp lumens maintenance factor
Lamp survival factor
Luminaire maintenance factor
Room surface maintenance factor
Maintenance factor [ (9)x(10)x(11)x(12) ]
Itemised investment costs
Cost of one luminaire
Cost of one lamp
Installation costs per luminaire
Itemised operating costs
Cost of lamp replacement
Cost of luminaire cleaning
Cost of room cleaning
Energy costs per KWh
%Energy savings due to control system
Investment costs
Luminaire costs [ (14)x(15) ]
Lamp costs [ (14)x(2)x(16) ]
Installation costs [ (14)x(17) ]
Investment costs [ (23)+(24)+(25) ]
Operating costs
Room cleaning costs [ (20)x(4) / (8) ]
Luminaire cleaning costs [ (19)x(4) / (7) ]
Lamp replacement costs [ (18)x(4) / (6) ]
Energy costs [ (14)x(3)x(4)x(5)x(21)x(22) / 1000 ]
Operating costs [ (27)+(28)+(29)+(30) ]
Annual operating costs [ (31) / (4) ]
Total costs over installation life [ (31)+(26) ]
Option 2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
Worksheet 7.1
182 |
Checklists
Checklists
7.2 Economics
When refurbishing an existing installation it is important to
be able to quantify the benefits of the new lighting system
compared with the existing system. These benefits are quantified
in terms of the payback period. This is a comparison of the
expenditure in terms of investment costs to buy and install a
new system, compared with the savings in annual operating
costs through having the new system. Thus if a payback time
is 5 years this means that after 5 years the savings from using
the new system have cancelled out the costs of buying the new
system.
Worksheet 7.2 aids in the calculation of this value. Formulae
used is this worksheet are:
Luminaire costs = Number of luminaires x cost of one luminaire
Lamp costs = number of luminaires x number of lamps per luminaire x cost of one lamp
Installation costs = number of luminaires x installation cost per luminaire
Room cleaning costs = cost of room cleaning x service life of system (years)

room cleaning interval (years)
Luminaire cleaning costs = cost of luminaire cleaning x service life of system (years)

luminaire cleaning interval (years)
Lamp replacement costs = cost of lamp replacement x service life of system (years)

lamp replacement interval (years)
Energy costs = (number of luminaires x system power of luminaire x service life of system x
annual burning hours x energy cost per kWh x %energy savings due to
controls)/1000
Operating costs = room cleaning costs + luminaire cleaning costs + lamp replacement costs + energy costs
Annual operating costs = operating costs / service life of system
Pay back period =

investment cost proposed installation investment cost existing installation

annual operating costs existing installation - annual operating costs proposed installation
(Note that the model given in Worksheet 7.2 is a static model

in that it ignores the costs of depreciation of equipment and
interest payments).
Checklists
| 183
Building Project
Existing
installation
Luminaire type
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire
System power of luminaire (W)
Operating data
Service life of system (years)
Annual burning hours
Lamp replacement interval (years)
Luminaire cleaning interval (years)
Room cleaning interval (years)
Lamp lumens maintenance factor
Lamp survival factor
Luminaire maintenance factor
Room surface maintenance factor
Maintenance factor [ (9)x(10)x(11)x(12) ]
Itemised investment costs
Cost of one luminaire
Cost of one lamp
Installation costs per luminaire
Itemised operating costs
Cost of lamp replacement
Cost of luminaire cleaning
Cost of room cleaning
Energy costs per KWh
%Energy savings due to control system
Investment costs
Luminaire costs [ (14)x(15) ]
Lamp costs [ (14)x(2)x(16) ]
Installation costs [ (14)x(17) ]
Investment costs [ (23)+(24)+(25) ]
Operating costs
Room cleaning costs [ (20)x(4) / (8) ]
Luminaire cleaning costs [ (19)x(4) / (7) ]
Lamp replacement costs [ (18)x(4) / (6) ]
Energy costs [ (14)x(3)x(4)x(5)x(21)x(22) / 1000 ]
Operating costs [ (27)+(28)+(29)+(30) ]
Annual operating costs [ (31) / (4) ]
Proposed
installation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
0
0
0
0
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
Worksheet 7.2
Pay back period* = (26)Proposed (26)Existing

(32)Existing (32)Proposed
Pay back period* =

*excludes depreciation and interest
184 | Checklists
(years)
=
years
Checklists
7.3 Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI)
It is becoming increasingly important to estimate the energy
requirements of lighting in buildings and to quantify these
requirements against best practice. To help, the CEN EN
15193 document has been produced, which introduces the
Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI). The document also
provides guidance with notional limits derived from reference
standards. Note that whilst responsible use of energy is
important it must not lead to inadequate lighting schemes being
produced. Both the lighting requirements and energy usage
requirements should be fulfilled.
Some terminology used in the LENI calculation may be
unfamiliar and is, therefore, given below.
Total installed charging power for emergency lighting (Pem)
installation input charging power, in watts, of all emergency
lighting luminaires in an area. Units: kWh/(m2 x year).
Pem = Pei
i
Where Pei is the emergency lighting charging power in watts.

Total installed control circuit parasitic power (Ppc) installation
input power, in watts, of all control systems within luminaires in
an area when the lamps are not operating.
Units: kWh/(m2 x year).
Ppc = Pci
i
where Pci is the parasitic power consumed by the controls when

the lamps are off, in watts.
Total installed lighting power (Pn) installation power in watts
of all luminaires in an area. Units: W/m2.
Pn = Pi
i
where Pi is the luminaire power in watts.

Daylight operating hours (tD) installation operating hours
when daylight is present. Units: hours.
Non-daylight operating hours (tN) installation operating
hours where daylight is not present. Units: hours.
Checklists
| 185
Checklists
Annual operating time (tO) the annual number of hours with
the lamps operating (i.e. turned on)
to=to+tn
where tD and tN are defined above.
Standard year time (ty) the time taken for one standard year
to pass, taken as 8760 hours.
Emergency lighting charge time (te) the operating hours
during which the emergency lighting batteries are being
charged. Units: hours.
Constant illuminance factor (FC) this is a factor relating to the
usage of the total installed power when constant illuminance
control is in operation in the area . When constant illuminance
control is not in operation this has the value of 1. Units: none.
Occupancy dependency factor (FO) this is a factor relating
the usage of the total installed lighting power when occupancy
control is in operation in the area. When occupancy control is
not in operation this has the value of 1. Units: none
Daylight dependency factor (FD) this is a factor relating the
usage of the total installed lighting power to daylight availability
in the area. When daylight control is not in operation this has
the value of 1. Units: none
The LENI formula is
LENI =
W
A
where
W is the total energy used for lighting a room or zone in kWh/
year and A is the total useful floor area of the building in m2.
W is composed of two components
W=WL+WP
where
WL is the annual lighting energy required to provide illumination
so that the building may be used.
WP is the annual parasitic energy required to provide charging
energy for emergency lighting systems and standby energy for
lighting control systems.
186 | Checklists
Checklists
WL may be calculated using the formula
WL = {(PnxFC)x[(tDxFOxFD)+(tNxFO)]}/1000
where the individual terms are defined above.
WP may be calculated using the formula

WP = {{PPCx[ty (tD + tN)]} + (Pemxte)}/1000
where the individual terms are defined above.
Worksheet 7.3 helps calculate the LENI value. Note that values
entered in the spreadsheet are the total values for all luminaires
in the installation. If more than one luminaire type is used the
total energy usage value (18) should be calculated for each
luminaire type and the results summed. This summed value
should then be used to calculate the LENI value.
Checklists
| 187
Checklists
Building Project
Parasitic power
Total emergency charging power (Pem)
Total lighting controls standby power (Ppc)
(1)
(2)
Luminaire data
Total installed power (Pn)
(3)
Operating hours
Daylight operating hours (tD)
Non-daylight operating hours (tN)
Standard year time (ty)
Emergency lighting charge time (te)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Factors
Constant illuminance factor (FC)
Occupancy dependency factor (FO)
Daylight dependency factor (FD)
Parasitic energy
Lighting controls parasitic power
(2) x [ (6) - ( (4) + (5) ) ]
Emergency lighting parasitic factor
(1) x (7)
Total parasitic energy usage
( (11) + (12) ) / 1000
Illumination energy
Energy usage without daylight/occupancy
control (3) x (8)
Daylight energy usage
(4) x (9) x (10)
Non-daylight energy usage
(5) x (9)
Total energy usage for illumination
{ (14) x [ (15) + (16) ] } / 1000

Total annual energy usage (13) + (17)
Total useful floor area in m2
Installation 1
Installation 2
8760
8760
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI)

(18) / (19)
Worksheet 7.3
188 |
Checklists
Checklists
Worked example LENI calculation
Project Electronic device assembly plant
Location North East England
Size Length = 55m, Width = 48m, H = 6m,
Useful area = 2640m
Roof
20% glazed to allow entry of daylight
Walls
2 sides 30% glazed to allow daylight
Interior Light colour with open plan assembly line layout
Operational hours = 4
000 hrs/year (2500 daylight,
1500 no daylight)
Standard year hours = 8760 hrs/year
Lighting requirements 500 lx on work plane, Uo > 0.7,
UGR <19, Ra > 80,
Lighting quality class medium (two star)
Lighting solution
230 off Primata II 2x49W T16 lamps battens with slotted white
reflector optic and DALI controlled dimmable HF ballast linked
daylight detection and auto off control
30 off as above but with E3 emergency lighting capability
6 off 1x18W T26 Exit signs
Required data
Circuit watts of the Primata II luminaire 106 W
Charge power for Primata II emergency lighting circuit
3.5 W/luminaire
Standby power for DALI ballast in the Primata II
0.4 W/luminaire
Charge power for Exit sign luminaires 10 W/luminaire
Estimations
Pem {(3.5 x 30 x 8760) + (10 x 6 x 8760)}/(2640 x 1000)
= 0.55 kWh/m/year
Ppc (0.4 x 260 x 8760)/(2640 x 1000) = 0.35 kWh/
m/year
Pn (106 x 260)/2640 = 10.4 W/m
Fc (constant illuminance control MF = 0.8) 0.9
Fd (daylight link control medium daylight supply) 0.8
Fo (presence control manual on/auto off) 0.9
LENI = (0.9 x 10.4)/1000 x {(2500 x 0.8 x 0.9) + (1500
x 0.9)} + 0.55 + {0.35/8760 x (8760 (2500 + 1500)]}
= (8.4/1000) x (1800 + 1350) + 0.55 + (0.35/8760 x
4760) = (9.36 x 3.15) + 0.55 + 0.19 = 30.22 kWh/m/year
LENI = 30.22 kWh/m/year
Checklists
| 189
Checklists
Table 7.1 shows the parameters and results for this project in
line B. It shows that the addition of the controls will yield a 21%
reduction in the energy requirements.
Line A shows the energy requirements if daylight was not
admitted into the building and Line C show the Benchmark
values for this type of project taken from EN 15193-2007
Annex F Table F1.
Building
Pm
Ppc
Quality Parasitic
class
Emergency
kWh/
(m2 x year)
Pload
tD
tN
Fc
FO
Parasitic
Control
kWh/
(m2 x year) W
no constant constant
illuminance illuminance
FD
Manual Auto Manual Auto

-
Manufacture ** A
0.55
0.35
10.4
2500
1500
0.9
0.9
** B
0.55
0.35
10.4
2500
1500
0.9
0.9
0.8
** C
20
2500
1500
0.9
LENI
LENI
Building
LENI
no constant illumination
Manual
Auto
kWh/(m2/year)
Manufacture
Table 7.1
190 | Checklists
LENI
constant illumination
Manual
Auto
kWh/(m2/year)
Gain
%
42.3
38.2
38.2
34.4
10
42.3
33.5
38.2
30.2
21
83.7
83.7
75.7
75.7
8 Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

8.1 Choosing the right lamp
Part of the expertise of the lighting designer is the ability to
find the most suitable combination of lamp and luminaire to
light a given environment. Choosing the correct lamp depends
upon what is required of the lighting. The relevant key lighting
characteristics of lamps are given below.
Luminous flux/luminous efficacy
The total amount of light generated by the lamp. The rated
luminous flux is measured under standard conditions at 25C
in units of lumen (lm). The ratio of luminous flux to electrical
power consumption gives the luminous efficacy (lm/W). The
system luminous efficiency also includes the power consumption
of the control gear. The greater the efficacy for a given output,
the lower the electricity cost, and therefore the lower the
contribution of the power station to global warming.
Rated life
The average rated life is normally specified. This is the time by
which statistically half of a test sample of lamps are still working
(e.g. half have failed) under standardised conditions.
Luminous flux/
luminous efficacy
Rated life
Light colour
Luminous flux
maintenance
Lamp power
Colour rendition
Burning position
Warm-up time
Re-start time
Dimming
capability
Fig. 8.1 C
onsiderations in choosing a lamp
Light colour
The light colour relates to the correlated colour temperature
(CCT) of a white light source. This describes the colour
impression made by a light source; from relatively warm (low
colour temperature with predominant red) to cool (high colour
temperature with predominant blue).
Colour rendition
The spectral components present in light produced by a lamp
determine how well the lamp reproduces object colours. The
higher the colour rendition index (Ra or CRI), or the lower the
colour rendition group number, the better the colour rendition.
Ra
90-100
80-89
60-79
40-59
20-39
<20
Increasing colour
rendition
Colour rendering group

1A
1B
Table 8.1 Colour rendering groups linked to lamp Ra
| 191

Burning position
Certain lamps only permit a restricted selection of mounting
orientations for correct operation. Manufacturers specify these
permitted burning positions for their lamps. For example for
some metal halide lamps only certain burning positions are
allowed to prevent unstable operating conditions, whilst
compact fluorescent lamps may generally be mounted in any
orientation (although luminous flux output may vary with burning
position).
Dimming capability
Incandescent, tungsten halogen, fluorescent and compact
fluorescent lamps may all be dimmed over almost any range.
The output of high-pressure sodium and mercury vapour lamps
may be varied, but in a more limited fashion and generally only
by discrete levels. Metal halide lamps are not approved for
dimming by most manufacturers due to the effect this may have
on light quality and lamp life.
Warm-up time
Many lamps need between 30 seconds and several minutes to
warm up and output their full luminous flux. These include highpressure discharge lamps and fluorescent lamps.
Re-start time
When high-pressure discharge lamps (also known as highintensity discharge lamps or H.I.D. lamps) are turned off they
need to cool down for several minutes before they can be
started again. This has implications in applications where after
a dip in the power supply instant re-strike is required.
Lamp power
The electrical power consumed by the lamp, as opposed to the
electrical power consumed by a system consisting of lamp and
control gear.
Luminous flux maintenance
As a lamp ages through life the peak luminous flux output by
the lamp decreases due to deterioration in the performance
of the lamp chemicals and in the physical lamp structure.
Manufacturers produce lumen maintenance curves for their
lamps showing how the luminous flux depreciates over time.
192 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

8.2 Tungsten halogen lamps
Key attributes
For mains or low-voltage operation
Longer rated life and higher luminous efficacy than
incandescent lamps
Easy to dim
Brilliant light
Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise
direction of light (but do require a transformer)
Excellent colour rendition
Fig 8.2 Tungsten halogen lamps
Key application areas

Retail and domestic
Restaurants and catering
How they work
Current flows through a filament and heats it up, just as
in incandescent lamps. These lamps therefore generate a
relatively large amount of heat. The halogen cycle increases
the efficiency and extends the rated life compared with
traditional incandescent lamps. (The halogen cycle is a
chemical mechanism that causes tungsten that evaporates
from the filament during operation to be deposited back onto
the filament, thereby reducing blackening of the bulb wall.
Chemicals used in the halogen cycle also slow down the rate
of diffusion of filament material, thereby increasing the filament
life, which is the principal failure mechanism)
8.3 Fluorescent lamps

Key attributes
High to very high luminous efficacy
Good to excellent colour rendition
Long rated life
Extensive range of types
Dimmable
Extensively used in most application areas
Fig 8.3 Fluorescent lamps
How they work

An alternating electric field generates UV radiation (which is
in itself invisible to the human eye) between the two electrodes
in the discharge tube. This UV radiation is converted into
| 193

visible light in the phosphor coating on the tube wall. The
colour rendering and colour temperature attributes of the light
produced depend upon the chemical composition of the
phosphors. The lamp needs a starting aid and a current limiting
device, which may be combined in an electronic ballast. The
luminous flux is highly dependent on the ambient temperature
around the lamp.
Application notes
T16 fluorescent lamps differ from T26 versions in several
characteristics that the user should be particularly aware of.
1. Luminous flux vs. temperature curve
As with all fluorescent lamps, the luminous flux produced
by the lamp is temperature dependant. An optimum
ambient temperature exists for which the light output is a
maximum, and the light output decreases as the ambient
temperature moves away from this optimum. Both the
T16 and T26 lamps have the same basic shaped curve,
however the optimum temperature for a T16 is 35C,
whereas the optimum temperature for a T26 lamp is
25C. The reason for this is that the lamp cool spot for a
T16 lamp is at the end of the tube with the manufacturers
label printed on it, whereas the cool spot for a T26 lamp
is in the centre of the tube.
One effect of this differing optimum temperature is that
the rated luminous flux quoted by manufacturers is at a
standard temperature of 25C. For the T16 lamp the
maximum value of flux lies above this value, and therefore
the luminaire light output ratio (LOR) may have levels
greater than 100%.
Relative luminous flux %
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
T16
T26
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
Ambient temperature C
Fig. 8.4 C
urves relating luminous flux to ambient temperature for T16 and T26
linear fluorescent lamps

2. Lamp Orientation
Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being
identical in design it matters how one or more lamps
are fitted in the luminaires, In general, lamp ends should
always have the same orientation (so that the lamp labels
should be at the same lamp ends for all luminaires). In
cold environments it could be a benefit to lamp output to
have the lamp labels at opposite ends to aid heating of
the lamp cold spot.
3. Ageing/burning in
Brand new lamps stabilise during the initial aging phase.
This is the period immediately after the lamps are switched
on for the first time, when the initially encapsulated
mercury is vaporised and evenly distributed throughout
the lamp. Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and
light colour, and may exhibit flickering at low dimming
levels. To ensure perfect operation a period of two to four
days of operation without switching or dimming should be
allowed, particularly in installation which allow dimming.
One should also wait for proper ageing before assessing
an installation for illuminance levels and light quality.
T16
T26
Length
Power
549mm
14W
24W
Rated
luminous
flux (25C)
1200lm
1750lm
849mm
21W
1900lm
39W
3100lm
28W
2600lm
54W
4450lm
1149mm
1449mm
35W
3300lm
49W
4300lm
80W
6150lm
Length
Power
590mm
18W
Rated
luminous
flux (25C)
1350lm
895mm
30W
2350lm
1200mm
36W
3350lm
1500mm
58W
5200lm
Table 8.2 Summary of selected lamps
| 195

8.4 Compact fluorescent lamps
Key attributes
Compact designs
High luminous efficacy
Excellent colour rendition
Extensive range of types
Dimmable
Commercial
Domestic, hotels and many exteriors
How they work
These lamps are compact versions of the linear or circular
fluorescent lamps and operate in a very similar way. The
luminous flux depends upon the burning position and ambient
temperature around the lamp.
Application notes
1. Amalgam lamps
The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux
of traditional and compact fluorescent lamps can be
compensated by adding amalgam that helps to trap
mercury and slow its release. This helps to check the steep
drop-off of luminous flux at higher or lower temperatures
so that at least 90% of the maximum luminous flux is
achieved over a wide temperature range, typically about
+5 to +70C. Above and below this range however, the
light level still falls off sharply. Note that amalgam lamps
are comparatively slow to run-up and should not be used
for emergency lighting of dangerous workplaces (100%
luminous flux required after 0.5 seconds). Amalgam
lamps are also unsuitable for installations with high quality
dimming requirements since lamps may not dim uniformly.
2. Lamp orientation
The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highly
dependant upon the burning position. Ensuring the lamps
are correctly inserted can therefore optimise the light output
ratio. Standard types of lamp have a cool spot in the
exposed lamp bend, so that self-heating and convection
may lead to a temperature rise here. (In amalgam lamps
the cool spot lies in the base). In compact luminaires with
Fig. 8.5 Compact fluorescent lamps

horizontal lamp arrangement, such as downlights, it is
therefore recommended to fit the lamps with electrodes
uppermost wherever possible. Since the lamp end does
not allow consistent identification of the electrode position,
that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are not connected
should be placed uppermost these are the two tube ends
containing the internal electrodes.
8.5 Metal halide lamps

Key attributes
High luminous efficacy
Good to excellent colour rendition
High colour stability for ceramic discharge-tube lamps
Limited dimming. Some manufacturers advise no dimming
of this lamp
Fig. 8.6 Metal halide lamps

Industrial
Spotlighting
Floodlighting
Retail areas
How they work
In metal halide lamps a highly compact electric arc is produced
in a discharge tube. The composition of the chemicals in
the tube determines the quality of light produced. An ignitor
is needed to switch on the lamp, and the current must be
controlled by a ballast. The use of ceramic discharge tubes
further improves the lamp properties.
Application notes
1. Ballasts
The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range
of operating principles, resulting in different electrical
operating values. Some lamps are therefore approved for
operation with both ballasts for metal halide lamps and
with ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps. The
higher operating current then leads to higher luminous flux
levels for the same lamps, together with slightly altered
light quality. In both cases suitable ignitors are required.
| 197

2. Ignitors
An ignitor is a starting device that generates voltage pulses
to start a discharge lamp. A basic ignitor will do this until
the lamp strikes, which means that if there is a problem
with the lamp or circuit that prevents the lamp starting the
ignitor will continue to try to start the lamp until the circuit
is turned off or potentially the ballast is damaged. Modern
ignitors therefore normally incorporate anti-cycling control
that can sense the normal end-oflife mode of a lamp
and disables the ignitor. This normally happens after the
ignitor has tried to start the lamp a few times, and for
metal halide lamps this is generally after approximately 15
minutes. (For high pressure sodium lamps this will be after
approximately 5 minutes).
3. Glass covers
In general metal halide lamps require a glass cover to
protect people and property in the event of the lamp
exploding. It is the manufacturers responsibility to decide
whether to permit individual lamp types to be used in
uncovered luminaires. Suitable safety devices are installed
in the lamps for this purpose (e.g. integral safety tube,
outer protective coating). The detailed information from the
manufacturer must be observed without fail.
4. Rated life characteristics
The average rated lamp life and the reduction in luminous
flux with age can vary markedly between lamp types.
They also depend on the switching frequency and the
position of use. Detailed data from the manufacturer
should be used to determine suitable maintenance factors
for the operation of the lamp (lamp survival factor and
lamp luminous flux maintenance factor).
8.6 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps

Key attributes
High luminous efficacy and long rated life
Satisfactory to poor colour rendition
Can be dimmed in discrete steps
Colour improved sodium lamp - Good colour rendition
Warm light
Fig. 8.7 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps

Industrial
Street lighting
Colour improved sodium lamp - Retail areas
How they work
The discharge in the linearly extended ceramic discharge tube
is defined by sodium, so the light is yellowish and only suitable
for certain applications although colour improved versions of
the lamp do exist, An ignitor is needed to switch on the lamp
(although some lamps have a built-in ignitor and do not need
any external starting aids), and the current must be controlled
by a ballast.
Note, sodium vapour low pressure lamps generate poor quality
yellow light with extreme high efficacy. They are often used for
street lighting.
8.7 Mercury vapour lamps

Key attributes
No starter required, just a ballast
Satisfactory to poor colour rendition
Can be dimmed in discrete steps
Low efficacy
Industrial
Street lighting
Walkways
Fig. 8.8 Mercury vapour lamps
How they work

The almost obsolete high-pressure mercury lamp is actually
the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp, although it
provides poorer colour rendering and efficacy. The lamps can
be started at mains voltage, and so only need a ballast to limit
the current.
| 199

8.8 Induction lamps
Key attributes
Rotationally symmetrical light distribution
Long rated life
Not dimmable
Areas where it is difficult to replace lamps
Commercial and industrial interiors
Retail
Indoor and outdoor public areas
Fig. 8.9 Induction lamp
How they work

A very high-frequency electromagnetic field is coupled into
the glass bulb using an antenna protruding into the bulb. This
field excites the mercury to produce UV radiation that is then
converted into visible light using phosphors, just as in fluorescent
lamps. The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes
their luminous flux only very slightly temperature dependant. The
lamps can only be operated with special electronic ballasts and
have a built in microwave screen. Systems have a very long
service life due to the absence of any electrodes, however the
effects of lumen depreciation should still be considered. As yet
there are no dimmable electronic ballasts available.
8.9 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Key Attributes
Good luminous efficacy
Long service life
Low voltage
Durable
Emit very little heat
Small dimensions
Exterior signage, display and directional lighting
Dynamic colour effects
How they work
An LED is a small solid-state semiconductor device that emits
light when an electric current passes through it. The LED consists
of a diode chip that is encased in an epoxy, plastic, resin
Fig. 8.10 LED

or ceramic housing. This LED housing may be in a variety of
shapes and sizes and helps determine the optical characteristics
of the LED. Generally a second optical controller is used in the
form of a lens mounted on the epoxy housing, and the overall
characteristics of the system, from the shape and size of the LED
to the configuration of the lens and distance from the diode chip
to the lens define the final optical performance of the system.
As well as the optical control of the system, designing using
LEDs requires careful control of heat removal from the package.
Whilst the ratio of light to heat produced by LEDs is much
higher than for an incandescent light source (such as a GLS
light bulb) they do still produce a significant amount of heat.
This heat must be removed from the LED using heat sinking, as
LEDs are very sensitive to the junction temperature of the internal
diode, and excess heat will shorten the life of the LED or cause
failure.
LED chip
Cathode pin
Heat
+
Copper cladding
Fig. 8.11 Structure of an LED
Finally to operate LEDs requires a regulated direct current

supply, usually supplied by a self-contained driver which
converts the AC mains electricity to the correct DC voltage. This
driver must be correctly matched to the LED it is powering as
incorrect voltage and current will at best provide poor light, and
may severely reduce the life of the LED or cause instantaneous
failure of the system. The driver must also protect the LED
system from voltage fluctuations that may cause damage. The
driver can provide a quite advanced level of control, allowing
dimming down to 0%, and with a cluster of different coloured
diodes and the use of technology such as DMX protocols linked
to a light mixing console extremely complex lighting effects may
be produced.
LEDs have reasonable electrical efficiency in terms of lumens
per watt (i.e. the power input to the driver compared with the
light produced by the LEDs) and they are improving all the time
but currently they do not compare with the high values from
discharge lamp technology.
So the LED is not a true lamp, generally being supplied as a
complete electrical and optical system, which is then embodied
into a housing.
| 201

The light produced by an LED is monochromatic and the
colour of the emitted light depends on the material used in the
fabrication of the LED and varies from red through orange,
yellow, green and blue. To produce white light a variety of
methods are used. The best method in terms of quality of the
spectrum of light is produced using a blue LED with a yellowish
phosphor coating, in principal similar to a fluorescent lamp.
This is termed a phosphor down conversion. The use of a
phosphor does, however, decrease the efficiency of the system.
LED packages may also be configured to produce mixed or
blended light, either through the use of three or more different
coloured LEDs (such as a mixture of red, yellow, green and
blue) or through a multicolour LED that incorporates two or
more different colour chips within the same epoxy package.
These blended systems whilst suitable for lighting within the
entertainment industry or in colour changing applications should
be used with caution in the wider lighting environment as while
they may visually produce white light the actual spectrum of
the light is still three or more monochromatic peaks of light and
therefore accuracy of colour rendering can be poor.
An additional consideration is that the process for producing
LEDs cannot accurately reproduce LEDs with identical colour
appearances, especially for white LEDs. If a random set of
LEDs was taken which were all nominally white they would
have differing appearances. To overcome this a process called
binning is used, in which the LEDs are sorted into groups of
similar colour appearance. The accuracy of the colour match
depends upon the bin size, a larger bin size will contain a
wider spread of colour appearance than a smaller bin size.
However, decreasing the bin size increases manufacturing
and LED costs. When using groups of LEDs or LED luminaires
it is essential that the LEDs come from the same bin to give a
consistent appearance.
When buying LEDs, either as a component to insert into a
fixture or as a complete luminaire the LEDs may be supplied
in various configurations, varying from individual LEDs to
clustered or linear formats. They may also be supplied with or
without a secondary lens. This gives flexibility in application,
the configuration being chosen to suit the fixture it is to be used
within.
RYGB white
RYG(B)
Phosphers
Phosphor
downconversion
Blue or UV
LED
Fig. 8.12 White LED using phosphor coating
RYGB white
Colour
mixing
Mixing
optics
RYGB
LEDs
Fig. 8.13 White LED using colour blending

A benefit of LED technology is the relatively long life of the
systems, manufacturers quote upwards of 50,000 hours life
for LEDs, but other factors should be considered. Whilst an
LED may produce light for a long period the amount of light
produced will deteriorate over time. Therefore, and especially
in critical applications such as emergency lighting, care should
be taken to ensure that there is still sufficient light output at
end of life. This depreciation of light output is mainly due to
discoloration of the epoxy housing of the LED over time. Lumen
depreciation and LED life varies between manufacturers, and
even between colours of LEDs so manufacturers data should be
consulted.
So how is an LED luminaire used? A major advantage of LEDs
is their small size and long life. This makes them ideal for effects
lighting where hidden lights are used to create an atmosphere
in a space. Additionally, LEDs are already used extensively in
signage and signaling, and in the entertainment industry. The
Fig. 8.14 E
xamples of LED package
use of LEDs in emergency lighting is becoming more common,
configurations
Fig . 8.14 Exam
ples of LED packa ge
and LED luminaires are good for providing guidance and
configura tions
emphasis due to their small size and availability in many colours
of light. Impressive applications of LEDs may be seen, including
domestic residences, retail and social environments, and in the
exterior lighting of buildings. Additionally as the light produced
by an LED is cold it has major benefits in applications such
as museums where heat produced by the lighting of an artifact
may cause significant damage to that artifact. However, a
limitation of LEDs for this type of lighting is their monochromatic
nature, except for phosphor white LEDs.
At the moment the technology is not suitably advanced to
allow extensive use in the general lighting environment or more
specialized applications such as streetlighting or floodlighting,
but with future developments this may come.
Fig. 8.15 A
n example of an LED system
integrated with building architecture
Fig . 8.15 An exampl e of an LED

syst em in tegra ted w ith buil ding
arch itectu re
| 203

8.10 Lamp coding systems LBS/ILCOS
ILCOS lamp code
To support the worldwide identification of compatible lamp
types the IEC has produced a generic lamp coding system
standard, called the International Lamp Coding System or
ILCOS, published in 1993 as IEC TS 61231. The system is
directly linked to the IEC standard for specific lamps. The lamp
standard has data sheets that are identified by the ILCOS code.
ILCOS offers a short code ILCOS L that can be expanded, in
code, to cover several features of the lamp. The standard code
ILCOS D gives the complete designation of the lamp. All lamp
manufacturers made a direct link between their private brand
code and the ILCOS system. The responsibility for maintaining
the ILCOS system is with the IEC lamp technical committee.
LBS lamp code system
In 1994 the Zentralverband Elektrotechnik und
Elecktronikindustrie, better known as ZVEI, the Industry
Federation in Germany, produced a lamp coding system called
Lampenbezeichnungssystem or LBS for short. The codes are
widely used by luminaire makers and clients in Europe. The
system is of simple codes and has short descriptions and is
maintained by ZVEI, but it is not supported by all lamp-makers
or by international standards.
A selection of ILCOS and equivalent LBS codes with their
meanings are given in Table 8.3.
Fig.Fig
8.16
LEDLED
lighting
providing
a distinctive
. 8.16
lighting
provi
ding a
atmosphere
to here
a space
dis tinctive
atmosp
to a space
Fig. 8.17 A
n LED ground recessed luminaire

LBS (ZVEI)
ILCOS
Description
IA
General purpose incandescent lamp
IRR
Reflector lamps
QT
HSG
Halogen incandescent lamps
QT-DE
HDG
Halogen incandescent lamps, linear double-ended
QPAR
HA
Halogen incandescent lamps for mains voltage with reflector
QR
HAG / HMG
Low voltage halogen incandescent lamps with reflector
QR-CBC
HRG
Low voltage halogen incandescent lamp with dichroic reflector and glass cover
T16
FDH
Fluorescent lamps 16mm
T26
FD
Fluorescent lamps 26mm
T16-R
FSC
Circular fluorescent lamps 16mm
TC-S
FSD
Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube)
TC-SEL
FSDH
Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) for electronic ballast up to 80W
TC-L
FSD
Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) up to 36W
TC-D
FSQ
Compact fluorescent lamps (2 tubes)
TC-DEL
FSQH
Compact fluorescent lamps (2 tubes) for electronic ballast
TC-T
FSM
Compact fluorescent lamps (3 tubes) up to 36W
TC-TEL
FSMH
Compact fluorescent lamps (3 tubes) for electronic ballast up to 120W
TC-DD
FSS
Compact fluorescent lamps (double D)
LMG-lHf
FSS
Induction lamps (Philips QL type)
HIT-DE
MD
Double ended tubular metal halide lamp
HIT-DE-CE
MT
Double ended tubular metal halide lamp with ceramic burner
HIT
MT
Single ended tubular metal halide lamp
HIE
ME
Single ended elliptical metal halide lamp
HIE-CE
ME
Single ended elliptical metal halide lamp with ceramic burner
HME
QE
High pressure mercury discharge lamp
HSE
SE
Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp
HSE-I
SE/I
Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp with internal ignitor
HST
ST
Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp
HSE-MF
SE
ingle ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp, increased light output
S
(MF = more luminous flux)
HST-MF
ST
ingle ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp, increased light output
S
(MF = more luminous flux)
HSE-CRI
SEM
ingle ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp improved colour rendering
S
(Philips SON Comfort Pro type)
HST-CRI
STH
ingle ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp improved colour rendering
S
(Philips SON-T Comfort Pro type)
HST
STH
ingle ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp with high colour rendering
S
(e.g. Philips SDW-T, Iwasaki NHT-SDX)
HST-DE
SD
Double ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp
LST
LS
Single ended tubular low pressure sodium lamp
Table 8.3 Selection of LBS and ILCOS lamp coding systems
| 205
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
Lamp
cap
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Luminous
efficacy
Lamp
wattage
W
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
T26
600mm
1050mm T26
1200mm T26
1500mm T26
1800mm T26
T5 (T16)
FDH
FDH
1150mm T16
FDH
FDH
T16
1450mm T16
1150mm T16
T5 (T16)
T5 (T16)
FDH
FDH
T16
T16
850mm
T8 (T26)
T8 (T26)
T8 (T26)
T8 (T26)
T8 (T26)
T5 (T16)
T5 (T16)
T5 (T16)
T5 (T16)
FDH
T5 (T16)
FDH
T16
T5 (T16)
T5 (T16)
550mm
FDH
1450mm T16
FDH
T16
1150mm T16
850mm
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G5
G5
G5
G5
G5
G5
G5
G5
G5
G5
Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5
HO
Lumilux FQ,TL5 HO
HO
Lumilux FQ,TL5 HO
HO
HO
HO
Polylux XLR 840,Lumilux
L840,Super 80/840
Polylux 830,Super
80/830
L840,Super 80/840
L840,Super 80/840
Polylux XRL 840,Lumilux
L840,Super 80/840
88.6
89.7
93.1
86.8
75.0
76.9
82.4
73.1
87.8
66.7
79.5
72.9
Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 94.3
70
58
36
38
18
80
54
39
49
24
39
24
35
28
21
Fluorescent lamps
Linear fluorescent, standard - halophosphate (other colour temperatures available)
150mm T16
FD
T5 (T16)
G5
White,White(23),White TL 37.5
4
300mm T16
FD
T5 (T16)
G5
White,White(23),White TL 50
8
530mm T16
FD
T5 (T16)
G5
White,White(23),White TL 65.4
13
450mm T26
FD
T8 (T26)
G13
Warm White,Warm
63.3
15
White(30),Warm White
TLD
1500mm T38
FD
T12 (T38)
G13
White
76.9/62.5 65/80
Linear fluorescent, Tri-phosphor (other colour temperatures available, especially 6500K)
550mm T16
FDH
T5 (T16)
G5
14
Type
4000
4000
4000
3000
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B/1A
1B
1B/1A
1B
1B
1B/1A
1B
1B
1B
1B
15000
15000
15000
12000
15000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
9000
3450
2700
4000
2700
4000
2700
4000
2700
4000
2700
4000
6000
2700
4000
6000
2700
4000
2700
4000
2700
4000
4000
5000
5000
5000
9000
Rated
life
hours
3
3
3
3
3500
3500
3500
2950
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
6200
5200
3350
3300
1350
6150
4450
2850
4300
1600
3100
1750
3300
2600
1900
1200
5000
150
400
850
950
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Peak
intensity
cd
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
Lamp
cap
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
2400mm T38
FD
T12 (T38)
G13
Polylux 840
Linear fluorescent, Multi-phosphor (other colour temperatures available)
600mm T26
FD
T8 (T26)
G13
Polylux Dlx 940,Lumilux de
Luxe 940,90 deluxe/940
1200mm T26
FD
T8 (T26)
G13
1500mm T26
FD
T8 (T26)
G13
Circular fluorescent lamps
T16-R
FSCH T5-C
2GX13 FC,TL5C
(T16-R)
T16-R
FSCH T5-C
2GX13 FC,TL5C
(T16-R)
T16-R
FSCH T5-C
2GX13 FC,TL5C
(T16-R)
Compact fluorescent lamps (other colour temperatures available)
TC-EL
FBT
E27
Dulux EL Integral gear
TC-S
FSD
2L 2-pin
G23
Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p
TC-S
FSD
2L 2-pin
G23
TC-S
FSD
2L 2-pin
G23
TC-S
FSD
2L 2-pin
G23
TC-SEL
FSD
2L 4-pin
2G7
Biax S/E,Dulux S/E,PLS/4p
TC-SEL
FSD
2L 4-pin
2G7
Biax S/E,Dulux S/E,PLS/4p
TC-L
FSD
2L 4-pin
2G11
Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L
TC-L
FSD
2L 4-pin
2G11
Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L
TC-L
FSD
2L 4-pin
2G11
Biax L
TC-L
FSD
2L 4-pin
2G11
Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L
TC-L
FSDH 2L 4-pin
2G11
Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L
TC-L
FSDH 2L 4-pin
2G11
Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L
TC-L
FSDH 2L 4-pin
2G11
Biax HLBX,Dulux L,PL-L
TC-DD
FSS
2D 2-pin
GR8
Biax 2D,CFL Square
TC-DD
FSS
2D 2-pin
GR8
Biax 2D,CFL Square
TC-DDEL
FSS
2D 4-pin
GR10
Biax 2D/E,CFL Square
TC-DDEL
FSS
2D 4-pin
GR10
Biax 2D/E
TC-DDEL
FSS
2D 4-pin
GR10
TC-DDEL
FSS
2D 4-pin
GR10
TC-DDEL
FSS
2D 4-pin
GR10
Biax 2D/E
Type
2700
3500
3500
3500
3500
4000
4000
36
58
22
40
55
7
5
7
9
11
9
11
18
24
34
36
40
55
80
16
28
16
21
28
38
55
65.3
64.7
81.8
82.5
81.8
57.1
50.0
57.1
66.7
81.8
66.7
81.8
69.4
75.0
82.4
80.6
87.5
88.2
75.0
65.6
73.2
65.6
64.3
73.2
75.0
70.9
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3000
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
2700 4000
2700 4000
3000 4000
4000
4000
4000
18
55.6
4000
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1A
1A
1A
1B
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
100
Lamp
wattage
W
94.0
Luminous
efficacy
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
12000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
16000
16000
16000
12000
12000
12000
12000
Rated
life
hours
1250
1800
2800
2900
3500
4850
6000
1050
2050
1050
1350
2050
2850
3900
900
400
250
400
600
900
600
4500
3300
1800
3750
2350
1000
9400
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Peak
intensity
cd
| 207
6L 4-pin
6L 2-pin
FSQ
FSQ
FSQ
FSQ
FSQ
FSQ
FSQ
FSQ
FSS
FSM
FSM
FSM
FSM
FSM
TC-D
TC-DEL
TC-D
TC-DEL
TC-D
TC-DEL
TC-D
TC-DEL
TC-F
TC-T
TC-TEL
TC-T
TC-TEL
amalgam
TC-T
G24d-3
G24q-3
G24d-2
G24q-2
G24d-1
G24q-1
G24d-1
G24q-1
Lamp
cap
GX24q-4
GX24q-6 Dulux T/E IN Plus
Powerball HCIR111,CDM-R 111
GX24q-3
GX24q-5 Dulux T/E IN Plus
PL-H
PL-H
Dulux HO Constant,PL-H
GX24q-3
2G8-1
2G8-1
2G8-1
GX8.5
4-pin
4-pin
4-pin
4-pin
4-pin
4-pin
4-pin
GX24d-3
GX24q-2
GX24d-2
Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p

Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PLC/4p
Dulux F
Biax T,Dulux T Plus
Biax T/E amalgam,Dulux
T/E Plus
Biax T,Dulux T Plus,PL-T/2p
amalgam
Biax T/E,Dulux T/E IN
Plus,PL-T/4p
Biax T,Dulux T,PL-T/2p
amalgam
Plus,PL-T/4p
Plus,PL-T/4p
Dulux T/E IN Plus,PL-T/4p
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
4-pin
6L 2-pin
Flat 4L4-pin 2G10

6L 2-pin
GX24d-1
6L 4-pin
GX24q-1
4L 2-pin
4L 4-pin
4L 2-pin
4L 4-pin
4L 2-pin
4L 4-pin
4L 2-pin
4L 4-pin
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
TC-TEL
FSM
6L
amalgam
TC-TEL
FSM
6L
amalgam
TC-TEL
FSM
6L
amalgam
TC-TEL
FSM
6L
amalgam
TC-TEL
FSM
6L
amalgam
TC-TELI
FSM
8L
TC-TELI
FSM
8L
TC-TELI
FSM
8L
Metal halide discharge lamps
Reflector-ceramic
HIR 35/10
MR
-
Type
66.7
70.6
75.0
74.3
75.4
76.2
68.8
65.8
65.8
63.9
63.9
77.8
68.5
68.5
69.2
69.2
66.7
66.7
69.2
69.2
60.0
60.0
Luminous
efficacy
35
60
85
120
70
57
42
32
26
26
18
18
36
13
13
26
26
18
18
13
13
10
10
Lamp
wattage
W
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
3000
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
3500
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
6000+
20000
20000
20000
10000
10000
10000
12000
12000
10000
12000
10000
10000
10000
12000
10000
12000
10000
12000
10000
12000
10000
12000
Rated
life
hours
4000
6000
9000
5200
4300
3200
2200
1710
1710
1150
1150
2800
890
890
1800
1800
1200
1200
900
900
600
600
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
30000
Peak
intensity
cd
MR
MR
HIR 35/24
HIR 35/45
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
GX8.5
GX8.5
Lamp
cap
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Powerball HCIR111,CDM-R 111

Powerball HCI-R111
(40),CDM-R 111
HI-PAR 20/10 MR
E27
CMH-PAR,Powerball HCIPAR,CDM-R PAR20
HI-PAR 20/30 MR
E27
HI-PAR 30/10 MR
E27
HI-PAR 30/40 MR
E27
Double ended compact (choice of colour 3000 - 5400K)
HIT-DE
MD
MBI-TD
RX7s
Arcstream,Powerstar HQITS,MH(N)-TD
HIT-DE
MD
MBI-TD
RX7s
Arcstream,Powerstar HQITS,MH(N)-TD
HIT-DE
MD
MBI-TD
Fc2
Arcstream,Powerstar HQITS,MHN-TD
HIT-DE
MD
Fc2
Powerstar HQI-TS/D
HIT-DE
MD
MBI-TD
Fc2
Powerstar HQI-TS
Double ended compact - ceramic (choice of colour 3000 - 4200K)
HIT-DE-CE
MD
MBI-TD
RX7s
CMH-TD,Powerball HCITS,Mastercolour CDM-TD
HIT-DE-CE
MD
MBI-TD
RX7s
CMH-TD,Powerball HCITS,Mastercolour CDM-TD
Single ended compact (choice of colour 2600 - 4200K)
HIT
MT
MBI-T
G12
Arcstream,Powerstar HQI-T
HIT
MT
MBI-T
G12
HIT
MT
MBI-T
GY9.5
MSD
HIT
MT
PGZ 12 CosmoWhite
HIT
MT
PGZ 12 CosmoWhite
Single ended compact - ceramic
HIT-TC-CE
MT
G8.5
CMH-TC,Powerball HCI-TC
HIT-TC-CE
MT
MBI-T
G8.5
CMH-TC,Powerball HCITC,Mastercolour CDM-TC
HIT-TC-CE
MT
MBI-T
G8.5
CMH-TC,Powerball HCITC,Mastercolour CDM-TC
HIT-TC-CE
MT
PGJ5
Mastercolour CDM-TM
Type
70
150
70
150
200
60
140
20
35
70
20
96.7
74.3
80.0
67.5
114.2
117.9
85.0
97.1
88.6
75.0
250
400
80.0
90.0
100.0
250
80.0
3000
70
3000
3000
3000
3000
4200
4200
5900
2800
2800
3000
3000
5100
5400
4000
4200
4200
3000
70
150
3000
35
70
3000
35
80.0
3000
3000
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
2
2
1B
1B
1A
1A
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
35
35
Lamp
wattage
W
78.6
Luminous
efficacy
9000
9000
9000
10000
6000
6000
2000
12000
12000
15000
15000
6000
15000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000+
6000+
Rated
life
hours
1500
6200
1700
3400
5200
12000
13500
6850
16500
14500
7000
20000
36000
20000
12000
5500
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
10000
68000
5000
23000
8500
Peak
intensity
cd
| 209
MT
MT
MT
HIT-CE
HIT-CE
HIT-CE
MBI-T
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
Lamp
cap
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
PG12-2 Mastercolour CDM-TP

PGX12-2 Mastercolour CDM-TP
G12
CMH-T,Powerball HCIT,Mastercolour CDM-T
HIT-CE
MT
MBI-T
G12
HIT-CE
MT
MBI-T
G12
HIT-CE
MT
G12
Powerball HCI-T,CDMSA/T
HIT-CE
MT
G12
Mastercolour CDM-T
Elliptical coated (ceramic versions also available)
HIE
ME
MBIF
E27
Powerstar HQI-E
HIE
ME
MBIF
E27
Arcstream
HIE
ME
MBIF
E40
Arcstream
HIE
ME
E40
Powerstar HQI-E
HIE
ME
HIE
E40
WhiteLux
HIE
ME
MBIF
E40
Kolorarc
HIE
ME
E40
Powerstar HQI-E
HIE
ME
HIE
E40
Whitelux
HIE
ME
HIE
E40
Powerstar HQI-E
Elliptical coated - for enclosed fittings only
HIE
ME
HIE
E40
Whitelux
HIE
ME
HIE
E40
Whitelux
Tubular clear (other colour temperatures available)
HIT
MT
MBI-T
E27
Color Arc MT-SDW
HIT
MT
MBI-T
E40
Arcstream
HIT
MT
E40
Arcstream,Powerstar
HQI-T/D
HIT
MT
E40
HSI/TSX
HIT
MT
MBI-T
E40
HIT
MT
MBI-T
E40
HPI-T+
HIT
MT
MBI-T
E40
HPI-T+
HIT
MT
E40
Powerstar HQI-T/N
HIT
MT
E40
Powerstar HQI-T/N
HIT
MT
MBI-T
E40
HPI-T
HIT
MT
MBI-T
E40
Powerstar HQI-T
HIT
MT
E40
Powerstar T
Type
70
150
35
70
150
150
250
70
100
250
250
250
400
400
400
1000
250
400
70
250
250
250
400
250
400
400
400
1000
1000
2000
91.4
93.3
86.0
92.0
70.0
85.0
78.0
76.0
82.0
80.0
107.5
90.0
110.0
87.2
97.0
71.4
84.0
80.0
84.0
87.5
76.0
87.5
105.0
80.0
85.0
80.0
90.0
Lamp
wattage
W
85.7
86.7
97.1
Luminous
efficacy

4000
4200
4500
4300
3700
5200
4500
6000
6000
4500
4200
5300
3700
3700
3800
3200
4000
5200
3700
4000
3800
3700
3750
3000
4200
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2
2
2
2
2B
1A
2
1A
1A
1A
2
1A
2
2
1B
2
2
1A
2
2
2
2
2B
1B
1A
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
6000
9000
-
6000
6000
-
15000
20000
20000
12000
10000
14000
9000
15000
12000
9000
9000
12000
15000
10000
Rated
life
hours
21000
35000
19000
35000
42000
32000
85000
80000
180000
5000
21000
20000
21800
38800
4900
8500
19500
19000
20500
32000
43000
36000
110000
23000
12900
14000
6400
6000
13000
3400
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Peak
intensity
cd
MT
QE/R
QE/R
QE/R
QE/R
QE/R
QE/R
QE/R
QE/R
HME
HME
HME
HME
HME
HME
HME
HME
MBFSD
MBFSD
MBFSD
MBF
MBF
MBF
MBF
MBF
MHN-LA
MHN-LA
Sportlight
Sportlight
MHN-LA
MHN-LA
Powerstar HQI-TS/D/S
Powerstar HQI-TS
MHN-SB
Sylvania HSI-TD
CMH-TT,Powerball HCITT,CDO-TT
CMH-TT,Powerball HCITT,CDO-TT
Powerstar T/N
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
G38
CSI/PAR 64
(colour temperatures vary)
E27
Kolorlux
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
E27
Kolorlux
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
E27
Kolorlux
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
E40
Kolorlux
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
E40
Kolorlux
Standard,HQL,HPL-N
E40
Kolorlux Standard,HQIE,HPL-N
E27
Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE
LUXE,HPL Comfort
E27
LUXE,HPL Comfort
E27
LUXE,HPL Comfort
Cable
Cable
RX7s
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
E40
E27
Double ended - high wattage

HIT-DE
MD
HIT-DE
MD
HIT-DE
MN
MBIL
HIT-DE
MN
MBIL
HIT-DE
MD
MBIL
HIT-DE
MD
MBIL
HIT-DE
MD
MBIL
HIT-DE
MD
MBIL
HIT-DE
MD
MBIL
HIT-DE
MD
MBIL
Compact metal halide lamps
HIR 6
MR
CSI
High pressure mercury discharge lamps
HME
QE/R MBF
HIT-CE
E40
Lamp
cap
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
HIT
MT
Tubular clear - ceramic
HIT-CE
MT
Type
52.0
50.0
40.0
57.0
56.3
52.0
50.4
125
80
50
1000
400
250
125
80
50
36.0
47.5
1000
1000
1000
1500
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
150
70
2000
Lamp
wattage
W
76.0
90.0
100.0
80.0
100.0
95.0
110.0
100.0
112.5
100.0
100.0
93.3
91.4
120.0
Luminous
efficacy
3350
3400
3500
3550
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
5600
4200
5200
5200
5600
4200
5800
4400
5600
5600
3000
3000
4000
1A
1B
2
2
1A
1B
1A
2B
1B
1A
1B
1B
2B
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
20000
16000
16000
29000
20000
20000
20000
16000
12000
3500
6000
6000
4000
8000
3000
120
12000
Rated
life
hours
6500
4000
2000
57000
22500
13000
6300
3800
1800
76000
90000
100000
120000
200000
190000
220000
200000
225000
200000
200000
14000
6400
240000
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Peak
intensity
cd
| 211
QE/R
QE/R
HME
HME
MBFSD
MBFSD
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
SE
SE
SE
SC
ST
ST
SE
ST
SE
SE
ST
SE
ST
SE
ST
ST
ST
HSE-I
HSE
HSE-I Diffuse
HSE-I Clear
HST
HST
HSE
HST
HSE
HSE
HST
HSE
HST
HSE
HST
HST
HST
HPS-T
HPS-T
HPS-T
HPS-E
HPS-T
HPS-E
HPS-T
HPS-E
HPS-T
HPS-E
HPS-E
HPS-E-I
Diffuse
HPS-E-I
Clear
HPS-T
HPS-T
HPS-E
HPS-E-I
High pressure sodium discharge lamps

Standard Tubular and Elliptical
HSE
SE
HPS-E
Type
E40
E40
E40
E40
E40
E40
E40
E40
E40
E27
E40
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E40
E40
Lamp
cap
Lucalox T
Lucalox T,Vialox NAVT,70SON-T
Lucalox E
Lucalox T
Lucalox E-Z,Vialox NAV-E
Lucalox E,Vialox NAVE,150SON
Lucalox E,Vialox NAVE,50SON-E

Lucalox I,NAV-E
50/1,50SON-I
Lucalox E,Vialox NAVE,70SON-E
Lucalox I,NAV-E
70/1,70SON-I
Lucalox I,70SON-I
LUXE,HPL Comfort
LUXE,HPL Comfort
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
130.0
150.0
125.0
118.8
110.0
104.0
100.0
92.0
96.0
80.0
96.7
68.0
85.7
85.7
82.9
82.9
68.0
66.0
60.0
56.0
Luminous
efficacy
1000
600
400
400
250
250
150
100
100
110
150
50
70
70
70
70
50
50
400
250
Lamp
wattage
W
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
3400
3350
4
4
4
4
4
4
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
24000
24000
28500
28500
28500
28500
28500
28500
28500
16000
28500
28500
28500
12000
12000
28500
12000
28500
24000
24000
Rated
life
hours
130000
90000
50000
47500
27500
26000
15000
9200
9600
8800
14500
3400
6000
6000
5800
5800
3400
3300
24000
14000
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Peak
intensity
cd
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
HST-MF
HST-MF
HST-MF
HST-MF
HST-MF
HPS-T(HO)
HPS-T(HO)
HPS-T(HO)
HPS-T(HO)
HPS-T(HO)
HPS-T(HO)
E40
E40
E40
E40
E40
E27
E27
Lamp
cap
Lucalox HO,Vialox
Super,SON-T PLUS
Lucalox HO,Vialox
Super,SON-T PLUS
Lucalox HO,Vialox
Super,SON-T PLUS
Lucalox HO,Vialox
Super,SON-T PLUS
Lucalox HO,Vialox
Super,SON-T PLUS
Lucalox HO,Vialox
Super,SON-T PLUS
Lucalox HO,Vialox
Super,SON-T PLUS
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Improved colour rendering - Tubular and Elliptical

HSE-CRI
SE
HPS-E(DL)
E40
Lucalox Classique,Vialox
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HST-CRI
ST
HPS-T(DL)
E40
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HSE-CRI
SE
HPS-E(DL)
E40
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HST-CRI
ST
HPS-T(DL)
E40
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HSE-CRI
SE
HPS-E(DL)
E40
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
HST-CRI
ST
HPS-T(DL)
E40
NAV Deluxe, SON
Comfort
White SON and Mini White SON
HST-CRI
STH
HPSPG12-I
SDW-T
T(White)
HST-CRI
STH
HPSPG12-I
SDW-T
T(White)
ST
HST-MF
Increased light output - Tubular

HST-MF
ST
HPS-T(HO)
Type
35
50
400
90.0
46.0
250
92.0
37.1
250
88.0
400
150
86.7
92.5
150
600
400
250
150
100
70
50
Lamp
wattage
W
80.0
150.0
141.3
132.0
116.7
100.0
92.9
80.0
Luminous
efficacy
2500
2500
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
1B
1B
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
10000
10000
14000
14000
14000
14000
14000
14000
28500
28500
28500
28500
28500
28500
28500
Rated
life
hours
2300
1300
37000
36000
23000
22000
13000
12000
90000
56500
33000
17500
10000
6500
4000
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
Peak
intensity
cd
| 213
STH
STH
STH
STH
HST-CRI
HST-CRI
HST-CRI
HST-CRI
HPSDE(HO)
HPSDE(HO)
HST-DE
SD
HPS-DE
HST-DE
SD
HPS-DE
Low pressure sodium discharge lamps
LST
LS
SOX
LST
LS
SOX
LST
LS
SOX
LST
LS
SOX
LST-HY
LSE
SOX-E
LST-HY
LSE
SOX-E
LST-HY
LSE
SOX-E
Halogen lamps
Halogen reflector - dichroic mirror (12V
QRHRG
M265
CBC35/10
QRHRG
M266
CBC35/21
QRHRG
M270
CBC51/18
QR-CBC51/8 HRG
M249
SD
STH
HST-CRI
SD
STH
HST-CRI
HST-DE
STH
HST-CRI
HPST(White)
HPST(White)
HPST(White)
HPST(White)
HPST(White)
HPST(White)
HPST(White)
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
Double ended
HST-DE
Type
SOX
SOX
SOX
SOX
SOX-E
SOX-E
SOX-E
BY22d
BY22d
BY22d
BY22d
BY22d
BY22d
BY22d
GU5.3
GU5.3
GU4
Bright MR16,Decostar 5l
(24),Standardline (24)
Bright MR16,Decostar 5l
(10),Standardline (10)
Precise MR11,Decostar
35S,Standardline
Precise MR11
Vialox NAV-TS
Vialox NAV-TS
Fc2
Fc2
supply)
GU4
Vialox NAV-Super
Vialox NAV-Super
NHT-SDX
NHT-SDX
NHT-SDX
NHT-SDX
SDW-TG
SDW-TG
SDW-T
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
RX7s-24
RX7s
E40
E40
E27
E27
GX12
GX12
PG12-I
Lamp
cap
131.4
139.1
141.7
163.0
156.2
177.8
163.6
102.0
120.0
96.0
91.4
54.0
52.0
50.0
50.0
48.0
46.0
50.0
Luminous
efficacy
50
35
35
35
35
55
90
135
26
36
66
250
400
150
70
250
150
100
70
100
50
100
Lamp
wattage
W
3100
3100
2900
2900
1800
1800
1800
1800
1800
1800
1800
2100
2100
1900
1900
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2550
1A
1A
1A
1A
4
4
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
4000
4000
3500
3500
16000
16000
16000
16000
16000
16000
16000
26000
26000
30000
30000
9000
9000
6000
6000
10000
10000
10000
Rated
life
hours
4600
7650
12750
22000
4060
6400
10800
25500
48000
14400
6400
13500
7800
5000
3500
4800
2300
5000
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
8000
2950
2070
6300
Peak
intensity
cd
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
Lamp
cap
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Luminous
efficacy
QRHRG
M250
GU5.3
Bright MR16,Decostar
CBC51/18
51 (24),
QRHRG
M258
GU5.3
Bright MR16,Decostar 51
CBC51/36
(38),Standardline
QRHRG
M280
GU5.3
Bright MR16,Decostar
CBC51/60
5l,Standardline
QRHRG
M271
GU5.3
Decostar 51,Standardline
CBC51/10
QRHRG
M281
GU5.3
Bright MR16,Decostar 51
CBC51/36
(38),Standardline
Halogen reflector - aluminised (12V supply)
QR-51/38
HAG
M58A
GU5.3
Decostar ALU
QR-C51/24 HAG
Black
GU5.3
QR-C51/24 HAG
Silver
GU5.3
Halogen metal reflector - aluminium (12V supply)
QR70/8
HMG BA15d
Halospot 70
QR70/24
HMG BA15d
Halospot 70
QR111/4
HMG G53
Halospot 111
QR111/24
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot 111
QR111/8
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/24
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/8
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/24
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/45
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/8
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot 111
QR111/24
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot
111,ALUline PRO-111
QR111/45
HMG G53
AR111,Halospot
111,ALUline PRO-111
Halogen capsule (12V supply). Low pressure for use with open luminaires
QT-LP 12-ax
HSG
G4
Halostar,Capsuleline Pro
15.0
frosted
QT-LP 12-ax
HSG
G4
Q20T2, Halostar,
16.0
Capsuleline Pro
Type
3000
3000
3100
3100
3000
2950
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
50
50
35
35
50
50
50
50
50
35
35
50
50
75
75
75
100
100
100
20
20
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
50
Lamp
wattage
W
2000
2000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3500
3500
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Rated
life
hours
320
300
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
2800
48000
8500
1700
5300
30000
3500
12500
2600
45000
2500
20000
1600
3000
3000
1300
7200
950
2100
4750
Peak
intensity
cd
| 215
HSG
HSG
HSG
QT-LP12-ax
frosted
QT-LP12-ax
frosted
QT-LP12-ax
QT-LP12-ax
frosted
QT-LP12-ax
HSG
QT-LP 12-ax
HSG
HSG
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
GY6.35
GY6.35
GY6.35
GY6.35
GY6.35
GY6.35
Lamp
cap
Q20T3, Halostar,
Capsuleline Pro
Capsuleline Pro
Halostar,Capsuleline Pro
Capsuleline Pro
Q20T3, Halostar,
Capsuleline Pro
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Q50T3,Halostar,
Capsuleline Pro
QT-LP12-ax
HSG
GY6.35 Q75T3,Halostar,
Capsuleline Pro
QT-LP12-ax
HSG
GY6.35 Halostar
QT-LP12-ax
HSG
GY6.35 Capsuleline Pro
Halogen capsule (12V supply) for use with closed luminaires
QT 12-ax
HSG
M75
GY6.35 M75
QT 12-tr
HSG
M32
GY6.35 M32,Halostar
QT 12-ax
HSG
M74
GY6.35 M74
QT 12-ax
HSG
M73
GY6.35 M73
QT 12-tr
HSG
M28
GY6.35 M28
QT 12-ax
HSG
M180
GY6.35 M180
Halogen capsule (24V supply) for use with closed luminaires)
QT 16-ax
HSG
GY6.35 Halostar
Halogen aluminised reflector (PAR)
QPAR16/25 HARI
GU10
Hi-Spot 80
QPAR16/25 HARI
GU10
MR16, Hi-Spot
50,TWISTline Alu
QPAR16/50 HARI
GU10
MR16,Hi-Spot
50,TWISTline Alu
QPAR20/10 HAPAR E27
50PAR20,Halopar 20,HiSpot 63,Halogen A
QPAR20/25 HAPAR E27
50PAR20,Halopar 20
(30),Halogen A
QPAR20/25 HAPAR GU10
Hi-Spot ES63
QPAR20/50 HAPAR GU10
Hi-Spot ES63
QPAR25/10 HAPAR E27
Hi-Spot 80
QPAR25/25 HAPAR E27
Hi-Spot 80
Type
3000
2900
2800
2800
2900
2900
2700
2700
2900
2900
90
100
35
50
50
75
100
100
150
35
50
50
50
50
75
75
50
50
20.0
22.0
17.1
17.0
18.0
18.0
22.0
21.5
21.3
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
75
18.0
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
50
50
35
35
20
20
Lamp
wattage
W
19.0
19.5
17.1
18.0
17.0
15.0
Luminous
efficacy
2500
2500
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
4000
3000
4000
4000
2000
4000
4000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Rated
life
hours
3200
600
850
900
1350
2200
2150
1800
2200
1350
950
975
600
630
340
300
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
2500
1000
4000
1100
1000
3000
600
800
1250
Peak
intensity
cd
ILCOS Previous
HAPAR HAPAR -
HAPAR -
HAPAR -
QPAR25/10
QPAR25/25
QPAR30/10
QPAR30/30
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
QT-18
QT
QT
HSGT
HSGT
HSGT
M38
M40
QPAR30S/10 HAPAR QPAR30S/30 HAPAR QPAR30/10 HAPAR QPAR30/30 HAPAR QPAR30S/10 HAPAR QPAR30S/30 HAPAR Halogen dichroic reflector (PAR)
QPARHR
CB16/25
QPARHR
CB16/50
QPARHRG1 CB20/25
QPARHRG1 CB20/50
Double ended halogen
QT-DE 12
HDG
K9
QT-DE 12
HDG
K1
QT-DE 12
HDG
K4
QT-DE 12
HDG
K5
Single ended halogen
QT-14
HS
QT-14
HS
QT-32
HSGT QT-32
HSGT -
Type
K9,Haloline,Plusline
Halopin,MV Capsules
Halopin,MV Capsules
Halolux Ceram
Halolux Ceram
R7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
G9
G9
E27
E27
B15d
GY9.5
GY9.5
Halolux Ceram
M38
M40
Hi-Spot ESD63
GZ10
GZ10
GZ10
Hi-Spot 80
75PAR25, Hi-Spot
80,Halogen A
75PAR30,Halopar 30,HiSpot 95
75PAR30,Halopar 30,HiSpot 95
Halogen A
Halogen A
100PAR30, Hi-Spot 95
100PAR30, Hi-Spot 95
Halogen A
Halogen A
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
Hi-Spot ESD50,TWISTline
Dich
Hi-Spot ESD50,TWISTline
Dich
Hi-Spot ESD63
GZ10
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
E27
Lamp
cap
16.7
17.3
20.0
10.2
12.3
13.7/15
5.5/16.8
16.0
19.0
22.0
22.0
Luminous
efficacy
150
300
500
25
40
60/100
150/250
300
500
1000
1500
75
75
50
50
75
75
100
100
100
100
75
75
75
75
Lamp
wattage
W
2900
2950
2950
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
3000
3000
3000
2850
2850
2700
2700
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
2000
2000
2000
1500
1500
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2500
2500
2500
2500
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2000
3000
Rated
life
hours
2500
5200
10000
255
490
820/1500
2500\
4200
4800
9500
22000
33000
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
1000
2500
500
1250
6500
2000
10000
3500
9000
3000
2200
6900
5500
1300
Peak
intensity
cd
| 217
ILCOS Previous
Designations
LBS (ZVEI)
Lamp
cap
FSG1
QL
63.6
70.6
85
55
QL
QL
60/100
Lamp
wattage
W
120
120
300
11.7/15
Luminous
efficacy
PAR38,Concentra Par38
PAR38,Concentra Par38
PAR56
GLS
Lamp manufacturer
brand names
1A
1A
1A
1A
3
1B
Choices
3
1B
Choices
2700
2700
2700
2700
Colour Colour
temp. rendering
K
group
60000
60000
2000
2000
-
1000
Rated
life
hours
Peak
intensity
cd
6000
3500
7000
3000
16000
700/1500 -
Initial
lamp
lumens
lm
NOTE. Values given in this table are generic and are indicative of performance for a given type of lamp. For definitive values you should refer
to lamp manufacturers data.
LMG-lhf
Incandescent lamps
A
IA
GLS
E27
Spot (mains supply, except where stated)
PAR
IPAR
PAR38/15 E27
PAR
IPAR
PAR38/30 E27
PAR
IPAR
12V/
GX16
PAR56/40 terminal
Induction lamps (185-255V supply)
LMG-Ihf
FSG1 QL
-
Type
Table 8.4 Characteristic values of the major

lamps

8.12 Energy efficiency considerations
Most of the electrical power consumed by a luminaire is due to
the lamp and its control gear. However this power consumption
may be modified slightly by the operating conditions inside
the luminaire (i.e. thermal conditions altering the operation of
the lamp/ballast system). Additionally minor luminaire losses
may occur due to parasitic losses from electronic control or
emergency lighting capabilities of the luminaire.
The energy efficiency index (EEI) classifies fluorescent lamp
ballasts into seven categories as shown in Table 8.6 and is
used by the industry in ballast labelling.
Class
Ballasts
A1
Dimmable electronic ballasts
A2
Reduced-loss electronic ballasts
A3
Electronic ballasts
B1
Magnetic ballasts, very low loss (low loss ballast)
B2
Magnetic ballasts, low loss (low loss ballast)
agnetic ballasts, moderate loss (conventional ballast)

M
Prohibited from sale since 21st November 2005
agnetic ballasts, very high loss (conventional ballast)

M
Prohibited from sale since 21st May 2002
Table 8.5 Fluorescent lamp ballast classifications
8.13 Circuits
The circuits shown in this section are generic, in that they are
not specific to any manufacturer or make of control gear but
serve to illustrate the principles. They are split into fluorescent
and sodium/metal halide lamp circuits as these have distinct
wiring and control techniques.
| 219

Definitions
Ballast
The general term for control gear inserted between the mains
supply and one or more discharge lamps or fluorescent lamps,
which by means of inductance, capacitance or resistance,
singly or in combination, serves mainly to limit the current to the
lamp(s) to the required value. A ballast may also incorporate
means of:
Transforming the supply voltage,
Providing a starting voltage,
Providing a pre-heating current,
Improving cold starting,
Reducing stroboscopic effects,
Correcting power factor,
Suppressing radio interference.
Ignitor
A starting device, intended to generate voltage pulses to start
discharge lamps, which does not provide for the pre-heating
of electrodes. A basic ignitor will do this until the lamp strikes,
which means that if there is a problem with the lamp or circuit
that prevents the lamp starting the ignitor will continue to try
to start the lamp until the circuit is turned off or potentially
the ballast is damaged. Modern ignitors therefore normally
incorporate anti-cycling control that can sense the normal endoflife mode of a lamp and disables the ignitor. This normally
happens after the ignitor has tried to start the lamp a few times,
and for metal halide lamps this is generally after approximately
15 minutes. (For high pressure sodium lamps this will be after
approximately five minutes)

Starter switch
A device which initiates a surge of high voltage across the
lamp.
Sodium/metal halide lamp circuits
Ph
Ballast
Power factor
capacitor
Ignitor
E
A series ignitor circuit. Here the lamp is wired across the ignitor
and the neutral. This type of circuit is common when using highpressure sodium and metal halide lamps.
Ph
Fig. 8.18 Series ignitor circuit
Ballast
Power factor
capacitor
Ignitor
E
A parallel ignitor circuit. Here the lamp is wired across the
ballast and the neutral in parallel with the ignitor. This type of
circuit is common when using low-pressure sodium lamps.
Fig. 8.19 Parallel ignitor circuit
| 221

Fluorescent lamp circuits
Ballast
Ph
Power factor
capacitor
Lamp
Starter
A circuit typical of magnetic ballast, incorporating a power

factor correction capacitor and a starter. The circuit is essentially
a series circuit, from the input phase through the ballast, through
one end of the lamp, through the starter, through the second
end of the lamp and out to neutral.
Fig. 8.20 Typical magnetic ballast circuit
Ph
Ballast
Lamp
A circuit typical of electronic control gear. Here no power

factor capacitor or starter is required as this is dealt with by the
electronics. Wiring is according to the connector designations
on the ballast with the lamp being wired across the ballast.
Additional control lines may be used for ballasts incorporating
dimming functionality.
Fig. 8.21 Electronic circuit

Figure 8.22 shows a typical emergency lighting circuit for a
maintained luminaire. Two additional components are required,
an inverter and a battery pack, and the inverter controls the
circuit. Under normal conditions with a mains supply present the
inverter supplies the ballast with a phase supply from the mains,
and the lamp is driven from the ballast, via the inverter. When
the mains supply fails the lamp is driven from the inverter, which
receives power from the battery pack.
Battery
Ph
N
Lamp
Invertor
Ph
Ballast
Fig. 8.22 Emergency lighting circuit
For circuits with more than one lamp only the lamp used in
emergency mode is connected to the inverter, additional
lamps being connected directly to the ballast. As the ballast
receives no power supply during mains failure these lamps
are extinguished and again the emergency lamp is lit using a
supply from the batteries via the inverter.
8.14 Properties of electronic ballasts

With the implementation of European Directive 2000/55/
EC on energy efficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent
lighting and the Energy using Products Directive 2005/32/
EC type C and D magnetic ballasts are banned for sale within
the European Union. The benefits of using electronic technology
over magnetic ballasts are:

Energy savings 1. Energy costs are cut by using electronic

control gear, and further savings may be made using
presence detection and dimming technology to ensure
that light is not wasted by lighting empty spaces or over
lighting an area.
| 223

Energy saving 2. Using less energy reduces the heating

effects in a space due to the installed lighting. This reduces
the load on air-conditioning and ventilation equipment.
Fewer components. Using electronic control gear removes
the need for starter switches and power factor correction
capacitors.
Reduced maintenance costs. Using control gear with
cathode pre-heating ensures that the length of life of lamps
in a luminaire is maximised, reducing the frequency of
re-lamping and therefore maintenance costs.
Flicker free light. Electronic control gear operates at high
frequencies, producing flicker free light. Flicker from
lights has been shown to be a cause of headaches and
discomfort.
Low noise operation. Electronic control gear ensures quiet
operation with quiet starting and no background hum as
may be produced by magnetic gear.
Fault detection. In the event of a fault occurring in a
circuit, such as a lamp failing, electronic ballasts may
automatically shut off a faulty lamp, or switch off in the
event of a more general fault. This prevents flickering
lamps staying active or fault conditions causing a
potentially dangerous situation.
For control of electronic control gear for dimming etc. three

main methods of control are used
Analogue
This uses a 1-10V analogue signal as a control input to the
ballast. The main restriction on this method is interference
caused by cable length or mains interference.
DSI
This uses an 8-bit digital signal as a control input to the ballast.
The use of a digital signal helps ensure interference free reliable
communications, and also helps prevent wiring faults as the
digital control wires are polarity reversible, unlike an analogue
input signal. Grouping of luminaires depends upon the hardwiring of the control lines.
As DSI allows bidirectional communication it is possible to
interrogate luminaires about their current operating state, fault
conditions, etc., and to use a computer based graphical
interface to control installations.

DALI
DALI uses a digital communications protocol but is almost a
programming language for lighting control gear, allowing
complete flexibility of control of lighting units. Grouping of
luminaires is via software as every luminaire is individually
addressable. As DALI allows bidirectional communication it is
possible to interrogate luminaires about their current operating
state, fault conditions, etc., and to use a computer based
graphical interface to control installations.
8.15 Voltage drop

When designing cabling for installation of luminaires it should
be remembered that there will be a voltage drop along the
length of the cable. This is due to the electrical resistance of the
cable and means that the voltage measured at the end of the
cable will be less than that measured at the start of the cable.
The voltage drop for a given current carried is related to the
cable materials and manufacturing process and is therefore
individual to each cable type and manufacturer. Values are
normally quoted in terms of voltage drop per ampere per metre.
Note that the wiring regulations give limits on permissible
voltage drop.
In the absence of manufacturers data the following formula for
calculating voltage drop may be used.
2(Ix0.0175xL)
U =

A
where U is the voltage drop across the length of the cable
in volts
I is the current being carried by the cable in amps
L is the length of the cable in metres
A is the cross-sectional area of a single conductor
in mm2
Note this formula is for a twin copper conductor (phase and
neutral) at 15C.
This can have a major effect upon the lighting installation as
a relatively small voltage drop can reduce the light output of
the luminaire or for larger voltage drops can even prevent
the luminaire from operating. An effect of this, especially for
| 225

installations using high-pressure discharge lamps (e.g. for
floodlighting), is that luminaires closer to the supply transformer
may produce more light than those furthest from the transformer.
To help reduce the voltage drops in an installation the following
steps may be considered;

The voltage drop of a cable is related to the cable gauge

or cross-sectional surface area. A cable with a larger
cross-sectional area will have less voltage drop than a
smaller cable.
The voltage drop of a cable is related to the length of the
cable. Longer cable runs will produce a larger voltage
drop. Therefore smaller cable runs should be used.
Increasing the number of transformers will allow the
transformer sizes to be reduced and also allow the length
of the cable runs to be reduced.
The use of lower wattage lamps or fewer luminaires on
each cable run will reduce the loading on the cabling and
therefore the voltage drop (as voltage drop is related to
circuit current).
8.16 Fusing
Fuses are the simplest form of circuit protection. Whilst they
have generally been replaced by electromechanical methods
of protection a benefit of fuses is that they can withstand much
higher fault levels than other electromechanical methods of
protection.
However, circuit breakers are most commonly used for
protecting circuits on high voltage and low voltage circuits.
For low voltage, low current applications typical of lighting
installations miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) may be used to
protect the final circuit. Three different categories of MCB are
defined, giving different levels of performance depending upon
application. These are;
Type B
Type C
Type D
used with resistive loads such as tungsten lighting

used where a mixture of light inductive and resistive
loads are present
used where strong inductive loads such as motors or
switched mode power supplies are present

For lighting circuits generally type B MCBs are commonly used
although type C variants may be present depending upon the
application area.
When a lighting circuit is switched on high transient current
peaks occur due to parasitic capacitances that can accumulate
with the number of luminaires. These high switch-on currents can
cause problems with automatic conductor cutouts. Therefore
only surge-current-proof automatic cutouts should be used for
lighting systems. This is of especial concern with lighting circuits
using luminaires with electronic control gear. Electronic control
gear starts all lamps in a circuit simultaneously, thereby causing
a higher switch-on current peak than when using a choke/
starter circuit, as in a choke/starter circuit lamps do not ignite
simultaneously.
It should also be noted that the type of fuse used could influence
the number of ballasts that may be used on one device. When
using a multi-pole fuse the number of ballasts that may be
connected is typically reduced by 20% compared to a single
pole fuse.
You should always check manufacturers literature as to how
many ballasts may be connected through one device, and
remember that a luminaire may contain multiple ballasts not
necessarily of the same type.
8.17 Wiring regulations

It is of great importance that the electrical connections to any
lighting equipment are correctly specified. Standards for this
exist, international standards such as IEC 60364 - Low-voltage
electrical installations, and local standards such as BS 7671.
Previously three categories of electrical circuit were defined and
lighting circuits generally fell within category 1. Now however
two voltage bands have replaced these categories and
generally lighting installations will fall within the requirements of
voltage band II. This contains the requirements for supplies to
households and most commercial and industrial installations. It
should be noted that IEC 60364 and associated local versions
do not apply to public street lighting installations and these are
considered part of the public power gird.
| 227

When specifying electrical connections it is essential that the
cabling used within the installation is correctly rated. Voltage
rating for cables is expressed as two numbers, for example
600/1000V. The first number is the maximum allowable
voltage between any conductor and earth; the second
number is the maximum voltage allowable between any
two conductors. Extra care must be taken in situations where
industrial installations use high voltages as the phase to earth
voltage may exceed the rating of some cable types.
Two main factors determine the specification of cabling size
or cross-section; the maximum continuous current rating and
the voltage drop within the circuit. The insulation material
used in the cable determines the maximum continuous current
rating. Electrical currents cause a heating effect in the cable
conductor, and the maximum temperature rating of the insulation
determines the limit on allowable current and therefore heat.
When installing cable in areas with restricted airflow it is
important to check with the cable manufacturers the effect this
will have on the cable rating, as preventing adequate heat
removal from the cable may cause the insulation to fail within
the nominal cable rating.
Whilst both the maximum current rating and voltage drop
should be considered for all circuits generally only one of these
factors will be the determining factor for cable selection. For
long final circuits from a transformer or sub-main generally this
is the voltage drop and this is especially true for large outdoor
installations.
An additional factor to consider is the degree of protection
against mechanical shock required. In certain environments
(such as industrial areas) the risk of mechanical damage to
a cable is increased. Protection for the cable can be either
through a suitable containment system such as heavy-duty
trunking or conduit, or through the use of armoured cables.
Glands for cable entry into electrical equipment should be of
a mechanical specification suitable for the cable type. Glands
for flexible cabling are normally made of nylon or plastic, whilst
glands for armoured cabling are normally brass. Glands should
be also specified by IP rating (ingress protection), suitable for
the equipment they will be used with.

When installing cables care should be taken to ensure that the
minimum-bending radius quoted by the manufacturer for the
cable is not exceeded, otherwise damage to the insulation and
also the sheathing in multicore cables may occur. If a bend
occurs close to the cable entry point into electrical equipment
the cable should be firmly secured by the entry point to ensure
that it is straight when passing through the cable entry gland,
and that no strain is being put on the gland due to the cable
bend.
For electrical connections to emergency services such as
emergency luminaires powered from central battery systems
or luminaires with external battery packs, the wiring from the
batteries to the luminaire should be with fire survival cables in
separate or segregated circuits to minimise the risk of the loss
of emergency lighting. Fire survival cables are defined by their
resistance to fire; to fire with water and to fire with mechanical
shock.
8.18 Fault detection

The following lists give common reasons for the failure of a
lighting installation to perform to the expected level, or the
failure of a luminaire to operate correctly. Note that whilst some
checks do not require any specific qualifications most of these
tests should only be performed by a qualified and competent
person such as a commissioning engineer or where electricity is
involved an appropriately qualified electrician. Lighting circuits
can generate extremely high and potentially fatal voltages
and access to a lighting installation may be difficult or require
specialist equipment and training.
When measuring lamp voltages it is essential that they are
measured using a true RMS meter, as due to waveform
distortion other meters may give false readings. Be aware that
high intensity discharge circuits incorporating an ignitor may
generate 25kV pulses at the lamp holder and that components
within the ignitor can operate up to 18kV. For these circuits it
is important to isolate the supply before changing the ignitor
and to discharge capacitors by touching all exposed metal
parts and terminals to earth using an insulated probe before
commencing any examination of the circuit and components.
| 229

When faced with an inoperative luminaire it is usual first to replace the lamp with a new one. If the lamp has
shattered or a fuse has blown it is advisable to inspect the ballast and wiring for incorrect installation or signs
of overheating or damage before inserting a second lamp.
Certain types of lamp must be operated with the front glass of the luminaire in position, as a possible
catastrophic failure mode may cause the lamp to explode. Always check the lamp type and manufacturers
recommendations before operating the lamp without the luminaire fully assembled.
Lighting installation does not perform to the expected level
General
Have the correct luminaires and attachments been installed compared to the specification?
Yes / No
Are the luminaires installed at the correct mounting height?
Yes / No
Are the luminaires installed at the correct mounting position?
Yes / No
Are the luminaires correctly orientated (rotation, tilt)? For floodlights have they been installed upside-down?
Yes / No
Have the lamps been run for >100 hours to ensure lamp stability?
Yes / No
Is the quality of the electrical supply suitable (voltage, current, voltage surges or dips, harmonics)?
Yes / No
For high-pressure discharge lamps have they been on for > 20 minutes before measurement?
Yes / No
For fluorescent lamps have they been on for > 4 hours before measurement?
Yes / No
Is the light meter calibrated and does it have adequate accuracy of measurement?
Yes / No
Are the measurements being made at the correct height and orientation?
Yes / No
Are the measurement points correctly positioned?
Yes / No
Interior
Is the space empty or furnished and was the scheme calculation for the same condition?
Yes / No
Are the surface reflection factors the same as used in the scheme calculation?
Yes / No
Is the ambient temperature different to that expected and is this affecting the running temperature of the lamps?
Yes / No
Has the protective film been removed from luminaire component such as louvres and diffusers
Yes / No
Outdoor
Has the electrical supply cable been correctly sized?
Yes / No
Is the voltage and current supplied to the lamp correct?
Yes / No

High intensity discharge luminaire fails to operate correctly
Symptom
Possible cause
Lamp does not light but Faulty lamp

is visibly intact
Faulty lamp holder
Poor light output
Test and remedy

Test lamp in a working luminaire and replace if necessary
Check that the lamp is properly seated in the lamp holder(s). For high
voltage lamps with non-screw thread connection check lamp holders
are in sound condition. Lamp holders with pitting or corrosion must
be replaced
Supply interruption
Check for voltage at circuit input terminals. Check any fuses and
ensure cabling is correctly sized
Open circuit in wiring or ballast
Check for voltage at lamp holder
Circuit misconnection
Check that the circuit is wired in accordance with manufacturers

installation instructions
Ignitor fault
For circuits incorporating an ignitor substitute a new ignitor
End of lamp life
Lamp could have developed a high striking characteristic towards the

end of life. Check that the lamp has not completed a full life
Insufficient re-strike time
Some high intensity discharge lamps require a cooling period before

they will re-ignite
End of lamp life
Test lamp in a working luminaire and relate to lamp usage
Outer of lamp or luminaire dirty
Clean and try again
Low supply voltage
Test voltage applied to luminaire/circuit. Check that the ballast is

correctly rated and tapped. For parallel ballast circuits check both
ballasts are operating correctly
Outer of lamp broken

or cracked
Explosion
Look for obvious signs of misuse/overload on the lamp. Check that

the circuit is wired correctly and suitably tapped. Check that voltage
is correct. Check ballast for signs of overheating and damage to
windings. If in doubt replace ballast and test for impedance before
reusing the luminaire
Outer of lamp broken

or cracked
Thermal shock
Check for any internal moisture due to luminaire seals failing
Mechanical damage/transit
damage
Lamps that have incurred damage during transit may operate for
a period of time before failing due to a weakened construction.
Damage and deterioration of inner lamp components should be
visible after a short period of running if the outer envelope is faulty
End of lamp life
Test lamp in a working luminaire and relate to lamp usage
Low supply voltage
Check voltage applied to the luminaire
Circuit misconnection
Check that the circuit is wired correctly and suitably tapped. Check
that there is no fault on the ballast. Check that the power factor
capacitor is connected correctly
Lamp holder contact
Check that the lamp is properly seated in the lamp holder(s). Check
for any signs of arcing. For high voltage lamps with non-screw thread
connection check lamp holders are in sound condition. Lamp holders
with pitting or corrosion must be replaced
Supply voltage dip
Lamp extinction could be associated with sudden dips in supply

voltage, possibly caused by switching of heavy loads
Lamp orientation
Some lamps are sensitive to burning position. Check lamp is

orientated according to manufacturers recommendations
Temperature
Check ballast operating temperature. Ballast may incorporate a

thermal cut-out
Light output unstable

/fluctuating
Light output unstable

/fluctuating
Lamp extinguishing
| 231

Fluorescent tube luminaire fails to operate correctly
Symptom
Possible cause
Test and remedy
Tube does not attempt

to strike no end glow
from tube
Fuse blown
Check for voltage at circuit input terminals
Faulty starter (non-electronic

control gear)
Insert starter switch in working luminaire
Faulty tube
Insert tube into working luminaire. NOTE if one or more of the

cathodes are broken check for faulty wiring (short circuit to earth or
wrong control gear) before inserting a new tube
Open circuit
Test for open circuit on control gear or short to earth between control
gear and tube
Crossed leads in twin lamp

luminaires
Check that the correct lamp holders are connected to each tube
Short circuit on lamp holder
Test for short circuit across lamp holder lead or for short circuit to
earth on wiring
Short circuit on tube
Test for internal short circuits on cathode of tube
Tube fails to strike

bright glow from one
end of the tube
Tube does not attempt

to strike bright glow
from both ends of
the tube
Short circuit on starter switch or Test starter switch in working luminaire. If satisfactory test starter
associated wiring (non-electronic switch socket and associated wiring
control gear)
Tube flashes on and

off fails to maintain
discharge
Faulty tube (end of life)
Test tube in working luminaire. At end of life other symptoms are

reduced light output, increased flicker and reddish glow from
cathodes
Low voltage
Test voltage at terminal block of luminaire. If low check external

wiring for excessive voltage drop
Faulty starter (non-electronic

control gear)
Test starter switch on working luminaire
Low temperature
Screen open type luminaires
Crossed leads in twin lamp

luminaires
Check that the correct lamp holders are connected to each tube
Ballast overheats
Lack of ventilation
Check installation of luminaire to manufacturers recommendations
Supply volts high
Check supply voltage
Fault in ballast
Replace ballast
It should be noted that some types of electronic control gear will

detect fault conditions and prevent any attempt to start the lamp.
If the lamp fails to start the lamp, ballast or wiring could be
faulty and should be checked.
9.0 Standards and directives

9.1 Directives
Directives are European laws that apply to all EU member
states. Directives that follow Article 175 permit member states
some local variation, but directives that follow Article 95 apply
equally and unaltered to all member states.
CE Marking
The CE mark signifies that a product conforms to the
requirements of relevant EEC directives. The prime purpose of
the mark is to assist customs and market inspectors in facilitating
the free trading and movement of products within the EEC.
Some of the directives appropriate to general lighting products
are the Low Voltage Directive (LVD), the Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive and the Energy Efficiency
(Ballasts for Fluorescent Lighting) Directive. CE marking is
compulsory to indicate LVD, EMC and Ballast Efficiency
conformity.
Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
Low Voltage directive for selling safe products. This demands
that products are designed, manufactured and tested to give
proof of electrical safety. Conformity to EN 60598 guarantees
compliance.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC)
The ElectroMagnetic Compatibility directive requires that
the product are designed and operate so that they meet
limits of electrical and magnetic interference by emission
and conduction with other electrical devices. Also requires
that adequate capacity is built in for immunity (rejection) to
interference imposed by other electrical devices upon the
lighting product. Conformity can be verified by the appropriate
IEC standard.
WEEE Directive
Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic
equipment (WEEE) is an Article 175 directive and defines
requirements and responsibilities for the management of waste
lighting equipment within the European Union. This places
responsibility for managing waste on the producer, reseller (in
cases of re-branded product) or importer of the product. To fulfil
these obligations many lighting companies have registered
with third party recycling companies who then take on the
Standards and directives
| 233

responsibility of handling the electrical waste. If a company
has not done this then they are themselves responsible for the
recovery and handling of their waste products. Irrespective of
the method of waste management, lighting products should
be marked with the symbol shown to indicate that it may not
be disposed of as unsorted waste. Therefore when purchasing
lighting products it is important to ascertain how these products
will be managed at their end of life, and when removing lighting
units it must be ensured that they are handled separately and
the appropriate company is contacted to remove the product.
RoHS Directive
Directive 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment
is and article 95 directive, and products purchased within the
European Union must conform to these restrictions. However
certain exemptions exist including mercury in lamps, lead in
the glass of fluorescent tubes and nickel cadmium in batteries
for emergency lighting products. However these exempted
items are still required to be correctly disposed of. Therefore
when purchasing exempted items it is important to ascertain
how these items will be managed at their end of life, and
when removing exempted items it must be ensured that they are
handled separately and the appropriate company is contacted
to remove the product. (Note that when removing complete
light fittings it is generally not necessary to separate out lamps,
batteries, etc. This will be performed within the overall waste
management process).
Other Directives
Other important European energy efficiency directives are;
EELP
Energy Efficiency Labelling of Product directive

This requires that manufacturers add an energy class
label to relevant products (fluorescent lamp and
ballast)
EPB Energy Performance of Buildings directive

This requires that an estimate of the energy
requirements of a building and its services is made.
This is displayed using a label with energy details.
This applies both for existing buildings and new
buildings which must pass design criteria during the
planning permission process for approval to build.
234 | Standards and directives

EuP
Ecodesign of Energy-using Products directive

The aim of this directive is to reduce the consumption
of natural resources and energy, and to minimise
environmental impacts of products across the whole
of their life cycle. Manufacturers must practice
ecodesign, give instruction on correct and efficient
product use and limit power consumption including
that by stand-by devices
9.2 Standards
A variety of documents exist to ensure a product conforms to
relevant directives and safety requirements. Some of the relevant
standards are listed in Table 9.1.
Subject
European Standard
Luminaires General requirements and tests
EN 60598-1
International
Standard
Luminaires General types
EN 60598 2-1
IEC 60598-2-1
Luminaires Recessed
EN 60598 2-2
IEC 60598-2-2
Luminaires Street lighting
EN 60598 2-3
IEC 60598-2-3
Luminaires Floodlights
EN 60598 2-5
IEC 60598-2-5
Luminaires with transformers
EN 60598-2-6
IEC 60598-2-6
Luminaires Air handling
EN 60598 2-19
IEC 60598-2-19
Luminaires Emergency
EN 60598 2-22
IEC 60598-2-22
Luminaires Track systems
EN 60570
IEC 60570
Photometric Measurements
CIE 24/CIE 27
Photometry and data transfer
EN 10302-1: 2004
Photometry for workplace luminaires
EN 10302-2: 2004
Photometry for emergency luminaires
EN 13032-3: 2007
EMC Emissions-Lighting
EN 55015
CISPR 15
EMC Immunity-Lighting
EN 61547
IEC 61547
ISO 9000
Quality Systems
EN ISO 9000
Emergency Lighting
EN 1838
Electronic transformers for lamps
EN 61347-2-2
IEC 61347-2-2
EN 61047
IEC 61047
Safety isolating transformers
EN 60742
IEC 742
Lighting Columns
EN 40
Safety
Electronic transformers for lamps
Performance
| 235

Application
Lighting of workplaces indoor workplaces
EN 12464-1: 2003
Lighting of workplaces outdoor workplaces
EN 12464-2: 2007
Light and lighting Sports lighting
EN 12193:1999
Emergency lighting
EN 1838
Emergency lighting testing and inspection
EN 50172: 2004
Road lighting practice
EN 13201-1/4: 2004
Energy performance of buildings, lighting
EN 15193: 2007
Radiation exposure limits
EN 14255
CIE S 015/E:2005
CIE S 020/E:2007
Maintenance of indoor electric lighting
CIE 97.2
Lighting education
CIE 99
Discomfort glare in interior lighting UGR
CIE 117
Obtrusive light
CIE 150
Maintenance of outdoor electric lighting
CIE 154
Table 9.1 Selection of relevant standards
ENEC Marking
For luminaires and lighting components, European
harmonisation of national approval marks has been achieved
through introduction of the ENEC mark. The ENEC mark may
be awarded by any one of the recognised European approval
authorities, such as BSI, VDE or SEMKO, in the same way as a
national approval mark. ENEC is important however, because
it indicates that the product is suitable for use throughout Europe
and that all of the most onerous special national conditions of
test standards have been complied with.
EN40
When designing an exterior lighting installation it must be
ensured that the lighting columns are not only strong enough to
support the weight of the equipment attached to them but are
also strong enough to withstand the more significant loading
effect from wind pressure against the project area of the
complete structure. In Europe document EN40 is used to check
suitability, allowing the structure to be verified against statistical
data for a geographical area and thereby ensuring that the
column can withstand the wind conditions. The calculation
process takes into account variables such as the height of the
site above local ground level, the height above sea level,
the distance from the coastline and the degree of shelter
provided by local obstructions and features as all of these
12

cause variations in the wind pressure at the location. It must
be emphasised that the calculation process is for the complete
system, including the column and all equipment attached to
it (luminaires, brackets, etc.) so a column cannot be certified
in isolation. It should also be noted that a CE mark cannot be
applied to a column in isolation, but applies to the complete
system.
9.3 Quality and safety marks

It is important that a product is suitable for the method of
installation, environmental conditions and usage it will
encounter. Some safety consideration and markings are given
below.
Quality Standard Marks (Kite Marks)
A third party approval is an independent endorsement that
product design is in accordance with published standards, and
that controls to maintain quality in manufacture are applied.
Many products carry European Test House approvals such
as those shown. This can assist wider market acceptance in
Europe.
Electrical safety classification
Class I
Luminaires in this class are electrically insulated and provided
with a connection to earth. Earthing protects exposed metal
parts that could become live in the event of basic insulation
failure.
Class II
Luminaires in this class are designed and constructed so
that protection against electric shock does not rely on basic
insulation only. This can be achieved by means of reinforced or
double insulation. No provision for earthing is provided.
Class III
Here protection against electric shock relies on supply at Safety
Extra - Low Voltage (SELV) and in which voltages higher than
those of SELV are not generated (max. 50V ac rms).
| 237

F mark
F mark (mounting surface)
Luminaires suitable for mounting on normally combustible
surfaces (ignition temperature at least 200C) are marked with
the F symbol.
F mark (Thermal Insulation Covering)
Recessed luminaires suitable for covering in the ceiling void with
thermal insulating material (without causing overheating to the
luminaire) are marked with this variation of the F mark symbol.
Ingress Protection
The ingress protection (IP) code denotes the protection against
dust, solid objects and moisture provided by the luminaire
enclosure. If no code is marked the luminaire is deemed to be
IP20.
First digit of code denotes protection
against dust and solid objects
Second digit of code denotes

protection against moisture
IP2X
No entry of standard test finger to live parts
IPX0
No special protection
IP3X
No entry of 2.5mm probe to live parts
IPX1
Protection against drops of condensed water
IP4X
No entry of 1mm probe to live parts
IPX2
Drip-proof (vertical falling drops of liquid)
IP5X
Dust proof. (no dust deposit around live parts)
IPX3
Rain-proof (rain up to angles of 60)
IP6X
Dust tight (no dust entry)
IPX4
Splash proof (spray from any angle)
IPX5
Water jet
IPX6
Heavy downpours
IPX7
Temporary immersion
IPX8
Submersion to declared depth

Table 9.2 IP Code
ATEX classification
The IP rating is not sufficient as a safety criterion in areas with
particularly hazardous or explosive atmospheres. Equipment
for use in these environments is classified according to the
expected conditions using the ATEX group category, as shown
in Table 9.3.

ATEX
category
Equivalent
zonal
classification
Level of
protection
provided
Environmental conditions for use
Zone 0 (gas)
Zone 20 (dust)
Very high
n explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is continuously

A
present or present for long periods (> 1000 hours/year)
Zone 1 (gas)
Zone 21 (dust
High
n explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is likely to be

A
present (between 10 and 1000 hours/year)
Zone2 (gas)
Zone 22 (dust)
Normal
n explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is unlikely to

A
occur or could occur for a short period (< 10 hours/year)
Table 9.3 ATEX classifications
Ta classification
Denotes the maximum ambient temperature in which the
luminaire is suitable for use. No ta mark indicates suitable for
use in maximum 25C ambient.
750/850/950 hot wire
Abbreviation for compliance with glow wire test for plastic parts
tested at the stated temperature.
Impact Resistance
The use of Joules (Newton metres - Nm) has been common
for many years. More recently an IK rating normally used for
electrical enclosures and cabinets (EN50102:1995) has
emerged as manufacturers apply it to their luminaires, as
they also enclose electrical circuits. Table 9.4 compares both
ratings:
IK rating
IK01
IK02
IK03
IK04
Joules of
energy
0.15j
0.23j
0.35j
0.5j
IK05 IK06
0.7j
1.0j
IK07
IK08
IK09
IK10
2.0j
5.0j
10.0j
20. 0j
Table 9.4 C
omparison of impact resistance
ratings
| 239

9.4 Product/corrosion compatibility guide
When designing an installation in an area that is potentially
harmful due to concentrations of chemicals in the atmosphere
care must be taken to ensure that the materials used in the
construction of the luminaire are suitable for the environment it
is being used in. Different materials have differing tolerances to
chemical agents and all materials used in the luminaire need to
be considered.
Table 9.5 gives information on six luminaires suitable for use
in chemically hazardous areas. This information is provided to
give guidance about luminaire selection assuming prolonged
exposure to potentially aggressive chemicals or atmospheres.
Occasional exposure to low concentrations of potential
aggressors is unlikely to be harmful to any of these luminaires.
The risk of damage to the luminaires is dependent on the
concentration of the aggressor, the duration and frequency of
exposure and environmental conditions. If there is any doubt
about the suitability of a luminaire for a particular application
please enquire with details of the chemicals that will be present
and the conditions of use.

Chemical
Type
Acids
Salts
Organics
(Aliphatics)
(aromatics)
Foodstuffs,
cooking
products
drinks,
beverages
Gases
Chemicals Specific
acetic <30%
nitric <10%
sulphuric <20%
hydrochloric <10%
chromic <20%
phosphoric <40%
marine salts
copper sulphate
sodium chloride
ethanol <30%
propanol<30%
methane
propane
formaldehyde/
formalin
formic acid<5%
stearic acid soap
urea
ethylene glycol
(antifreeze)
glucose sugar
glycerol/glycerine
milk
fruit juices
vegetable oils (cold)
vegetable oils (hot)
meats, beef, lamb,
pork, game, poultry
fish
pork fat
cooking fats (cold)
cooking fats (hot)
alcoholic beverages
beer
carbonated
beverages, lemonade
wines & spirits
water <60C
vinegar
ozone
sulphur dioxide
industrial pollutant
ImpactForce CorrosionForce ColdForce HeatForce StormForce StormForce

GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
PC diffuser
PMMA diffuser
PC diffuser
PC diffuser
PC diffuser
PMMA diffuser
Stainless
toggle
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Stainless
toggle
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Stainless
toggle
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Stainless
toggle
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
| 241

Chemical
Type
Chemicals Specific
Building
materials,
paints
emulsion paints water

based
oil based paint
white spirit/turps
substitute
cement
Oils, fats
mineral oils
fuels
animal fats (cold) but
not pork
silicone oil
diesel
kerosene/paraffin oil
petroleum spirit/
petroleum ether
Disinfectants, hydrogen peroxide
cleaning
<40%
agents
sodium hypochlorite
<10%
soaps
wetting agents/
biocides (dilute)
ImpactForce CorrosionForce ColdForce HeatForce StormForce StormForce

GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
GRP body
PC diffuser
PMMA diffuser
PC diffuser
PC diffuser
PC diffuser
PMMA diffuser
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Stainless
toggle
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Table 9.5 Product/corrosion compatibility guide for Thorn X-Force range

A selection of the most common chemicals that are used in applications the X-Force would come into contact with.
The tabled information is valid under the following conditions:
The chemical substance listed in the table is an element and not part of a chemical compound
The ambient temperature is 22C
10 Tools
10.1 Tools
Thorn Product Explorer
The Thorn Product Explorer is available on DVD. It features an
electronic catalogue with an intuitive user interface including
powerful search functions, and can be used as a data plug-in
for the programs DIALux and Relux Professional to allow lighting
calculations to be performed using Thorn data within these
popular design tools. Copies of the Product Explorer may be
obtained from your local Thorn representative or downloaded
from your local Thorn web-site as shown on the back of the
handbook.
Thorn CalcExpress
Thorn CalcExpress is a one-click interior design facility
that allows quick design of lighting installations for simple
rectangular spaces. It is integrated within the Thorn Product
Explorer and an on-line version is being produced for use over
the Internet.
Thorn Electronic Catalogue

The Thorn Electronic Catalogue allows you to browse the
complete Thorn product portfolio on-line over the internet. For
each product information may be downloaded, from installation
sheets to photometric data. Additional links with Dialux and
Relux allow drag and drop functionality into these popular
design tools.
Thorn CRF Indicator

This simple to use do-it-yourself tool can indicate how effectively
the lighting scheme in an office or lecture room minimises
unwanted shiny reflections that reduces the contrast of printed or
written visual tasks. The higher the contrast the better you see.
Rather like using a barometer to judge the weather this measure
looks at the lighting from a human dimension that will benefit
the owner and occupier alike.
Tools
| 243
Tools
ThornQE
ThornQE is a software tool for Quick and Easy design of
interior, area and road lighting schemes using Thorn products
for standard design criteria. Reports may be customised with
specific company details. This software enables product
selection, lighting design and reporting of results to be
performed from one simple process.
Thorn Primata Configurator
Pre-wired trunking systems save time and money. They are
increasingly popular in todays cost-sensitive market because
they are quick and easy to assemble, and simple to install
without special tools Primata II is a pre-wired continuous row
system with a comprehensive selection of fluorescent luminaires
and various optics.
The Primata II configurator allows definition of Primata II
products required in an installation. It produces a bill of
materials for Primata II installations and automatically includes
ancillary equipment such as couplers, end-caps, grommets, etc.
DIALux
DIALux is an independent and manufacturer-neutral third
party software available free of charge. It is available in 26
languages (at present). As well as allowing calculation of
lighting design parameters it also allows import and export to
and from CAD programmes in .dxf and .dwg format, photo
realistic visualization and creation of photo realistic films to help
present a design
http://www.dial.de/
Relux
The Relux Professional calculation and light design program is
an independent and manufacturer-neutral third party software
available free of charge. It is available in many languages. As
well as allowing calculation of lighting design parameters it
also allows the import of 2D and 3D objects in dxf, vrml, 3ds
and wmf format and has several add-on tools to extend the
functionality of the program.
http://www.relux.biz/
244 | Tools
Tools
Lighting Reality
Lighting Reality is an independent and manufacturer neutral
exterior calculation and lighting design program. It contains
data from many manufacturers including Thorn Lighting and
allows designs to be produced conforming to BS, EN and
IESNA criteria.
AGI32
AGI32 is a comprehensive lighting calculation and rendering
software for both interior and exterior schemes, with or without
daylight. AGI32 incorporates an integrated model builder
capable of constructing almost any architectural environment
and 3D CAD geometry may be imported via the DXF and
DWG file formats. AGI32 uses the IESNA photometric file
format and files in this format may be extracted from the Thorn
Product Explorer or on-line using the Thorn electronic catalogue.
Tools
| 245
11 Glossary
Ballast
Ballasts are electrical devices used with fluorescent or high
intensity discharge (HID) lamps to supply sufficient voltage to
start and operate the lamp but then to limit the current during
operation. They can be either magnetic or electronic.
Batten and trunking systems
These are generally fitted with fluorescent lamps and are
primarily used in commercial and industrial environments.
Designed either as surface-mounted or pendant units, they are
generally simple to install and can be used singly or as strip
lighting. Suitable housings ensure that the light is directed as
required and that glare is kept to a minimum.
Carbon dioxide (CO2)
An important greenhouse gas. Countries that ratified the Kyoto
agreement have committed to reduce their emissions. Lighting
designers have the power to hold down CO2 emissions into the
atmosphere, the amount of CO2 being dependant upon the fuel
used for the production of electricity.
Colour Appearance
The colour emitted by a near-white light source can be
indicated by its correlated colour temperature (CCT). Each lamp
type has a specific correlated colour temperature measured
in degrees Kelvin e.g. 3000K and are described as warm,
intermediate, cool and cold.
Colour Rendering
The ability of a light source to reveal the colours of an object. It
is determined by the spectral power distribution or spectrum of
the light source. Measured by the colour rendering index (Ra).
The higher the number the better, up to a maximum of 100.
Control gear
Most artificial light sources other than incandescent lamps
require special control gear to start the lamp and control the
current after starting. Depending on the type of lamp involved,
the control gear can take the form of ballasts, ignitors or
transformers.
246 | Glossary
Glossary
Diffusers and moisture-proof fittings
Luminaires of a higher protection class. These are closed
luminaires for humid, wet, chemically aggressive or dusty
environments where the requirements for glare control are
generally rudimentary.
Digital Serial Interface (DSI)
A lighting control protocol created by the Zumtobel Group,
for applications where the addressing feature of DALI is not
required.
Downlight
Ceiling luminaire that concentrates the light in a downward
direction. Downlights are generally round or square and
recessed into the ceiling, but may also be surface-mounted.
They may feature an open reflector and/or a shielding device.
Columns
Poles for mounting roadlighting lanterns or floodlights. Also
known as masts and towers.
Contrast
Subjective experience of comparative brightness between points
or areas of luminance, seen simultaneously or successively.
Contrast Rendering Factor (CRF)
A measure of the degradation of contrast that is caused by
veiling reflections (bright reflections in the task).
Digital Addressable Lighting Interface (DALI)
A lighting control protocol set out in the technical standard IEC
929
Efficacy
Measured in lumens per Watt (lm/W) and a useful parameter
for assessing how much light is available from the lamp for
each Watt of power. Luminaire efficacy is often expressed by
dividing the initial lamp lumens by the combined lamp and
control gear power.
Emergency lighting
Lighting provided for use when the mains supply for the general
lighting fails for whatever reason.
Glossary
| 247
Glossary
Glare
Glare is the result of excessive contrasts of luminance in the
field of view. The effect may vary from mild discomfort to an
actual impairment of the ability to see. When the ability to
see is impaired this is called disability glare. Discomfort glare
is associated more with interiors; it refers to the discomfort or
distraction caused by bright windows or luminaires.
High bay
As the term implies, these are for use when mounting heights of
around 8-10m or above are encountered.
High frequency electronic control gear (HF)
Most artificial light sources other than incandescent lamps
require special control gear to start the lamp and control the
current after starting. HF electronic gear operates fluorescent
tube(s) at high frequency (typically at 30-60 kHz) instead of the
mains frequency of 50 Hz offering benefits of higher quality
lighting, reduced running costs and ease of use, combined with
safe reliable operation. Dimmable versions available. They may
also be used with high intensity discharge lamps.
Ignitor
Ignitors are required for lamps that cannot be started using the
normal line voltage alone. This is the case with high-pressure
discharge lamps such as metal halide lamps and high-pressure
sodium vapour lamps.
Illuminance (lx)
The amount of light falling on an area divided by that area measured in lx. Generally, 500 lx is needed for office work,
whereas a watchmaker requires 4,000 lx. In summer, the
sun shines on the ground with 120,000 lx, and a full moon
produces 3 lx.
Indirect Lighting
System of illumination where the light from lamps and luminaires
is first reflected from a ceiling, wall or secondary optic.
Ingress protection (IP)
Denotes the protection against entry of dust/solid objects and
moisture/water, provided by the luminaire enclosure.
248 | Glossary
Glossary
Lamp
Lamps are artificial sources of light. There are many types,
distinguished by the way they generate light, their light output or
luminous flx, their power consumption, their luminous efficiency,
their geometry, the spectral composition of the radiation
emitted, their luminance and their beam characteristics.
LED/light-emitting diode
An LED or light-emitting diode is a small semiconductor device
which emits light, usually coloured, when an electric current
passes through it. LEDs are energy saving and have a long
service life. LED light engines can generate any colour by
mixing the individual spectral
Lighting control system
Lighting control systems are used to actively change the lighting
situation. Such changes can take place automatically or as a
result of intervention by a user. Lighting control systems often
include operating equipment. Lighting can automatically
respond to the level of daylight, it can be controlled by
presence sensors to switch on or off depending whether people
are in the room or can also progress through a sequence of
changing scenarios.
Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI)
Defined in the European standard for assessing the Energy
Performance of Buildings (EPBD), EN 15193 as the measure
for the annual lighting energy requirement for the building per
square metre. The quick method of calculation being:
LENI = W/A
W is the total annual energy used for
lighting {kWh/year}
A is the total useful floor area of the building {m}
Lighting management
Lighting management covers the entire concept of a controlled
or regulated lighting system including emergency lighting and its
use. As well as permitting efficient, user-focused operation of the
lighting system, it also allows it to be monitored, thus facilitating
maintenance.
Glossary
| 249
Glossary
Light Output Ratio (LOR)
The ratio of the total light output of the luminaire to the output of
the lamp(s), under stated conditions.
Low bay
Luminaires housing high intensity discharge lamps mounted
horizontally at low heights 4-8m, typically in industrial, sporting
and public concourses.
Lumen (lm)
The unit of luminous flx or the rate of flow of light from a source
or received by a surface. When a ray of light hits a solid
surface, the process is known as illumination.
Luminaire
Modern term for light fitting or fixture. A complete lighting
unit that controls the distribution of light given by a lamp(s).
Includes components for fixing and protecting the lamp(s) and
for connecting them to the supply circuit. Luminaires for road
lighting are often known as lanterns.
Luminaire-lumens per circuit watt
Is the luminaire efficiency factor given by LOR x (total bare lamp
flx in the luminaire/circuit Watts).
Luminance (cd/m2)
The measured brightness of a surface. The unit is cd/m.
Luminous intensity (candelas)
The amount of light that a small light source at the tip of a cone
emits through a narrow cone in a given direction.
Lux (lx)
The unit of illuminance, equal to one lumen per square metre.
Modelling
The use of light to bring out the form of three-dimensional
objects, structures or spaces.
Optic
The reflector and/or refractor system that directs the light
emission from the lamp in the luminaire into required directions.
250 | Glossary
Glossary
Editor
Peter Thorns BSc(Hons) CEng MCIBSE MSLL
Contributors
Patricia El-Baamrani; Lou Bedocs; Karl Flax; Stefan Hauer;
Pat Holley; Hugh King; Jan-Erik Jerleke; Iain Macrae;
Robin Ostlin; Paul Stranks
This is the fifth edition of the Technical Handbook
Copyright Thorn Lighting. All rights reserved. No part of
this publication may be reproduced in any form, without
prior permission in writing from Thorn Lighting, except for the
quotation of brief passages in reviews. While Thorn has made
every effort to credit the copyright owners for the illustrations
and photographs used herein, there may be omissions, for
which the company apologises.
Picture credits:
Danny Maddocks; Chris Gascoigne; Mike Gee;
Richard Seymour and Alan Turner
Graphics: Juice Creative
Price 15 GBP/20 EUR. Not for resale.
Spill Light
Stray light from a luminaire that incidentally illuminates nearby
objects or surfaces within the public environment. Can be a
cause of light trespass.
Spine
See batten
Track
A linear bus bar system providing one to three main circuits or
a low voltage supply to which display lighting (spotlights) can
be connected and disconnected at will along the length of the
system.
Transformer
Transformers reduce the line voltage (for instance 230V) to
the lower voltage required for operating low-voltage halogen
lamps. This will generally be 12V.
Trunking
Trunking usually provides mechanical fixings for the luminaires
as well as electrical connection.
Uniformity
The ratio of the minimum illuminance to the average illuminance
over the specified area.
Visual performance
The ability to perceive detail and carry out the visual tasks.
Visual comfort
Our feeling of ease or well being within the visual field.
Visual satisfaction
The qualitative impression of a lit space.
Glossary
| 251
Lighting people and places
Thorn Lighting Main Offices

Australia
Thorn Lighting Pty Limited
43 Newton Road, Wetherill Park
NSW 2164
Tel:
(02) 8786 6000
Fax:
(02) 9612 2700
E-mail:
infoaustralia@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.com.au
Austria
Thorn Licht GmbH
Donau-City-Strae 11,
1220 Wien, Austria
Tel:
(43) 1 202 66 11
Fax:
(43) 1 202 66 11 12
E-mail:
office.at@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.at
China
Thorn Lighting (Guangzhou) Operations Ltd,
No.12 Lian Yun Road, Eastern Section,
GETDD, Guangzhou 510530, China
Tel:
(86) 20 3228 2706
Fax:
(86) 20 3228 1777
E-mail:
sales.cn@thornlighting.com
Thorn Lighting (Tianjin) Co. Ltd
332 Hongqi Road, Tianjin 300190,
China
Tel:
(86) 22 8369 2303
Fax:
(86) 22 8369 2302
E-mail:
info.tj@thornlighting.com
Czech Republic
Thorn Lighting CS spol. s.r.o.,
Na Bezince 6/930, 150 00 Praha 5
Czech Republic
Tel:
(420) 224 315 252
Fax:
(420) 233 326 313
E-mail:
thorn.cz@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.cz
France
Thorn Europhane SA
156 Boulevard Haussmann,
Cedex 08, Paris 75379, France
Tel:
(33) 1 49 53 6262
Fax:
(33) 1 49 53 6240
Website: www.thornlighting.fr
Hong Kong
Thorn Lighting (Hong Kong) Limited
Unit 4301, Level 43, Tower 1,
Metroplaza,223 Hing Fong Road,
Kwai Chung, N.T., Hong Kong
Tel:
(852) 2578 4303
Fax:
(852) 2887 0247
E-mail:
info.hk@thornlighting.com
Ireland
Thorn Lighting (Ireland) Limited
320 Harolds Cross Road,
Dublin 6W, Ireland
Tel:
(353) 1 4922 877
Fax:
(353) 1 4922 724
E-mail:
dublinsales@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.co.uk
Italy
Thorn Europhane Spa
Via G Di Vittorio, 2, Cadriano di Granarolo,
Bologna 40057, Italy
Tel:
(39) 051 763391
Fax:
(39) 051 763088
E-mail:
info@thornlighting.it
Website: www.thornlighting.it
New Zealand
Thorn Lighting (NZ) Ltd
399 Rosebank Road, P O Box 71134,
Rosebank, Auckland 7, New Zealand
Tel:
(64) 9 828 7155
Fax:
(64) 9 828 7591
E-mail:
info.NZ@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.co.nz
Norway
Thorn Lighting AS
Strmsveien 344, 1081 Oslo,
Norway
Tel:
(47) 22 82 07 00
Fax:
(47) 22 82 07 01
E-mail:
info.no@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.no
Poland
Thorn Lighting Polska Sp.z.o.o.,
Ul. Gazowa 26A, Wrocaw 50-513,
Poland
Tel:
(48) 71 7833 740
Fax:
(48) 71 3366 029
E-mail:
thorn.pl@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.pl
Russia
Thorn Lighting
Novoslobodskaya Str., 21, office 406
Business Center Novoslobodskaya 21,
Moscow 127030, Russia
Tel:
(7) 495 981 35 41
Fax:
(7) 495 981 35 42
E-mail:
anna.kisteneva@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.ru
Singapore
Thorn Lighting (Singapore) Pte Ltd
5 Kaki Bukit Crescent, 04-02 Koyotech
Building, 416238 Singapore
Tel:
(65) 6844 5800
Fax:
(65) 6745 7707
E-mail:
info.sg@thornlighting.com
Sweden
Thorn Lighting AB
Industrigatan, Box 305, SE-261 23
Landskrona, Sweden
Tel:
(46) 418 520 00
Fax:
(46) 418 265 74
E-mail:
info.se@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.se
United Arab Emirates
Thorn Lighting Ltd Dubai
Al Shoala Building, Office 301,
Block E, Airport road, P.O. Box 1200,
Deira, Dubai, UAE
Tel:
(971) 4 2940181
Fax:
(971) 4 2948838
E-mail:
tlluae@emirates.net.ae
Thorn Gulf LLC
Al Shoala Building, Office 301/2, Block E,
Airport road, P.O. Box 22672, Deira,
Dubai, UAE
Tel:
(971) 4 2948938
Fax:
(971) 4 2948838
E-mail:
thorng@emirates.net.ae
United Kingdom
Tel:
(44) 20 8732 9800
Fax:
(44) 20 8732 9801
E-mail:
brochures.uk@thornlighting.com
Thorn Olympics Sports Lighting Team
Tel:
07796 303176
E-mail:
olympicsteamuk@thornlighting.com
International Sales
Tel:
(44) 20 8732 1915
Fax:
(44) 20 8732 1911
E-mail:
www.thornlighting.com
Thorn Lighting is constantly developing and improving its products. All descriptions, illustrations, drawings and specifications in this publication present only
general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. The right is reserved to change specifications without prior notification or public announcement.
All goods supplied by the company are supplied subject to the companys General Conditions of Sale, a copy of which is available on request.
All measurements are in millimetres and weights in kilograms unless otherwise stated.
Publication No: 434 (INT) Publication Date: 06/08
Technical Handbook
Technical Handbook
Denmark
Thorn Lighting A/S
Albuen 44, 6000 Kolding, Denmark
Tel:
(45) 7696 3600
Fax:
(45) 7696 3601
E-mail:
info.dk@thornlighting.com
Website: www.thornlighting.dk
India
Thorn Lighting India Pvt. Ltd
RH-2 Nirav CHS, 636A, 90 Ft. D.P. Road,
Near Thakur Polytechnic
400 101 Mumbai, India
Tel:
(91) 22285 41056
Fax:
(91) 22285 1120
E-mail:

Thorn Technical Handbook

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Thorn Technical Handbook

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Lighting people and places

Thorn Lighting Main Offices

Graphics: Juice Creative

Price 15 GBP/20 EUR. Not for resale.

The Mechanics of Seeing

Recommendations for Good Lighting

Applications and Techniques

6.7 Lighting maintenance

Lamps, LEDs and Circuits

Standards and Directives

Performance is the achievement of visual effectiveness, meeting

Efficiency is conserving energy and effort, reducing CO2

2 The Mechanics of Seeing

2.1 What is light?

Fig. 2.1 The importance of vision

2.2 The eye and vision

Fig. 2.2 The electromagnetic spectrum

Fig. 2.3 P hotopic and Scotopic visual response

The Mechanics of Seeing

2.3 Lighting fundamentals

Fig. 2.4 Illuminance

Fig. 2.5 Luminance

Glare may be calculated in a variety of ways depending upon

8 | The Mechanics of Seeing

Fig. 3.1 Diffuse reflection

With specular reflection the light reflects from a surface as if

Fig. 3.2 Specular reflection

Fig. 3.3 Mixed specular and diffuse reflection

Fig. 3.4 T ransmission of a ray of light through a

When light passes from one transparent medium to another of

Fig. 3.5 R efraction of a ray of light through a

4 Recommendations for good lighting

Section 4.1 Indoor workplaces

Section 4.2 Outdoor workplaces

Section 4.3 Sports

Section 4.4 Emergency

Section 4.5 Roads

Section 4.6 Tunnel

Note that these recommendations are based upon the European

Recommendations for Good Lighting

Recommendations for good lighting

This is the maintained average illuminance, that is the

This is the minimum value of illuminance that is

This is maximum value of glare rating that is permissible

This is the maintained average luminance, that is the

This is the colour rendering index for a lamp and defines

This is the surround ratio, which is a value used in

This is the threshold increment, which is a measure of

UGRL This is the limiting maximum value of glare calculated by

This is the uniformity of illuminance along a line, being

This is the uniformity of illuminance across any

12 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

Recommendations for good lighting

Recommendations for Good Lighting

4.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)

14 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

4.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)

Recommendations for Good Lighting

4.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)

16 | Recommendations for Good Lighting

4.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)

Selection of veneer woods

Quality control, inspection

Places of public assembly

Fig. 2.3 P hotopic and Scotopic visual response

Fig. 3.4 T ransmission of a ray of light through a

Fig. 3.5 R efraction of a ray of light through a